BPP 180: Top 10 Interviews of 2019 and Your Biggest Take Aways!

Enjoy the videos and music you love, upload original content, and share it all with friends, family, and the world on YouTube.

2019 has been a fantastic year for the podcast. I learned a lot about photography through the interviews I had with photographers, and so did you!

I took the top 10 most downloaded podcast interviews of 2019 and reached out to you the listeners for your biggest takeaways and shared them here in this 2019 wrap up episode.

The top 10 most downloaded interviews of 2019, in numerical order, are

Valerie Jardin

Nick Church

Andy Mumford

Mark Hemmings

Sara Blanco

Marc Silber

Chris Owens

Dan Milnor

Dave Maze

Hannah Chia

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

BPP 179: How To Use Your New Camera That You Got For The Holidays!

Congratulations on your new camera! You are about to embark on a long and fulfilling journey into the world of photography. You are full of hopes and momentum to start taking great photos and I am here to help you get there.

But with all the buttons and dials on your camera, you may be feeling overwhelmed. So today I’m going to help you get started with your new camera!

It all comes down to just 3 settings that will control every image you take.

ISO

Aperture

and Shutter Speed.

Today I break down what each one does and how you can use them to get the photos you dream of taking!


Resources:

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00 This is the beginner photography podcast. And today I'm going to help you learn how to use your new DSLR that you got for the holidays. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:09 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, father, home brewer, LA Dodger fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer Raymond Hatfield.

Raymond: 00:38 Welcome each and every one of you. I am your host Raman Hatfield and I hope that you have a good holiday and you were able to spend some time with family and friends and everyone that you love most. You know that the holidays are a time where many of us get the gifts that we may not buy for ourselves throughout the year, that we know we might feel guilty for spending, you know, a certain amount of money on ourselves when we have a family to feed and, you know, bills to pay. And one of those, you know, gifts very well could have been a brand new camera for you. And if that is you, then guess what, you are in the right place because today I'm going to help you learn how to use your new camera and just start taking great photos. But if you're new here, let me go ahead and introduce myself real quick.

Raymond: 01:30 I am Raymond Hatfield. I'm a wedding photographer here in very chilly Indianapolis, Indiana. And my path in photography started actually in high school. You know, a lot of people, you know get started early and then the, you know, they've been in it forever and that was kinda my path, but that's not the only path, right? So my path obviously started when I was in high school because it was a little bit different. I actually loved making movies and I loved making movies so much that I went to film school because I wanted to learn how to become a, a Hollywood cinematographer. The person who controls, you know, the lights person who controls camera movement person who works with the camera department. You know, I'd be the head of a camera department. But after graduating I found out that I actually had more of a passion for photography than I did cinematography.

Raymond: 02:20 And that was great because all of the technical skills of working a camera as a cinematographer transferred into photography. Now there were some, there were some slight changes, but overall it was the same thing. Now the camera is simply a creative tool and that creative tool, let me capture, you know, these moments in these memories, but in my own unique voice and vision, when you are, you know, working on a quote unquote Hollywood set, you may be head of the camera, department of the camera, the lenses, the lighting. But you still have to answer to people, the director, you have to answer to the producer. You have to answer to all these people around you. Even the sound guy like, well, if we do that, then you know, I can't do that and I need to do that to get my job. And then you've got to figure out, okay, so what do I do as a work around?

Raymond: 03:12 So it's not as creative in the, in the film world as it is in photography. And quickly you learn how little gear has to do with making these great, you know, images or videos. And when it came to photography, again, I, I, I firmly believe that a great photo is just so much more than the sum of its settings. And that moment is what matters most. It's not the gear. But when you come from a world of $60,000 movie cameras and you know, 30,000 like a whole box full of $30,000 lenses, and I'm not even kidding, like $25,000 tripods with a $20,000 tripod head, it's hard to get around the the point of understanding how little that gear matters because you know, you're taught that the better the gear that you have, the better result you'll get. And where I think that's true is that it just makes the T when you have a better tool, it makes it easier to achieve what it is that you're looking for.

Raymond: 04:19 But it by no means changes the overall product. But once I knew that it wasn't the gear that was making, you know, great movies or great photographs, I knew that many other, you know, new photographers like yourself will struggle with the exact same thing. And if you can get over that, once you learn that the technicals or once you learn, once you learn the technicals, you'll be able to create and capture photos that just truly mean the world to you. So it may sound like I'm talking down about gear and you may be thinking, well, gear has to matter. You know, the photos from my DSLR look way crispier then, then the photos from my cell phone and your right gear does matter. But it only matters until it doesn't. And what I mean by that is that the difference between an image taken with a cell phone and a entry level $500 DSLR is a massive difference.

Raymond: 05:24 But the difference between a $500 DSLR and a $5,000 DSLR is unnoticeable unless you are in the top 1% of the top 1% of photographers who have, you know, just been shooting forever. But that's, that's off subject. Let's go ahead and learn how to use your new camera to start capturing the world around you. Okay. What do you say? Are you ready for this? I am. So let's kind of tackle that main thing like I was just talking about a second ago. What is then the difference between the camera that's in your cell phone and your new DSLR camera? Well, there are several differences, but mainly it is the ability to change lenses and it's the size of the camera itself. And when I say size, I mean size is more than just the physical size of the camera that's in your hand. It's also the camera's sensor.

Raymond: 06:23 Now every single camera has a sensor. In the film days, the sensor was the film itself. It's the piece that light falls upon and captures the image. As I said, this is the replacement to film, but unlike film where you would take one photo and then you would move to the next slide of film to take another photo, and then you're limited to 24 or 36 photos, a digital sensor, it resets after every photo of it's taken and then saves it to the memory card. So you can take hundreds hundreds of thousands of photos with a single digital sensor, whereas you can only take one photo per piece of film. But what makes the sensor and your cell phone different from the sensor in your DSLR is the physical size of the sensor. So the image sensor in your DSLR is, is simply much, much larger of a sensor than the one that is in your phone.

Raymond: 07:31 And when you have a larger sensor, this allows you to take in more light in dim situations. And it is also in part responsible for that out of focus background that everybody loves so much. So now with cell phones, I know that we can kind of replicate that with a portrait mode. But that's a, that's a, that's a digital thing. That's not a physical change in the image itself. And with a DSLR, you're actually creating a physical separation between your subject and the background. Okay, so let's get back to lenses for a second. So I know that new phones have multiple lenses to give you different fields of view, otherwise known as focal links or how wide or how zoomed in a photo is. Now with a DSLR, you have the ability to have a pretty much endless focal lengths, which really opens up the door to letting you have complete control of an image.

Raymond: 08:32 You have the ability to use vintage lenses, which give you a specific look or a tilt shift lens to take a specialty photo. Now these are things that you can now do with your DSLR that you can not physically do with a with a phone. Now there's apps that help create the effect, but it's all digital and it's not, it's not true. So it, it appears more fake. So those are, those are really the two differences between a the camera that's in your phone and your new camera that you got for the holidays, your new DSLR. Now let's talk about the main advantage of a DSLR and that it has over the cell phone in your pocket and that main advantage to you as a photographer. Now we're not talking about anything like technical here, but it's simply control. Now a DSLR can take, it can take snapshots and I consider a snapshot just to be like a, a reactionary photo.

Raymond: 09:31 You see something happening, you pull out your camera and then you just snap. You just, you know, you just snapped the photo, you just press the button, you let the camera make all the decisions that capture that photo. But with control, you can be intentional with your photography. And when you're intentional, you grow and will become a better photographer. So then that begs the question, how does a DSLR give us control over our images? Now you may not know this because now we're going to kind of talk about the technical side of photography. And it may not be clear by looking at the dozens of buttons on your camera. But every photo ever taken was made by controlling just three simple settings. And that is ISO or ISO, aperture and shutter speed. Right now those words may seem totally foreign to you. Don't worry.

Raymond: 10:31 Let me explain. With the DSLR, you have independent control of these three settings to use and manipulate to get literally any photo that you want, any photo. So just to be clear, your phone and you know, a, a, a point and shoot camera also use ISO, aperture and shutter speed. But generally the, the camera automatically controls what those settings are going to be to grab the image. So guess what, without knowing it, you've been taking photos using ISO, aperture, and shutter speed your whole life. But now that you have a DSLR, you can be in control of those three settings and control how those settings are used. So ISO, aperture, and shutter speed all have the same job to control the amount of light that is captured by the camera sensor. Now while all three settings have the same job, they just simply do it in a, you know, indifferent ways that all compliment each other.

Raymond: 11:34 Let's think about your car. Your car is a hunk of metal and plastic, right? It gets you from one place to another. Well, a car would be useless without an engine. It would just be a shell. Okay? So let's go ahead and put an engine in your car. Fantastic. But even with an engine, you're not going anywhere without tires. So as you can see, all of these things work independently on their own, but together they compliment each other to get you from point a to point B. And your camera is the same with ISO, aperture and shutter speed. So let's break them down and talk about how they work and why you would want to control them independently. But let me preface this by saying that you can only control all of these settings by shooting in manual mode on your camera. So if you look at your camera, there's going to be a dial on the top of the camera itself.

Raymond: 12:36 Something maybe with a little small green box on it. Turn it from that. Turn the dial from that green box to theM dial for full control of your camera, which is infer manual. Okay, so ISL, this is how sensitive your image sensor is to the light that comes in the camera. Think of this almost as like, I'm fake light. Okay? If you're in a low light situation, you can rise up your ISO or you can raise up your ISO and your image will get brighter, almost like more light is being introduced to whatever it is that's in front of you. And it's fantastic to be able to control this because in the film days you had to buy a whole roll of film that had a specific ISO. So you'd buy an entire roll of film that was ISO 400 and you were not able to adjust it.

Raymond: 13:30 You know, you weren't able to adjust it on a shot per shot basis like you can today with digital technology. With film, you had to run out the entire roll of 24 36 photos until you could change your ISO. But again, you could change your ISO for every single photo with digital technology. So this is fantastic stuff. A note though about ISO and that is the higher that you go ISO 3,200 ISO 6,400, your image will get brighter, but it will also get noisy or grainy or not as sharp because you're, what you're doing is you're artificially boosting the digital sensor, the digital signal to the sensor. So be aware of this and you know, the problem is, is that every camera's ISO performance is a little bit different. So some cameras will get, I mean, I'm unusably noisy and ISO 800, which is pretty low, while other cameras can shoot up to ISO 12,800 and you're still able to deliver a perfectly usable image.

Raymond: 14:42 Now that's just something that you have to discover on your own. And it also changes according to your own tastes. Some people want to shoot everything in ISO 100 or ISO 64 to get the least amount of noise possible while others, you know, myself included, will shoot as high as I need to go to get the shot. Because once again, it's the moment that matters most and not the gear so much to me. But anyway, that's a personal taste and that's something that you, you just have to go out and experiment and find on your own. So that is ISO. So next to the next setting is aperture. Now, aperture controls the amount of light that passes through the lens. So the aperture is not in the camera itself. It is physically in the lens. So when you buy a new camera lens, this is one of the most important technical specs to look at, which is how large the maximum aperture is.

Raymond: 15:33 And it's the reason why you can buy a a hundred dollar 50 millimeter lens and a $1,500 50 millimeter lens. It's simply because, well, part of it is the, the lens construction, but mainly it is the, it's the maximum aperture. So the larger the maximum aperture, the more light you can allow in. And this is great. Once again in low light situations, having the ability to allow more light into the lens, you can keep your ISO lower. So the difference between F two and F 2.8 is one stop of light, which means that you can go from shooting it ISO 1600 times. So 800 and ISO 800 is going to be much cleaner, less noisy than shooting at 1600 so your lens, having the ability to open up even further allows you to keep your ISO lower. Now the lens that comes with your camera generally has a maximum aperture of F 3.5 and as you zoom in, like you know, when you zoom in close to something, it goes from 3.5 to F 5.6 and that's because to save cost, the camera makers use what's called a variable aperture lens, meaning that the maximum aperture will change and get smaller as you zoom now it works.

Raymond: 16:58 You can, you know, you can capture photos, but it's no one's definition of ideal. And it an aperture of F 5.6. It is very hard to get an out-of-focus background. Now it's ideal to have a maximum aperture of F two or larger. And that's because aperture not only controls how much light you allow to pass through your lens, but it also controls how out of focus your background is. Yes, if you want that out-of-focus background, you need a maximum aperture of F two or larger. And that is why I cannot recommend enough the Nikon or Canon 50 millimeter 1.8 lens. As you are first lens purchase at F 1.8, you can get beautiful out of focus backgrounds that really are, you know, professional looking results for just $150. I mean, in the camera world, that's, that's a no brainer to purchase. And that's why I included it on my list of five essential pieces of gear every beginner photographer needs which you can find that in the show notes of this episode by swiping up on on this episode in your podcast player or by going to the resources page at beginner photography, podcast.com.

Raymond: 18:25 You know, and I also have recommendations for reputable memory cards so that you don't lose all of your images from a shoot. So a check it out. There's a lot of great stuff there. Okay. Lastly, the third setting that we have is shutter speed. Now shutter speed controls how long the light coming in through the lens falls upon the sensor. So shutter speed is measured in a fraction, like one 50th or one 320th. That is a fraction of a second. So a shutter speed of one, three 20th or one three 20th means that the shutter is only open for one, 320th of a second. That is a tiny fraction, but shutter speed also controls the amount of motion blur. So you know, not background blur that everybody loves, but motion blur. Like when somebody is walking fast and you go to take a picture in there, they're blurry in the frame.

Raymond: 19:23 The faster the shutter speed that you have, like one 500th of a second or one one thousands of a second or even higher, the quicker the shutter opens and closes to freeze that motion. Now on the opposite side of that spectrum, you can also slow down your shutter speed for a creative effect. A show's a slow shutter speed of a race car can make it look like that car is moving much faster than it actually is. A slow shutter of a moving waterfall can make the appear. The water appears silky smooth in glass, like it's 100% up to you. So together you use these three settings to control the light and capture an image. Now once an image is captured, you have two options as to what to do with your image. You can either share it right away or you can edit the photo before sharing it.

Raymond: 20:17 Now with editing, you can be as light or as heavy as you want. You know, you can raise up the shadow slightly to bring out more detail or warm up the white balance. Now these are just light edits. These are things that that can be done in just seconds and don't really change the overall photo. Or you can take the image into Photoshop and remove blemishes or add sun players and then you are creating more you're creating a piece of digital art. Now there's no right or wrong way to edit just because like photography editing is also subjective. Whatever you know you love, somebody else is going to hate. So your goal however, is to make something that you like, make something that you are happy with. And in the beginning, see you're going to find that you are just limited in what you know, so you won't be able to get exactly what you want on the first try.

Raymond: 21:19 But to me, that's the beauty of it because photography is an art and it is not a technical trade. So therefore it's it's never ending. There's always something new to learn. Now, right now in the beginning you're learning these foundations, how to use the camera, how to see light, how to edit and process your images. And then after that it's going to go deeper and then it's going to go deeper and then it's going to go deeper. But the key to photography is to always be curious, to always pursue what makes you curious because you don't know what you don't know. So try not to get upset when your photo doesn't turn out how you want it. Simply ask yourself, what is it about the photo that isn't how you saw it in your head? Maybe it's that you don't like how the sky is overexposed and it's all white and you can't see the clouds.

Raymond: 22:22 Okay? Then you need to learn how to get a better exposure. And then after that you can learn about the capabilities in editing, you know, select portions of an image. And then after that you can learn about a physical gradient, neutral density filter. And that's going to give you the look in camera. But it all starts with that curiosity. And it's only satisfied when explored and looked at with that beginner's mind. So remember that photography is a long road and you're about to embark on it and it's much easier to just sit back and enjoy the ride instead of, you know, always looking at your watch, wondering why it's taking so long. So if you want more helpful tips like this, consider subscribing to the podcast because it is free and it means that every week the newest episode of the podcast with world-class photographers is going to be delivered right to your phone and you won't want to miss next week's episode where I edit together the biggest lessons that I learned from the top 10 most downloaded interviews of the year.

Raymond: 23:31 It's, it's a photography masterclass if, if you've ever heard one and it's all free and it's delivered to you weekly when you subscribe to the podcast. So I hope that that helped you today. Learn or get a basic understanding of your camera and how to get started using, you know, your new camera that you got for the holidays. So that is it. Until next week, I want you to get out or start shooting. I just want you to start shooting. I want you to make more. I want you to do more and I want you to make more with the gear that you got because it's perfect. All right, talk soon.

Outro: 24:11 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 178: How to Set Photography Goals that Stick!

Setting goals can be a difficult task. Well, setting goals isn’t difficult but setting goals that stick is a difficult task. We know this because 83% of new years resolutions are broken by February. Therefore the problem to solve is how to set BETTER goals. Today I share my 9 steps process for setting photography goals that stick.

Become A Premium Member to access the Goal Setting Workshop!

Step 1: Realize you need to make a change

You can only make change when you WANT to change.

Step 2: Figure out WHERE you need to make a change

Ask yourself “What feels broken” “What do I need help with” because where you feel the most pain you can make the most growth.

Step 3: Set More Epic Goals

Don’t set goals too crazy or too simple. “Book 60 weddings” when you have never shot a wedding is crazy. “Learn Photography” it too simple. Create a goal thats in between.

Step 4: Write down your goals and make it seen

When you physically write out your goals on paper you’re 43% more likely to achieve them. When you post them somewhere you see them every day you increase that chance exponentially. My goals are posted above my computer.

Step 5: Make Baby steps

Make baby steps that it will take to achieve your goals to keep the momentum going.

Step 6: Make a challenge out of it

When you turn your goals into a game you’re more likely to keep up with the baby steps. Write them down on a calendar and mark them off every day.

Step 7: Check in with your goals

Set a date on your calendar quarterly to check in with your goals, re assess, and plan for the next quarter for new goals.

Step 8: Hang out with people who are also moving forward

“You are the sum of the 5 people closest to you” When you spend more time with photographers doing great things, you will elevate your skills and desire to do great things. Nowhere is that more important than when you go from hobby photographer to making money with your camera. Surrounding yourself a group of others dedicated to growing their business and making money is the key to quick growth.

Become a premium member and get access to the premium members facebook group to surround yourself with like-minded hungry photographers!

Step 9: Simulate what your life would look like after you hit your goals

Achieving your goals both planning and motivation. Picturing your life after you achieve your goals will give you the motivation you need to keep going!

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00 This is the beginner photography podcast. And today we are setting photography goals for 2020. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:08 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, father, home brewer, LA Dodger fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer Raymond Hatfield.

Raymond: 00:37 Welcome back to the beginning photography podcast. I am Raymond Hatfield and if you are new, I am so thankful that you are here and giving the beginner of photography podcast a chance to hopefully learn and grow your photography here in the future. I know that podcasts are kind of a weird place to, to learn something visual like photography, but people seem to be enjoying it and I hope that you do. Do so. The holidays are obviously here. New years is, is quickly approaching. And you may remember last week I talked about it was the state of the podcast addressed where I talked about the podcast itself, how it grew in, in 2019. Some of the changes that were made as well as some of the changes that are going to be made going forward. And I made a lot of those changes going forward based on goals that I have, personal goals and business goals as well.

Raymond: 01:37 And I've had some questions kind of about goals, right? Because goals seemed to be this maybe not elusive thing, but it's not, it's not taken as seriously as, as they should be. And I'll admit sometimes I don't take goals as seriously as, as I should be taking them as well. But I do reach my goals from time to time. So I kind of wanted to talk about the the process in which I go about setting goals. But it's interesting to think that when we, when we think forward, it's, it's fun and you can be optimistic and you can set those goals or those resolutions. Now that it's the new year or coming up on the new year and we come up with these goals and resolutions. But according to a survey that I read, 83% of new year's resolutions are broken by February. So we start these things in December, right?

Raymond: 02:33 Like December 31st birthday, January, let's do this. And 83% of new year's resolutions are broken by February. That's just one month. That is one 12th of the year. It took 83% of the people to get rid of or break or, or lose track of their goals. You know, and a goal is something that like you inside is something that you really, really want to work towards. So why are we breaking these goals within, you know, just 30 days a small fraction of what you had committed to, to doing said goal. But what that tells me is that by creating goals, people want change. People don't just create goals to just to do it, but people want change, but they simply don't know how to achieve it. If you didn't know how to achieve it, you would just follow the steps and then you would achieve your goal rather quickly, right?

Raymond: 03:35 Or you know, whatever. If it's a big goal, maybe not quickly, but you would continue to follow the steps until you reach that goal. So I did a lot of thinking about this and I believe that because as somebody who has, you know, lost many new year's resolutions, I think that for me the breakdown is often in the goal itself. It's not that we lose motivation, it's not that we want to give up. It's not that we're like, you know what, that was a bad goal. I'm just going to move forward with my life. It's the goal itself. So having a better goal can be the difference between having a successful year and having one like 83% of the population. And remember that just 83% of the population by February. You know, I don't even know the stats on a full year, but I would assume that it's closer to 98% of people.

Raymond: 04:35 So what do I mean by, by it's the goal that needs changed? What do I mean by that? Well, it's, it's said that people overestimate what they can do in a month, but they underestimate what they could do in a year. And that is true for me. That is absolutely true for me. You know, many times I will get so excited about an idea that I will just go all in right there. I'll kind of push my other work aside and I will go all in right there, immediately start getting work done, but I'm not going to be able to finish that goal in one day. Right? Whatever that task is. Maybe it's, I'm working on a new 10 day photography challenge. Hint, hint, maybe it's something like that, right? So I'll go all in in one day, but because it takes time you know, say next week I've lost some of that motivation and I don't, you know, complete it.

Raymond: 05:33 Or you know, maybe something that might be more relatable. Oftentimes I will, you know, say like next year, next year things will be different. And, you know, there's simply, there's simply not because I like, I want, I want results fast. I want what I want and I want it now. I mean, who doesn't, not to sound like a, you know, like a cry baby or, or you know, anything like that. But my point is, who doesn't want what they want right now? Like I understand that things need to be worked for, but in the perfect world, whatever, you know, you want, you could wave a magic wand or whatever and get it right at that moment. But we know that that's not, that's not how it works. So we jump in to these goals that we have and sometimes we lose that steam. So today we're going to talk about that and how to get better goals.

Raymond: 06:25 But before we jump into that, this episode is brought to you by the premium members of the podcast. So the premium members, if you're unaware, they are, they are just hungry to grow the business side of their camera and start making real money with their talents. And to do that, there really needs to be a plan in place. And a plan starts, I think, from a goal. Otherwise, like if you don't know where you're going, how do you know how to get there? Right? So a plan starts with a goal. So this episode is brought to you by me premium members of the podcast because simply because they're taking action to make the change that they want to see in their lives. So guys, this one's for y'all. Okay. So let's talk about the goals themselves and how to set goals.

Raymond: 07:16 Excuse me. So we need to realize, number one, this is a nine step process. Number one. Step number one is that you need to realize that you need to make a change. So to make a change, we have to want a change. You know? Otherwise, if we just change things just Willy nilly there, there's no, there's no reason to just change things Willy nilly to make a change. You have to want that change. We have to accept that the change is a needed to be the person or the photographer that we want to be. And this, I mean, this whole thing is going to apply more than just business. This applies to photography as well. Right? So that quote is what is it doing, doing the same thing over and over and expecting different results is the definition of insanity. And I don't know about you, but you know, on many occasions, and this is hard because nobody likes talking about where they're falling short.

Raymond: 08:20 But you know, on many occasions I've said, like I said earlier, you know, next year will be the year. But it's simply a hope saying next year will be the year. That's just hope. You know, next year I will be at my goal weight, but then I just do the same thing. You know, new year's day we go out to, to, I hop for breakfast and it's just like, Oh, well, you know, whatever, next year, but next year will be the year. Things will be different. So realizing that you need to make a change, you have to want that change. So think about those areas in your life where you're just not happy. Things feel broken, you know, where are those areas? Is it personal? Think about your photography, right? Do you want to figure out how to pose better? Do you want to figure out how to shoot? And men, you know, what are the things that you feel like you're lacking in photography?

Raymond: 09:07 And then you can work towards those things. So that brings us to, you know, number two is to figure out where you need to make that change. So again, what are those things that you are unhappy with? Is it your posing? Is it your ability to shoot manual? Is it a, you know, even on the business side, is it the amount of clients coming in or not coming in? You know, is it the amount of clients not coming in? Because that can be something that can cause you a unhappiness that can tell you that a change needs to happen. Maybe it's something like a, you know, just simply how and when you're going to reach out to people when they you know, send you an email about your services. Maybe it's that a, you have a lot of camera shake when you're taking landscape photos.

Raymond: 09:51 If these are the areas that you're unhappy with, then these are going to be the areas where the most amount of growth can happen. Now, one thing is that you need to make sure that these things are relevant, right? As a wedding photographer, I'm not technically happy with my landscape photography, but if the goal doesn't align with where it is that you want to go, then maybe don't worry about it right now. You know? But if photography is a hobby for you and you want to get better, even reverse that, right you, you love landscape photography. But maybe you know a coworker, neighbor, family member asks you to do a shoot for them and you did it and you weren't happy with the photos at all, right? Posing was, you know, it fell flat, you know, whatever it was and you were unhappy with that, but you don't want to move forward with portraits.

Raymond: 10:40 Then don't worry about your posing right now. Worry about the thing that makes you happy, that you want to continue to do. And once you become really good and proficient at that, then you can explore the other ideas. But right now, just focus on that one thing and figure out where it is that you're unhappy and create that relevant goal towards what it is that you want to move forward. So in doing some research about goals, I found it interesting. The military, the United States military developed a series of questions to assess and grow after you know, their missions or in our case shoots. So we can apply this exact, exact same thing, exact same questioning. So after shoot, ask yourself these three questions. After every wedding, after every you know, photography trip asks yourself, you know, I'm maybe even on the way home and this is something that I'm going to start doing because I really loved this idea.

Raymond: 11:34 So on the way home from a wedding, I'm going to ask myself, well, what happened, right? What happened that I'm not happy with? Because we can always talk about the things that went well. But what happened that I wasn't happy with? You know, if it's, Oh, well the mom of the bride, you know, did this or whatever, I can't control that. But maybe if my clients look stiff. Okay, let's go with that. Okay. So what happened? My clients look stiff. Question number two. Well, why did it happen? Why did it happen? Why did they look stiff? Maybe it's because I didn't spend enough time getting to know them. So they felt a little awkward in front of the camera or maybe it's, you know, that they were not, maybe, maybe it was because I wasn't prepared that the couple had such a height difference, you know?

Raymond: 12:13 Whoa, I didn't know that. You know, the bride was you know, five one and the groom was six, two, you know, I was not ready for that. So all of my posing looks a little little off. Okay, great. So now how can you improve that? Oh, well I could I could watch, you know, tutorials online. I could buy a book specifically on posing for you know, wedding photos because surely there's going to have to be something inside of there that talks about dealing with high difference. Okay. So now I, I figured out what happened. I figured out why it happened and I figured out how I can improve. This is fantastic. Now you can even move that into the business side of things. So what happened? Nobody is asking me to photograph them. I'm just not getting any, any leads. I'm not getting anything like that.

Raymond: 13:03 Okay. Well why did that happen? Well, maybe it's because I'm new. I'm not advertising myself. Okay. So, so nobody knows who I am if I'm not advertising myself, if I'm not putting myself out there, nobody knows who I am. And if nobody knows who I am there, they're not going to contact me. So how can I improve that? Well, to get people to know who I am, I could learn how to get started with Facebook ads. Perfect. So after every shoot, after every wedding, after every photography trip, asked yourself what happened that you weren't happy with? Why did that happen? And then how do you improve? Because again, when you figure out what it is that you are unhappy with, then you know what you know you can do to change it. But by asking these questions, you can figure out how to change it.

Raymond: 13:53 And that is the key right there. It's not figuring out what it is that you're unhappy with. The key to a goal is figuring out how to change it. Okay? So step number three is we need to make more Epic goals. So oftentimes when it comes to goals, we go one of two ways. We go crazy with it. I want to shoot 60 weddings this year, even though I've never shot a wedding before. That's crazy. Or we go to safe or or vague, you know, this year I want to learn photography. Oh well you know what? There is a good chance that neither of those things are going to happen. If those are your goals, there's a great chance that neither of those things are going to happen. Because if you have never shot a wedding, shooting 60 weddings in one year is going to be incredibly hard to obtain.

Raymond: 14:44 I mean, unless you know, it's just going to be incredibly hard to obtain for whoever it is and it could totally discourage you, you know, for when, when you only have four weddings booked by July because then you think there's no way that I'm going to book 55 56 more weddings in the next, you know, half of the year and then you just mentally check out and then that goal is no longer realized. So that is going to crazy with it. And then it backfiring, you know, they say, you know, shoot for the stars. If you miss, you know, at least you'll hit the moon. You know, that's great, but nobody reaches for this. You know what I mean? Like in real life, nobody, we've never planned to go to another star. It is just so far away. Like the closest star is like a hundred thousand light years away.

Raymond: 15:32 There's no way that we're ever going to get to another star, you know, in our lifetime. It's just too far. It's too unfeasible to happen. You know, if you were to say, if you'd never shot a wedding before and you wanted to shoot 20 weddings in a year, I think that that is pretty crazy. You know that, I mean, that's a lot of weddings. So to shoot 60 is just crazy. But even if we go the other way, if your goal was to simply quote unquote learn photography, then you can get overwhelmed by the amount of tutorials, the amount of videos, podcasts, books, blog posts, you know, there's just so much. And when you don't make any progress because you're, you're, you're spreading all of your attention everywhere, not in one spot. Then once again, you simply, you check out. So what we need to be doing is setting goals somewhere in between, in the Epic zone, right?

Raymond: 16:30 Not too, not crazy, not vague, just Epic. Like this would be amazing if I could get this goal right. And then we need to get smart with our goals. And I'm sure that you've heard of smart goals before. It's a very common term when it comes to goal setting. And that a smart goal is something that is specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and time bound. Right? So learn photography is not specific. Learn photography is not measurable. Learn photography is attainable. It is relevant, but it's also not time-bound. If you were to say, I want to book seven weddings by March 30th that is a smart goal. That is specific. You want, you want to book weddings, it's measurable. You want to book seven weddings, it's attainable. Yeah. I think if you've never shot a wedding before, you could probably book seven weddings in a year. It's relevant because you want to get into weddings or photography and it's time-bound because you want to do it by March 30th if you've never shot a wedding again, you know, I bet that you know enough people who could refer you to maybe even three friends that are getting married that year.

Raymond: 17:45 You know? And then at that point you just need to book for five more. And January slash February is just the height of engagement. So I think that that is entirely possible. Entirely possible. But if you wanted to book seven weddings by March 30th, you could do it. And that is a smart goal. Okay, so now tip number four, write down your goals and make them seen. So when we write down our goals, you are instantly 42% more likely to achieve them. And I think the reason is, I don't know why, but I remember in in in high school I was told, you know, if you actually physically write down your goals, it's just easier to remember. It's easier to pull back up that information because when you're typing you can kind of, if you know, like where your fingers are, you can kind of be paying attention to something else and type at the same time.

Raymond: 18:40 Like, I'm not, I am not a multitasker, you know, by any stretch of the imagination. For me to be doing something, I have to be immersed in that thing to be able to do it well. But when it comes to typing, I can, you know, I can be typing and then my wife will say something and I'll turn around and I'll still be able to, you know, so that I can pay attention to her and I'll still be able to finish up my sentence on the keyboard. But when it comes to writing, if she starts talking, I have to stop. I have to completely stop writing, otherwise I'm going to start writing what she is saying. So when you write down your goals, it, it becomes more achievable because it's like baked into your brain. I don't know the science behind that, but that's a a scientist Raymond says that when you write things down, they're baked into your brain.

Raymond: 19:26 That sounds horrible. Anyway. So after you do that, you know, you're instantly 42% more likely to achieve those goals. Now, to make that even the likelihood of you achieving your goals, even more likely, you need to put those goals someplace where you're going to look at them every single day. Now me personally, I have a, I have a a word document that I, well first I take a legal pad and I write out all my goals for the year and I kind of workshop those ideas and then when I'm done with them, good, I got the ideas, I know what my goals are for the year. Then I put them into a word document with a keyboard. But then I print that out and then I hang it right above my computer. I'm looking at it right now because every day I'm at my computer, or at least several times throughout the week I'm at my computer.

Raymond: 20:13 I can look at those goals. You know, I got a minute, I just look up. Okay, those are the goals and then I just take a mental note. Where am I at on those goals. Okay. Yeah, I need to put in more work there. I'm kind of falling behind there, but you know, next month is going to change a little bit. So that should be okay. Okay, so I should actually focus on this right now and let's go and then I get to work, you know, so put it above your computer monitor, make a a background for your phone. You know, I also made the lock screen of my phone, a, a, a goal of mine last year and it really helped push me forward to get to where I am this year. You could also, you know, if you only have one or two goals, you can even repeat them every time.

Raymond: 20:58 You know, there's a little a brain hack. Once again, Dr. Raymond here, a repeat those goals. Every time you do something specific, like every time you brush your teeth, every time you get into the car, you know, you gotta do whatever you can to not let the excitement of your goals lose steam. So every time you get into the car, you know I want to expose my skies better. You know, brushing your teeth, you know, I want to expose my skies better. I want to you know, get better at posing, even though those weren't smart goals there. But those just came off the top of my head. Whenever you get into those things because you do them at least once a day, I hope you brush your teeth once a day. If not though, you know, whenever. Then once again, it's going to increase the likelihood of you achieving your goals and make sure that you don't lose steam when moving forward, when you know, as, as time goes on and things start to get tough.

Raymond: 21:52 So that's step number five is to make baby steps, make a low heel stair step to get to where your goals are. So it asks yourself, how am I going to do that? How am I going to, you know, achieve my goal? What needs to be done to get there? Is it that you need a specific piece of equipment? You know, like landscape photography, you, you should, you should really have a tripod. You know, if you really want to make something interesting. Sometimes there's multiple exposures and you just can't simply do that handheld. So maybe, maybe you do need a tripod. Okay, I get it. Or maybe you need to learn something specific. Oh, I, I need to learn how to you know, price my photography. I have, I have no idea how to do that. I was just going to pick a number out of thin air.

Raymond: 22:36 I was going to research what other people in my area were charging, you know, but w you need to learn something then, then that's that goal, right? So if you want to, you know, shoot those seven weddings a year, you need to figure out that pricing. So breaking down your goal into baby steps and then you can plan it out that way. So, you know what, let's, let's work through that. So if you want to book seven weddings by March 31st from scratch you know, maybe your baby steps would be established pricing by January 5th. Okay. So now you need, you got from the first to the fifth to learn the, the you know, ins and outs of pricing, photography, and then you need to establish what your pricing is going to be by January 5th. Okay. Now you need to create a priceless PDF to be able to send to, to potential clients.

Raymond: 23:30 You need to make that by January 6th. Okay? Again, baby steps, just do one thing a day. Okay. I need to make a, a, I should probably have a contact form on my website so that people can reach out to me. Okay. I'll do that by January. When I say eighth, eighth I need to put together a folder of my best images so that I can post on social media by January 10th to let people know who I am. I'm, I'm gonna create a promotion for couples, a an album upgrade. You know, if they upgrade, if they, if they booked me for their wedding by March 31st or 30th, whatever, then they're going to get an album upgrade. So I'm going to create that promotion by January 11th. Okay. Now I need to, I should probably create a list of promotional messages to go along with those images so that when the time comes, I'm not just sitting there blankly looking at, you know, Facebook as to what I should write and then I just get lost.

Raymond: 24:23 So I should do all that by January 13th. All right, now I've got all my images. I then I need to schedule out the, the, the photos, schedule out the social media campaign by January 14th, and then on January 15th, I will reach out to some friends and family to ask if they know anybody getting married this year and obviously offer that promotion and then you just move forward, right? So those, that would be a great, you know, list of baby steps to get you going where you need to go to to achieve your goals. And I never would have come up with a set of baby steps that specific, if my goal was to learn photography, you know, and if it was to book 60 weddings, then geez, I mean this, this, these would not be baby steps. It would not be done in a year.

Raymond: 25:11 So, so therefore they wouldn't be baby steps in da. I mean that, I don't even want to think about that. That's rough. It takes years. So again, tip number five, make baby steps. So number six, make a challenge out of it. A few years ago when you know not flappy bird wants the angry birds when angry birds was like the big game, you know, on a, on the iPhone or I think it came to Android, probably did. I remember I first downloaded it and the first level was just like Slingshot, a burden to a thing. And I was like, this is like, it's so easy. Like what, why, why do people like this game? I don't get it. Like there's, there's no challenge here. And then, you know, level two was things shot a bird into a two story house. And it was like, ah, okay.

Raymond: 25:59 So I got to, okay, so I'm going to hit the bottom of this house. So the whole thing collapses under it. Got it. And then level three was like, well wait, now there's, there's, there's two houses. Okay, so how do I go? And then you figure that out. So progressively gets harder and harder. So by the time you get to level 10, just saying like, Oh, I'm like, I cannot quit. I like, how do I, this is like a whole condo, a bird condo. I got to get that thing and Oh, but now I have extra birds and they have special powers. This one's a bomb. So I could hit it and then make it explode. The whole thing. This is going to be great, but when it gets progressively harder, you know, but it starts off super easy. Like so easy that you can't not go to the next level, then that is going to you know, that challenge is going to force you to, to move forward, take that next action.

Raymond: 26:45 But if it started out on level 10, there's different types of birds. I don't know what they all do and it just like a giant house. I'm not going to keep going because it's not, it's not intuitive. It's not fun. It's, it's, but because I feel like I've earned that spot, I'm going to keep going, right? So one thing that you could do is print out a calendar, right? Just search January 20, 20 calendar, you know, PDF or whatever on Google, you're going to find a free calendar right there. You just print it out. And then you just write down those baby steps, right? Establish your pricing January 5th. So each day that goes by and you complete your goal, you cross it off, make an X, you make a streak so that you can keep going with it. When you, when you keep going, it's going to create that momentum going forward.

Raymond: 27:37 And if you've already made, you know, your, your, your list of promotional messages, PR, promotional messages to go along with those photos, you're going to schedule out those photos on social media. You're not going to stop there and be like, wow, look at all these cool photos that I got. I'm kind of busy tomorrow. I'm going to take the day off. You're not going to do that. You're going to keep going because that next step is a no brainer. It makes sense. So that's why you're going to do that. But when you make a challenge out of it, it becomes more fun and you can see that visual progress. So do that. And then that brings me to step number seven. Step number seven, you have to check in with your goals. So chances are, you know, every year you probably have three to five goals.

Raymond: 28:25 It's not just one, right? Because if it's one, it's something super vague. Learn photography. If you have 10, it's stuff that's super specific and usually pretty crazy. So a good range is three to five goals. And you know, most will probably last longer than three months, like our book, seven weddings by, by March 30th goal here. So make a date on your calendar to check in with yourself quarterly so that you can reassess those goals. Remember this, this, this should be a lifestyle setting goals. This is not like a one and done thing, right? It's not like, Oh, it's that one time of year where I set a goal. You know, I'm going to do this thing. Oh sweet, I did it and now I'm done. Now I can just sit back. It's never like that because when you book those seven weddings, okay, sweet you, you made your goal, but now where now what are you doing?

Raymond: 29:24 You don't just book seven weddings and now you're out of the photography business. You have to keep going. So you need to make this a lifestyle, these setting goals, this isn't a temporary thing and if you want to be effective in setting your goals, then you need to continue to do so. So it a quarterly review. Make that a process. Every date on your calendar. I have an entire 2020 calendar printed out right here in front of me that is a quarterly calendar and I have the dates in my calendar where I'm going to check in quarterly with myself to look to the next quarter, figure out what the next goals are going to be and then how make those baby steps where I can achieve them. I follow this exact exact process. So obviously December, you know now is the perfect time to be doing so.

Raymond: 30:15 It gives you a little bit of extra time to figure out what those goals are and how you can implement them. But the next date that I'm going to look forward and have my quarterly assessment is March 23rd and then it is June 22nd September 21st and then December 21st as well. So going forward, those are my dates that I will take the entire day to do a quarterly assessment of, you know, where, where did I come from, how did I do with my goals that I set, and then what's next, right. Or what needs to be tweaked. Often, you know, sometimes you can make a goal that is a little crazier than it is Epic. So you can reassess those goals, you can tweak them and then you can move forward. Maybe you've smashed your goal. Maybe you booked seven weddings by February 3rd right? Which is a Monday. I don't know why I said it's Monday, which is a Monday.

Raymond: 31:13 Great. So now come March. Oh, what's, what's next? You know, that was actually easier than I thought. How can I, you know, go forward with that information? Maybe I can make a slightly bigger goal next time. But when you make a quarterly process out of it, that keeps up that momentum that prevents them from losing steam and that gets you moving forward. So step number eight is to hang out with people who are also moving forward. One of the most impactful things that was ever said to me is that you are the sum of the five people you surround yourself with. And I remember I fought back my entire life who are always those, like, who are those five people that I spent growing up? Then I surrounded myself with and I looked at myself and I see a lot of myself in them. I do.

Raymond: 32:03 And then even when I would take jobs, right? And I would have coworkers, I would think of the five people who I would sit around, the five people who I would spend the most time with at work. And suddenly I would think to myself, I kind of am like them. I talk a little bit like them, I, you know, interact with them the same way that they interact with me. I am becoming the sum of the five people who I surround myself with. So you can use that to your advantage. If you spend more time with photographers, you are going to become a better photographer. If you spend time with an interesting who's taking interesting photos that's going to push you forward, that's going to make you interested in getting interesting photos. The conversations that you have will be about photography. You will look at photos, you will photograph together.

Raymond: 32:55 You will have a group to, you know, to look at those photos. Have a core group of people who will share your struggles. You can share your struggles with them and they can help you break past those things. A, you know, I, I don't know, I just don't, I have a real hard time getting, you know, that, that nice, smooth, you know, glassy, you know Creek river. Look that, you know, that you guys get, how do you, how do you do that in your photos? Oh man. Well that's, you know, that's, that's easy to do actually. You get the camera nice and low, you gotta use a long shutter speed, that's a thing. But obviously when you have a long shutter speed, then that introduces a lot of light. So I use a neutral density filter that that cuts out the amount of light so that I can continue to have that longer shutter speed.

Raymond: 33:46 And when you have a longer shutter speed, you get that motion blur. And that's how you get the look of running water or motion in your photos. Oh my gosh, this is great. I never, I wouldn't even know what to ask if I was online. How to make water look flowy. Like that doesn't make any sense, you know, but when you, when you can talk with people, when you have that group of people who you can share your struggles with and they can help you, that is where your growth as a photographer will explode. And nowhere is that more important than when you move past photography. You know, when you move past photography as a hobby and start using photography to make money with your camera, because this is, this is an area where we get into and we can kind of figure out the artistic side and there's really no deadline to it.

Raymond: 34:38 So we can just take our time moving forward. But once we've made that commitment to make money with our camera, instantly there's a time on it because you only have so much money until you need to make more money. So there's this artificial deadline and that makes it really difficult because if you have those struggles, you can't just kind of wait it out and see what happens. You need to figure out what that answer is and you need to figure it out now. And that is exactly why I formed the premium member membership, Facebook group. So this Facebook group is just for obviously premium members because I know that when I first started, I would have found having a safe place to share those questions that I have to ask for help with the ideas that I'm struggling with would have been invaluable. And I wanted to create that for new photographers because I wasted a lot of time in the beginning doing things that didn't move my business forward at all.

Raymond: 35:37 You know, I'm the kind of person that when I have a problem, I just kind of, you know, become reclusive and just hope that it just goes away. And very rarely do I attack it head on. But I've realized in these past few years that if you attack it head on, then you can take care of that problem. And not only is it going to take care of that problem, but you're going to solve problems in the future as well because those same problems will come up again. But if you can mitigate that by knowing what the problem is and how to solve it, you've just saved yourself. Not only time, but the headache of worrying all the time. So in fact, on, on December 19th, I'm actually going to be hosting a live goal-setting workshop within the premium members group where we will come in. We're going to come up with those goals.

Raymond: 36:32 So this podcast right here is all about like how to set up the goals, but in the workshop we're going to actually come up with those goals and I'm going to be there to help you figure out whether they're crazy, whether they're too vague, how to make them more smart and then even how to come up with the steps to achieve them in 2020 and then guess what? Because you're already surrounded by the people who are moving forward, you are going to have a place in 2020 you're going to have a group of people who will help you move forward in your goals. And me personally, the whole tribe of fellow premium members are going to make it our mission to make sure that you move forward in your goals. I'm going to make sure that you move forward in your goals. Other members are going to make sure that you move forward in their goals or or in your goals and then you in turn are going to want to make sure that they move forward in their goals.

Raymond: 37:20 And then when you figure out what all these other photographers goals are, it's going to give you ideas. It's going to make you more specific. You're going to get more excited. Now that you're having conversations about photography, it's going to change the way that you think. Because oftentimes, I'll be honest, it's hard for me to have conversations with my wife about the business side of things or about photography because from the outside it seems so easy. Oh, we'll just just get more clients. Oh, gotcha. From the outside, it just like there's always a very easy answer, but it's typically too vague or it's frustrating. So having that safe place of fellow photographers who are interested in a very specific topic, like making money with their camera and growing a photography business and being able to share those thoughts and ideas with them so that they can help is going to be the one thing that moves you forward in 2020 no need to even leave your house.

Raymond: 38:18 That's fantastic. So again, tip number eight, hang out with other people who are moving forward because it will move you forward. Okay. Lastly, number nine, what in your life, or I'm sorry, simulate what your life would look like after you hit your goals. So goals are great. You know, we want to think about, Oh, if I could just figure this, everything would be great and everything would be perfect. That's something that I want to do. But oftentimes we think of the goal as the end, but it's not, we still have to live our life. So simulate what your life is going to look like after you hit that goal. You know, how will you feel? What will your family say? See that in your mind, and then plan a celebration. Plan rewards along the way. If you book seven weddings by March, what are you going to do to celebrate?

Raymond: 39:10 Because let me tell you something. That is something to celebrate. You know, maybe you're not going to take your whole family on a trip to Disney. You know you're not going to go on that Disney cruise that you've been looking at, but you can certainly take the family out to a nice dinner or get yourself a relaxing massage. Just make sure that they focus on the shoulders because shooting weddings can just be murder on the shoulders, but it can really help right now to plan out what those you know, rewards, what that celebration is going to be when you hit certain milestones and don't just make it, you know have a celebration only after you, after you booked those seven weddings because you're really gonna feel like a failure if you don't hit those seven weddings and you don't get, you know, that reward that you are really looking forward to.

Raymond: 39:57 So, you know, have something along the way, you know, maybe a halfway through your goals. So what did I have earlier? It was a, you know, after you make the goal of you know creating the list of promotional messages to send along, you know, took, go along with those images, then maybe you are you're gonna take a day off and you're going to go to the park with the kids because you've been working really hard and you need that family time and you just love playing with them. So you're going to spend that time with them. And that is your reward because now you're, you're, you're moving forward, you got some focus and you're making steps towards your future. So reward yourself because that's a big thing. Like I said last week, if you're not in control, if you don't have a plan for your life, you're simply going to become part of somebody else's plan for theirs.

Raymond: 40:49 So have that plan for your life. Goal setting is one of the most important things that you can do. All right, so let, that's it. Let's recap all of our steps today. So step number one was realize that you need to make a change. That's a mindset thing. That's not an actionable thing. That is realizing, Oh, you know, I'm just not happy with something and I need to make a change. Step number two is to figure out where you need to make that change. I just can't, you know, I just cannot get everything, you know, it's just not, my landscape. Photos aren't beautiful. They look more like snapshots. So I need to figure out, okay, it's the sky I need to focus on. The sky. I need to all the tones in a photo and then set Epic goals. You know, it's not going to be something crazy like I want to win landscape photographer of the year and it's not something vague like shoot more landscape photos.

Raymond: 41:48 It gets something achievable and then make it seen. Put it somewhere where you're going to see it every single day. You know, in the case of a landscape photo, maybe it's putting the landscape out of it you like as the background of your phone so that every day you see it everyday you see it and that's going to push you to make the goals that you want to want to achieve, which is step number five. Take those baby steps, figure out the exact path that you need to take that will get you to learning and achieving your goal. Step number six, make a challenge out of it. Put those baby steps on a calendar. Cross it off every day that you complete your a baby step. Step number seven, check in with your goals. Don't let them lose steam and then when you achieve them, reassess, move forward.

Raymond: 42:37 What's the next goal? Listen, there will always be a next goal. Don't feel like, Oh yeah, but if I do that for like, you know, five or six years, I'm not going to have any goals left. Eventually I'm going to get to the point to where I just know about photography and I don't need to make goals. That is not true. That's not true at all. I still make goals. I'm talking to you about the goals that I made this year, right? So continue to check in with your goals. Number eight, hang out with those and others who are moving forward themselves so that you can feel that momentum so that you will feel excited about moving forward and so that you will take action. And then step number nine, simulate what your life will look like after you hit your goals. That is it. Those are my nine steps.

Raymond: 43:24 Oops, there we go. And just knocked over my heater. Those are my nine steps to hitting your goals or creating goals, rather creating in hitting goals for again, I mean, when you do that, when you, when you, when you see that you're making progress, everything just feels better. When you feel like you have control of your life and where it is going, everything feels better. And that's what I want because in 2020 my goal, I guess my mission statement rather is listener success and that you, it is your success. My goal for the year is your success. And again, I know that, that that sounds really vague. And maybe I should make it smarter. You know, maybe I should list a number of how many people I'm going to make sure that they succeed. But this is more of a mission statement for me and how I frame what it is that I put out for you, whether it be an episode like this where I talk and give you like an education or whether it's through the questions that I ask in the interviews going forward in 2020 knowing that my goal for the year is listener success.

Raymond: 44:36 Your success is going to reframe how I look at the world and how I go forward with this. So again, that is it for this week. So thank you so much for joining me. Until next week, I, you know what, if you didn't go out and shoot, I'd be okay with that because I would rather you actually sit down and come up with these goals and think about the future. Just do a little bit of future planning, take a few days off of photography. God, that sounds so weird to say. Take a few days off of photography and really think about these goals so that you have something to move forward with in 2020. Because I want you to make, do I want you to make more, I want you to do more and I want you to make, do with what you got. So until next week, yeah, join me next week where we talk about how to use your new camera that you got for the holidays. So that is that until next week, I will see you then. Talk to you later.

Outro: 45:37 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 176: How YOU Grew As A Photographer This Year!

Enjoy the videos and music you love, upload original content, and share it all with friends, family, and the world on YouTube.

Throughout all of 2019 I ended every episode with a reminder to focus on yourself. A Reminder that we are all artists and in a world of youtube videos telling what camera gear to buy, blogs showing exactly where our lights should be places, and facebook posts telling us why we are doing it all wrong, that sometimes we need to step back and do what WE want to do. Explore what we want to explore. Today I chat with 3 members of the Beginner Photography Podcast Facebook group who I personally saw substantial growth in their work in 2020. I want to know what they did and how they focused on themselves to grow their skills. Special shoutout to Kimberly, Saul, and Jim for sharing with you all.

Become a premium member by December 18th and get your first month for free!

My first selective color from 2006

My first selective color from 2006

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

BPP 175: Chris Orwig - Authentic Portraits

Enjoy the videos and music you love, upload original content, and share it all with friends, family, and the world on YouTube.

Chris Orwig is a Portrait photographer from sunny southern California. He is known for his ability to create portraits that are truly authentic and captivating. Today I’m excited to dive in and find out more about the process of capturing the human essence in a single frame.

Become A Premium Member to access to more in-depth questions that help move you forward!

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How a car accident got Chris into photography

  • The hardest part of photography and the technical side for Chris to learn

  • What a portrait photographer does

  • How to get great portraits

  • What is the goal of every image Chris takes

  • How much preparation goes into each shoot

  • How much posing Chris does

  • A common misconception Chris hears being taught to new portrait photographers

  • What an amateur portrait looks like

  • The one thing you need to focus on in 2020 to take better portraits

Premium Members Also Learn:

  • How Chris booked his first client and how it went

  • How Chris communicates value more than just the ole 15 mins and 4 images

  • How important printed products are for Chris’s photography business

Resources:

20-01-slater.jpg
29-6.jpg
04-chap-oopener.jpg

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00:00 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast. Today we are taking authentic portraits. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:00:09 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, father, home brewer, LA Dodger fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer Raymond Hatfield. Welcome back

Raymond: 00:00:38 This episode of the beginner photography podcast. As always, I am your host Raymond Hadfield. And man, I am I'm excited this week for this week's interview. This week I actually get to talk to a personal hero of mine and it is just a, a complete, you know, joy of an interview. So if you haven't had a second to look down at the podcast timeline for how long this interview is, you'll see that it is more than an hour and a half. It is just completely jam packed, you know, and, and Chris is, it's funny, Chris is one of those people who today's guest, Chris Orwig. He's totally one of those people who whenever we talk, I always get to thinking about how long we've been friends and all the fun adventures that we've been on together and the stories that we've shared and then I snap out of it and remember, Oh man, this is the first time that I've ever interacted with Chris.

Raymond: 00:01:40 He just has that personality that just invites deep conversation, you know, so much more so than just rapid firing off questions. And we got so deep into, you know, into, into certain questions on several occasions that I actually had to throw half of my questions out simply because we just, we ran out of time. So as I said, I mean this interview is jam packed. You are going to love this and I know that you're going to feel the same way about Chris. So every week I save a portion of the interview that is focused more towards business just for premium members of the podcast. So this week, premium members are going to learn how Chris got his very first portrait session. Why no one will ever hire you to do your best work. Why Chris still gets butterflies before shoot. I do too. I gotta be honest. And how to develop your one on one rapport with your subjects and it is just perfect for introverts. So if you want to hear all of that from Chris or wig and more photography, business information delivered straight to your ears every single week, then become a premium member. You can sign up by hitting over to beginner photography, podcast.com and clicking the premium

Raymond: 00:03:00 Membership button at the top. So that is it. Let's go ahead and get on into this week's interview with Chris or wig. Today's guest is Chris Orwig, a portrait photographer from the much sunnier than Indianapolis right now, California. He has known for his ability to create portraits that are truly authentic and very captivating. And today I'm really excited to dive into find out more about kind of the process of capturing the human essence in a single frame. So Chris, thank you so much for coming on the podcast.

Chris Orwig: 00:03:33 Yeah, super fun to be here and fun to get a chance to chat. So thank you for having me.

Raymond: 00:03:38 Absolutely. I'm really excited for this podcast in particular for a few reasons. One because at the beginning of the year I asked members of the beginner photography podcast, Facebook group who they want to hear from and several times your name came up and I know that we had been trying to get you on the podcast and you're a very busy guy and we finally set this up. But for reason number two, I was just thinking about this the other day. It must have been a 10 no nine years ago, right after I moved to Indianapolis and decided to take photography seriously. I had no idea how to use light room. And I went on lynda.com and I searched for a Lightroom tutorial. And you yourself taught me how to use light room three. And because of that confidence that I had using light room three, I feel like I am where I am today because I was very cheap photographer and didn't want to spend any money. But my wife was like, no, just, just do it. Just dive in, spend the money, do it and you'll be happy for it. And I'm very happy that I did. And so kind of all of this is thanks to you. So Chris.

Chris Orwig: 00:04:42 Yeah. Oh that is so great. That makes me so happy. So, so I appreciate that. Yeah, and it's funny like light room through, they don't use numbers anymore. You know, they used to do that with Photoshop and Lightroom and I always wondered what would they do, like light room 33 or S, you know, like when would it end? And so now they, it's CC. But anyway, that's really fun. And that is a great thing as you know from doing your podcast to the teaching and sharing that the beauty of it and why we do all of this is those connections. And also you never know and you might help someone else out. And part of that is just because so many people have helped us out. It's a nice way to keep that circulating, you know? So

Raymond: 00:05:21 Yeah. Yeah, it's a great way to look at kind of the world that way. It's weird because when you're a kid, you know, you're always told, you know, especially now that we're around the holidays, like it's more about giving than it is receiving. And when you're a kid, you have such a limited life experience that that doesn't make any sense. Right. But as you get older and you start to see how things piece themselves together, and I've told other people this before, if I could live to like 500 years old, I would definitely do that. Just to be able to see how everything is so connected to each other. Yeah. But in this very small window that I've had on earth, I've been very fortunate to kind of how some of those

Raymond: 00:05:58 Strings work. So once again you are part of my strength.

Chris Orwig: 00:06:02 Yeah. That's great. That's great. Yeah. And there's, and it, you know, it comes to mind too, is someone was just asking me about my friend Greg, and cause I had mentioned his name and they said, well, who's Greg? And I said, well, he's the reason why I have a vocation and a career. And they're like, well, what do you mean? And it's a long winding story, but literally without him in my life, I wouldn't have any of this, you know, and, and be sitting here talking to you. So it is, it's so wonderful to have people like that and it's, it's great to, I dunno, keep that circulating, you know. And so, anyway, so that's fine. So, so I appreciate it. Yeah,

Raymond: 00:06:41 Absolutely. Absolutely. So I mentioned there in the intro that obviously you're very well known for your portraits. You, you teach about portrait photography. You've been doing it for 20 years now. Is that right? Yeah, yeah. And all of this kind of started, but from after a car accident when you were on your skateboard, correct. Can you tell me who you were before the accident and then kind of how the accident changed you into who you are?

Chris Orwig: 00:07:12 Yeah, I was much more self absorbed. I I think I saw I'd never really been injured physically, so I kind of saw injury as weakness. I saw kind of my, my worldview was like, just tough it out and get over it. And so I think then afterwards it, it gave me a new empathy, which as a portrait photographer, you kinda can't be a portrait photographer without empathy. Right. a friend of mine, Travis, put it this way, he said, you know, in, in portraiture, not in portrait, but he just said, what we want to do is we want to look so deeply at someone that we can see ourselves. So in life he was staying, but also unfortunate that so for me, when I'm photographing someone, whether it's a billionaire or yesterday I was photographing a pitcher for the Detroit tigers.

Chris Orwig: 00:08:09 A famous athlete or a little kid or homeless person is to to look and to see that person empathetically and say, while I've never been homeless, I do know what it's like to feel like I don't belong. And, and that, that lack of, or that kind of understanding or attempt to understanding is where a good portrait comes from. And same thing with baseball, like this baseball player, he's awesome. Like it was so fun, man. And I don't know anything about baseball but to begin to see him not as the idea that like that role that he, but as this person and like, well what does that mean and, and how do you handle the pressure and what, you know, I just, you find common ground. I bet. Maybe that's it, right? I mean that's what you do in your weddings too, right?

Chris Orwig: 00:09:07 You're not like, well this is bride a or, or groom, you know, 303, you know, whatever. It's like, no, this is, this is a person with dreams and hopes and aspirations and fears and family. Cause you know, all this stuff. And when you connect with them in that way, that makes good photography people photography. So anyway, bef you know, this is a really long answer but, but I think before that experience, before any kind of suffering, it's hard to make good portraits. But most portrait photographers have suffered, have leaned into their suffering, have paid attention to that. And that is where they then find light and beauty and hope and, and all of those things. And it doesn't have to be dramatic like a car accident. Sometimes it's just as simple as something difficult that's happened in life. So, so yeah. So it's made me appreciate that stuff. Does that make sense?

Raymond: 00:10:05 No, it does. Absolutely. In fact, my, my follow up question there was going to be, you know, I've never been in a car accident. You know, is, is, is good portrait photography, something that, that I could do. But I think that you kind of summed it up there at the end. We all kind of deal with things differently. And if we have found pain in anything, it's H we should be able to, to find that empathy in, in somebody else. That's really interesting. Really interesting. So what was it about because it was, and I know that you have a very long history in photography, which is why I'm kind of adding this little piece of your life, but it was your father who gave you your first camera, right? Yes, yes. Okay. So can you kind of walk me through what that camera meant for you at the time?

Chris Orwig: 00:10:49 Yeah, it was back in the era when getting a camera was a big deal. You know, you could, there was, there was no Costco to buy one from, you'd go to a camera store. And so I think that was kind of momentous, you know which I think is fun when people re discover that experience, you know, because we all have a camera in our pocket we take for granted and we kind of think it's a pretend camera, but it's actually a real camera. But then when you save up and buy a camera, you're like, I think the person who saves up and buys a camera is so excited about it. It's so, it's like this, this moment that that can, that can still kind of happen and that can really fuel your creative growth. So that's what happened for me.

Chris Orwig: 00:11:35 And I think a big part of that was that it helped me to, it gave me a reason to get out into the world. So it's a sort of a, the passport thing the camera does and then it became an instrument for collecting wisdom. It's still is, you know I've a couple of cameras sitting here, but it's still my way to, to learn about the art of living. I mean, that's everything for me. And, and you know, when I was in that particular season life, if life, there were certain lessons I was looking for. Now in this season, there are other lessons but that still continues all the way through for me. So it's kind of funny. I'm not, I'm not a photographer. Maybe in a traditional sense. You know, I kind of play the role of a professional photographer, but deep at heart, I am an amateur man.

Chris Orwig: 00:12:31 Like I just, I love it. I love the fact that like yesterday I got to hang out with this baseball player. We became friends, we're deeply connected. I gained all this life wisdom like that I would do it anyway. It's kind of a thing. And so, so yeah, it all kind of came from that, that early experience I think of like of like wow. Camera, you know. And, and that's, that's, this is kind of a tangent, but I love it. Here we go. Ready for a tangent. Cause we talked about kids before we started recording and we both have kids. We each have a kid similar age and and others, but parents will often ask me, cause I'm a photographer, they'll say, what camera should I buy my kid? And I always say, I'm the wrong person to ask. And I try to just sort of Dodge the question because I actually don't think kids should have cameras. This is totally weird. Yeah.

Speaker 5: 00:13:33 That as my son who's seven, asked for a camera for Christmas and we're really excited to hear to hear the same. [inaudible]

Chris Orwig: 00:13:38 Yeah. Yeah. And I think if, well, what if a kid has has the interest? I say go for it. And that's the same kid who ask for a violin. Like what is it about the violin? Okay, well let's explore that. But what I think burdening someone who's too young with something that's really expensive and will break, cause that's the reality of being a kid and having something. I've seen too many parents give a kid $1,000 camera, it breaks and they're just, their spirit is crashed. They feel guilty, they feel shame. They're embarrassed, you know, I don't know all these things and then they lose, lose the spark. And I don't want any kid to lose a spark. I mean, that's why in art classes, in elementary school used crayons and pencils and paints and you, you get your clothes a little dirty and it's like okay to, to experiment.

Chris Orwig: 00:14:29 And so it's not that I don't want kids to have cameras but it's more just considering is there for certain kids, there's a right time to get the camera. And at least for me, that was a little bit later in life. Like I did photography in high school. I was horrible. I mean, I've looked back at those images, they were like the worst ever. I found. I found this folder of my old photographs and I thought maybe there's some hidden gems, some hidden talent. And I was like, no, I had none. Zero. And I've always had to work for it. And it wasn't some gift from the gods. It was more searching, scratching, digging. And I had to live enough life and then get the camera. Does that make sense? So I just want kids to be kids and live life and do all that. And so, and maybe your seven year old will have a blast and it's the right time. And there are some that are a little more durable or you know, sometimes kids get Polaroid cameras. Those are really fun and still tactile and tangible. But I just want, I want kids to be creative over the long haul.

Raymond: 00:15:35 [Inaudible] So my I'm pretty sure that it's probably the same case for my son is he he has for one of those Fuji Instax cameras. Cause I, I, I have several and I take them out and use them all the time with family functions. And we have like a, I take all the Instax and like hang them on the wall in our home so they can kind of see a timeline. And he likes that idea. But I think, I think he wants the camera more just because our neighbor, his friend has the same camera. I think that's, that's really the only reason. So yeah, like you said, it's, it's diving deeper. Try to find that that, that, that reason behind it as to, as to why. But regardless, I don't think he's going to get one, but I hope that he doesn't hear this episode.

Chris Orwig: 00:16:18 Okay. Even that though, he, you know, with those cameras there, they're getting a feel for the artifact of the print. I mean, I think that's beautiful and wonderful. It's more maybe the kids a little older cause then once they have the camera, then they're going to learn all the software and it's not necessarily bad and I think certain kids should do it. But I don't know. I just I may, I'm just going to flip to a different subject. I'm a surfer, right? I live in a surf town, so plenty of surf dads push their kids in the surfing really hard, too young. I have number of friends is happened. The kid then wipes out, hits their head on the surfboard and they will never surf again in the rest of their life. And I just think that's a bummer, you know? And so as parents there's more like w with my kids, it's more like, let's, let's give them opportunities and let's help them explore things. But I don't want to shove them into anything. So I don't want to be the photographer dad that's like doing that. If they come down here and want to grab one of my cameras and play with it, I'm all, I'm game, you know, but I'm not gonna push it.

Raymond: 00:17:25 Oh man, this is totally off subject. But I kind of struggled with that right now with with us on Charlie who's in a piano because he loves to play by himself. So we got him in piano lessons cause he asked for it. And now it kind of seems as if like piano lessons are a struggle for him. Like it's just like, Oh, it's a chore. You know, like he's got to do this. But because he has those piano lessons, we're, we got, you got to go practice, you got to go have we go. So yeah, that's really interesting. But I've thought the same thing about photography because I don't, I don't want to push them into something that just because I'm interested in it. So that's a really interesting perspective. But I'm just

Chris Orwig: 00:18:05 Your ranch. My mom forced me to take piano my whole life and I'm so grateful. So there's that side too, right?

Raymond: 00:18:11 Oh man. Yeah. I don't know. You know, it doesn't make it easier. It doesn't, no, it doesn't. What do we do as parents? I don't know. Why can't there just be like one book on how to parent perfectly seriously? If you write that book, tell me I would buy a millionaire. Yeah. So, so when you first got back that camera, you were really excited to go out and take these, take these photos. Did you start with portraits or did you just start with whatever you found?

Chris Orwig: 00:18:37 Yeah, I think like most photographers, and I'm sure a lot of folks listening can relate to this. When you kind of get the bug, you photograph everything, you know, you're like, Oh my gosh you know, bottle cap a hubcap, a sign of leaf. So I did that and, and more just had no intent on, I didn't even really know why I was doing that. I think it was, it was just a, just a response to, you know, a creative spark and you're like, I'm just gonna follow that, you know, wherever that goes. And then eventually, as I moved my way through photography and tried out a lot of different things, I kept coming back to the stuff that I love most. It's always related to people. So I, I would say things like, you know, there's a lot of beautiful places to travel to, or wonderful places in the world to live, but it's always the people that make the place.

Chris Orwig: 00:19:32 And so it's like, Oh, that's like, like a photograph of like, I'm just gonna make this up cause I've never been there. Greece is amazing, but I wouldn't hang it on my wall unless me and my aunt who's a painter, who paints in Greece and I photographed her and she's small in the frame, and then there's that landscape with those dome roofs and the water. I would love that picture. Does that make sense? So I'm sort of paying attention to that intrinsic, like what do I actually love? I love landscapes. I love travel. I mean, I love food, I love sport, I love all these things, but ultimately that and then I also realize I'm a real one-on-one guy so I can do the whole, like have a bunch of people over to our house and have a backyard barbecue. But I, in that situation, I always thrive when I have the one on one conversations. Does that make sense? And in portraiture is a real one-on-one type of photography. Versus I would say weddings for you, you do one on one, but you also have to do a lot of group stuff.

Raymond: 00:20:34 There can be a lot of that. Yeah, for sure. For sure. So when, when you is the question that you're asking yourself when you first got started, would I hang this on my wall? Like is that the

Chris Orwig: 00:20:45 Yeah. No, no, that wasn't, that wasn't that. It was it was I think more maybe more, what do I need? It was may probably out of neediness. It was out of healing. It was out of, and I think for some people that's why they go into landscape. Their life is cluttered and complicated and they get in the landscape and it's just like peace and serenity. And so the excuse to kind of photograph the landscape is really an excuse for healing.

Raymond: 00:21:15 I had never thought about it like that. And you know what's interesting is that like every landscape photography group on Facebook is just like nothing, but like the most technical like has to be perfect. Like as almost as I always feel as if they're like introducing more chaos than there needs to be in a photo. So that's a really interesting way to look at it as if as if they need that communist out in nature, but then once they get back, they have to reintroduce that chaos to, to create something that they're comfortable with. I don't know. I'm just totally speculating.

Chris Orwig: 00:21:44 No, it could be, or it could be something just about the yeah, the duality of photography too, right? In the S in all, all forms of photography where you with a portrait, you, you want someone to look good, but the same time you don't, you know, like if I like a fortunate of you smiling right now, just to be like, all right, you know, that's fine. You, you look like a happy guy, but if I want, I would want something deeper. But I also wouldn't want you crying. You know what I mean? So I think in, in, in landscape photography too, you do need that technical precision, you know, and Anzel Adams, obviously it was all about that, but with emotion, you know, so technique without emotion is flat. Non-Interesting emotion without technique is also, to me, kind of, it's just so abstract. It's uninteresting, you know? So there's, I think it's the duality of, of the nature of photography. Right.

Raymond: 00:22:37 Wow. This is getting deep real quick. I love it. I love it. I love it. I love it. As I was saying before we got on, this isn't a very technical podcast. We don't talk too much about like shutter speed and aperture and ISO and stuff. So this is, this is exactly the kind of stuff that, that really interests me because we're just so different as, as people, you know that I know that somebody right now is listening and thinking like that is it, that is the thing that I need right there and that it's really gonna change the way that they shoot that they shoot. So but kinda exploring more of that technical side of things. When you first started photography, it was with film, it was just shooting the things that you saw in front of you was what was the hardest part about photography and maybe the technical side for you to, to, to learn and understand?

Chris Orwig: 00:23:28 Yeah. The hardest part when you first said that before technique, I, I, what came to mind instantly with some negative feedback I got, like, I, I shot these photographs I was so excited about, I felt like I felt like I poured my soul into them. I felt like I accomplished something heroic, you know? I mean, I was like, the guy ran his first marathon arms up just yes, this, you know, and I showed them to someone who is, who is a really accomplished photographer. And he said, huh, I created photographs like that when I first started out. And I was just like, Oh, you know, I dunno, probably curse word flashed through my mind, you know what I mean? I just felt so hurt. And so I think the hardest thing was that, you know, it's staving off initial feedback and I'm sure people listening get that too because the reality is you have to S you know, your initial, your initial efforts let's go to our kids for a second.

Chris Orwig: 00:24:25 You know, they bring home the drawing water color crayon or something and where it's like, yes, this is amazing and we need that as humans. We need our sketches to be celebrated. And so not having that and kind of feeling isolated in that way. That was hard. As far as the camera technical side goes, I've always been a minimalist and my technique is, is laughably simple. So it's aperture priority mode, shoot at a shallow depth of field. So I always go as low as possible. I've never bought a lens that was, had an aperture setting of higher than two eight that I've ever liked or kept. I've always sold those. So I'm always shooting really shallow. So I abs your priority really shallow. And then if I need to change my exposure, exposure, compensation. So, and I taught at the super technical school where people would say, if you don't shoot on manual mode, there's something wrong with you.

Chris Orwig: 00:25:17 Like it was like you are ashamed, you are belittled, you know, and, and I just stuck with it. I'm like, I'm not going to let the technique side phase me, you know? And I think the iPhone obviously or mobile photography has done that. If people really stopped to think about it, it's like the first Kodak brownie camera, which their tagline was, you push the button and we'll do the rest. And so that's all we do now. And, and there's liberation to that. And so so technically I strangely I didn't have a tough time with the camera cause I just use simple settings. It was more being around people who are really good photographers and then having high goals for myself that I wasn't hitting. There are times when I volt wept after a photo shoot where I photograph someone important to me or just I knew that this was the only chance and I missed the shot.

Chris Orwig: 00:26:15 And I just will go through the images, not like, Oh that's too bad. I, you know, I missed focus or my exposure composition or something wasn't right. Or I'm just like, I, I just, I blew it. I missed the moment. I, I lost that. So, so so I dunno, why did I say that? But I think maybe just that, it, that it, it matters to me and I think it matters to those listening, you know, that's why we do photography. It matters. We wouldn't it if we didn't care about it. And so the thing I always say, you know, tell people about that is yeah, you just going to have to shoulder the weight of a lot of disappointment from other people. You know, you're going to cross the finish line like, yes, my first marathon. And someone's going to be like, Oh, but you only did it in five hours or something.

Chris Orwig: 00:27:02 And you're like, I don't care. Do you understand? Like I used to not even be able to run a mile, but and just that, that photography, and I think that's why podcasts and things like this are so great is when you, when you connect with the community, you realize, Oh, we're all in this together and we're all learning and there's so much to learn and there's, and we can celebrate each other and that it isn't competition. And that bad pictures aren't, aren't, it's not a failure. It's more of, okay, let's learn from that. And even crying about missing a photograph, that's probably a great thing to have happen. Because that means that you care enough about it. If you just are apathetic, then you probably won't be a good starter for

Raymond: 00:27:43 Yeah, no, I agree with that. I agree with that. So in your own words, what would you say is kind of the, the, the job description of a portrait photographer? Is it simply having empathy and using it to see somebody?

Chris Orwig: 00:27:58 Yeah, I would say first and foremost, it's not the picture. It's always about connecting with the person. Someone who's willing to have their portrait made is willing, you know, to be vulnerable and honest and real. Because it's not fashion. I mean, I think there are fashionable portraits, there are headshot portraits, but a portrait kind of in the pure sense of the word, I think is, is a little bit of a revelation. Little bit of honesty. So it's just honoring that person really, and just, and just creating that space. And I would say it's similar for, let's say if, if I'm, I was in your town for some reason. I said, Hey, I'm, I'm going through a tough, tough patch, a rough patch in life. Can we go to coffee? I think your role would be to basically say, sure and listen, you know, and just create the space for, for a friend to talk.

Chris Orwig: 00:28:54 And if you are able to reflect back something like what I'm hearing you saying is that these three things are really difficult. What I would probably say is, Oh my gosh, like you nailed it, you know, equivalent of you nailed the portrait. Like my wife's gonna love this image. You know? And whenever there's something like that, when the, when the person says someone close to them will like the photograph, that's when I think the image works. It has to look like them and the truest sense of the word. But more than that, it's just, it's just being a human. It's, it's a, it's, it's caring for them wherever they are. And sometimes people I've found where they are is they're not ready or willing to go deep. That's fine. You know, sometimes I'm that white, sometimes I just need to be shallow.

Chris Orwig: 00:29:40 You ask me how I'm doing, say fine. And that's a lie and I need to honor that lie. You, you know what I mean? Of course. Yeah. So, so I'm good. Wait, can I tell a workshop story, which is, this is a fun one. Okay. So I'm in a workshop teaching workshop and I have this person I invite in to photograph and he is a Broadway performer. Awesome guy. Just super talented, kinda handsome, striking musical, you know the whole thing, right? He's one of these great people and I'm kind of talking about how we can create strong portraits in a simple way. He's actually on the cover of my book. Let me see if he, I don't know if you can see that, but it's that, that guy right there. And I'm just trying to get to know him, asking him about his life and where he's from and his family.

Chris Orwig: 00:30:26 And at one point he talks about is his mom having ms. And I say you know, wow. W with a mom who has ms, you know, what's that like it or you know, just kind of an open ended question. And he pauses and he says it's really hard. And he starts to tear up. And one of my workshop attendees said as like, the tears are literally about to like fall out of his eyes, says, what was your favorite Broadway show to performance? And she, she was just so uncomfortable with that emotion. He was kind of like cats or I don't know what he said. You know what one of the ones that he'd been the default answer. Yeah, yeah. And then later we talked about it and she said, I felt like you were manipulating him. And I said, yeah, yeah. And I said, well, let's talk about that because I asked open ended question.

Chris Orwig: 00:31:20 I could have said, you know, what, what's it like having a mom with ms? You could have said, you know, it's difficult, but the thing is, I love my mom. He could've, he could've answered that way, but he, for some reason in that moment was being very vulnerable. And I think as a portrait photographer, my job isn't to like, you know, if he says it's really difficult for me to say, well how difficult, like really, you know, show with your eyes how painful it is to have a ma, you know, a mom with this horrible disease. But if he's going to say that, just give him some time and say thank you and say take a breath and then create a portrait now you know, it could create a meaningful portrait. And so I think it's the honoring of that space. That's what the portrait photographer does is they, they create space and they don't manipulate because that's, and that's why I'd go to the coffee thing like a few and I went to coffee. You wouldn't manipulate the situation to be like, well, how bad was your dark night of the soul? You know, you, you would, for me, you would say, well, tell me about it. How's it going? Or what was that like? Or what are, what are the difficult things? So I think that's what makes great portraits is that kind of creating space, being open and honoring that person. So yeah,

Raymond: 00:32:43 So, so I love, I love that example and I'm thinking about going to a coffee shop with you and how much I would love that. And obviously being able to, to chat through your story. If you ever come to Indianapolis or we go to imaging this year, if you want to imaging this, I'm going to imaging, let's make that happen. Let's make that happen. So, so when you have a, a chat with somebody in front of them, it's easy to commiserate with them, right? And empathize and say, Oh man, that is tough. But when it comes to a portrait, you know, so in this situation that you had where he says, man, it's really tough, my mom, how would you, I don't want to say use that information, but how does that change the portrait that, how does that change the outcome of the portrait, if, if, if, because earlier you said, you know, you don't want to be like, no, tell me with your eyes that it's tough, you know? So how does that affect it?

Chris Orwig: 00:33:35 Yeah, I think you know, and that happens to be like a difficult situation. Example. There's other, I think, you know, situations maybe where let, let me go to I'm going to go to photographing Kelly Slater. He's a world champion surfer, famous guy, you know, in, in, in that photo shoot. He's, I got to know him and he said, Chris, I'm kind of embarrassed that most of my life. I confused the idea of Kelly Slater and the person of Kelly Slater. Wow. Yeah. Which is like, it's kind of like junior high all over again, right? There's this idea of who we are. Like, people think you're this person, but then there's who you really are. Do I play the person, not just junior high, maybe a lot of life. Do I play the person they want me to be or do I be really me?

Chris Orwig: 00:34:21 So I think when there's something like that's revealed, it's you go there and you talk about identity and then I share as well. So, so there has to be a reciprocal thing. So I talk about my own identity. So it's not like, wow, you're weird or you're a celebrity. So I can't relate to that. You know, it's like, Oh my gosh, like I totally get it. And you, so anyway, when that those emotions come up, I think it's that. And then how that affects the picture is just that mutuality, that collaboration of you know, or even just gratitude, like like with that, like, I, you know, his name's Bryce is priceless. Like, thank you for being willing to go there and share that. I mean, it's so funny in life, especially with life and success, it's easy to just emphasize our successes and all the cool plays you've been in and shows.

Chris Orwig: 00:35:15 And for me as a photographer, it's easy to emphasize all the good stuff. But I gotta tell you, you know, like, I didn't say this in this moment, but something like this could happen is like right now I feel so isolated and kind of lonely because of all that success. And then you could talk about that and then you could say, okay, okay, let's, let's take a breath, let's get let's do a portrait. And then I would have him look down, take a breath, and then look back. And all of those layers would be present in the image. And I think probably the same thing is true in wedding photography. The times when I have done weddings, it's like all the layers and preparation is present in everyone who's there. So much has built up to that scene. And that's what makes it good.

Chris Orwig: 00:35:59 It's not just like a pretty picture and pretty dresses and pretty flowers. Like those pictures are easy. Or a handsome person onset. You photographed a handsome person, you know, it's like or beautiful woman. And he was like, ah, kind of shallow, right? And so looking for layers. So I guess, I don't know if that answers the question, but letting all that stuff come into the image but not overpower it. Here, here's the, here it is for me. I, I sat in on an acting one. Oh, one class my friend teaches, he teaches the college level. And I said, I was like, bro, can I like come to class one day? He's like, sure. And so there I was and I thought this, cause I'd never taken an acting class. And he said the most profound thing, they were working on emotions and he was, he was teaching them that when you need to be angry as a character or whatever it is, you need to feel 10 a level, zero to 10.

Chris Orwig: 00:36:48 You need to feel anger at level 10. But you can only give us like a level seven because overacting or bad acting is 10. And then Brad Pitt, he'll show you. He's angry, he's giving it to you at a two. It's like the subtle way, his eye moved or something and you're like, Oh my gosh. Like it just conveyed like a million things. Bad actors, bad portraits are always overdone with emotion. And so trying to, you know what I was saying, even with a tough motion, allow it sometimes to get there, but then reel it in, take a breath, settle a little bit. And maybe there'll be a time when I photograph someone who's weeping. I've never done that yet. A lot of those pictures I actually, if there is heavy emotion, I don't share them. Because I feel like I need to honor the moment.

Chris Orwig: 00:37:44 Unless the person kind of says, I don't even ask them. I just don't share it, you know? Same thing. If we went to coffee and you shared something deep about your life, I wouldn't like it's my turn. Yeah. Or posts on Instagram like, well, so-and-so told me that he really rustles with this topic. You know, it's like, so anyway, I do think there's also a sacredness is maybe what I'm getting at as, as portrait photographers, we are entrusted with story and we need to treat that as sacred cause I think it is. And then also be be mindful of when and where and how to share it. And that some stories, even though it's a great picture, doesn't give you justification to share. Wow.

Raymond: 00:38:31 Oh man. That that line right there really, really hits

Raymond: 00:38:36 Home. I think as a wedding photographer we're always trying to come up with ways, you know, what am I right for captions for social media and what do I put here and what do I put there? And there's been times where, you know, you go to a wedding and there's a lot of stress and maybe there's some family drama and that comes through in the photos. But ultimately at the end of the day, they still get married and they had a good time or at least it appears that way. Right? So you kind of want to share that. Like, even though there was a buildup, it all turned out well. But you know, now I've, I've, I've often thought like I shouldn't even like this is just the cheap way out. This is just like, Oh yeah their wedding day was very tough but they got through it. They, they got married, they had fun and then I should really look deeper into that cause that's not really my story to share. Right. It's their story.

Chris Orwig: 00:39:24 It is their story to share. And if they shared it it would probably be funny or beautiful or of course you know like cause they would be like you wouldn't, you will not imagine, you know, these five things went wrong. And then this and then I had a total meltdown. Cause if someone says let's, let's just say I'm going to say wedding my own. If I say on my own wedding day, I had this whole meltdown and I realized, you know, and I tell that story, it's people are going to be captivated. But if someone else tells a story, like Orwig had this meltdown, you know, like

Raymond: 00:39:54 Not only am I thinking, wow, that guy is crazy, but now I'm not going to trust this guy with any stories of mine. Yeah, yeah, yeah.

Chris Orwig: 00:40:02 So storytelling. Yeah. And storytelling. I heard someone, this national geographic photographer talk about it. She was asked what, how do you, what is, what is story in one word? And she said connection. And I thought, I think that's true. I think if I had to distill story, it's, it's, cause if you don't connect to the, to the story, whether it's a Disney story or a photographic story it's, it's, there's no connection. There's just no nothing. No, no. Nothing's resonating. Nothing's there. And so that's, you know, just trying to figure out how do we connect and then how do we share that and how and when and wide. And that to me is the beauty of fortunate. And then meanwhile, the portrait photographer or any kind of photographer, you learn these lessons, like in weddings, even, you learn, like, man, I photographed a wedding recently.

Chris Orwig: 00:40:48 And the, the father of the bride, you know, he gay, he got up to give his talk and I have three daughters. And I was like, okay, I'm probably about 15 years away from giving that talk or more, I don't know. But I was like, I wanna I want to be like that guy, you know? Like he just sat an example I'd never experienced and I, and I just thought, Oh my gosh, I got to journal about this. What was it? How did he talk, you know, everything. So I think the, the photographer not only is able to create pictures but gains wisdom and that's the beauty of why we do this thing. And same thing, if you photograph a tree, I mean the photography really photographs a tree really thinks about branch and leaf and Leafs that fall and how trees are always growing and roots and the root systems and you know, because they're just sitting there kind of listening to the tree almost and getting to know it and they gain things that you wouldn't gain if you just walk by a tree. You know, I think poets probably gain a lot to writers cause they really look and listen. So anyway, that's, that's the beauty of it. That's why we do that.

Raymond: 00:41:51 So, so when it comes to that connection though, when it comes to storytelling, right, and gaining that connection, how do you ensure that when you show up, you're able to make that connection and capture the portrait that you want to take? Or I guess, let me know.

Chris Orwig: 00:42:04 Yeah, no, I like that.

Raymond: 00:42:06 Is that a, do you go into a situation having a preconceived idea of what the portrait is going to be? Or do you let it organically arise?

Chris Orwig: 00:42:15 Yes. and it's, you're so good at keeping me on track by the way, the soundtracks. Amazing. Cause I'm going all over the place. It's really fun to talk. But yeah, I I do think preparing ourself is, is a huge part of, of portraiture, meaning there's a term in yoga and I don't practice yoga. I've done it a few times, but I love the term which is Nama stay. And the one definition I've heard of that there's a lot but one that I like is the light in me recognizes the light in you and that there's a lot of other traditions and history or you know, ideas behind that. We project reality out into the world basically what we see what's inside of us, you know, and so whatever's inside of us is essentially what we notice in others. And I mean I think the simple example of that is you can be in a really bad mood or feel have just received horrible cause I, cause I do books right?

Chris Orwig: 00:43:08 Let's say I just received a horrible book review and I can walk past a friend who's just stoic, no expression and I can be like, what is that guy's problem? Like what? Like why is he so upset with me but has nothing to do with him? I could have then just received the best news in the world, maybe just got this huge job and I'm so excited or something fun happened. I see the same friend with a stoic expression. I'm like, man, he's so calm and still like I want to be like that, right. Has nothing to do with him. It's all about me. So the self preparation for a portrait photographer is huge. It's like getting, getting all those things to calm down, all those crazy voices in your head, which have do a technique and mastering your techniques or you're like, okay, I have a vision for what I'm going to do, how I'm going to shoot, what lenses.

Chris Orwig: 00:43:51 If I bring a whole bag of lenses and I'm kind of like, I don't know, and this then that's, I'm too, I'm too confused to even see the picture. Right. I also have to have, I want to have some idea about the person. I want to have some sense of their, their spirit or their perspective or their character. If I don't have anything, which happens a lot, I photograph strangers all the time. I look for little threads. Little threads might be something like photographing someone and say and also I should say, vision for me is always a strong character portrait. And so what I mean by that is this isn't flashy. This isn't sexy. This isn't fashion, this isn't this isn't journalism journalist would step away and just let the person walk by. I'm engaging and I'm trying to create something there and, and what I want as a carer, some kind of characteristic, something genuine, something honest, something true.

Chris Orwig: 00:44:47 So yes, there's the vision. But if I don't know the person, I don't know what the character is. I don't know what is honest. I don't know what is true. So I just look for little threads by way of questions which can simply be like photograph someone. Two days ago it was like, ah, he's got a little tattoo right here, a moon, half moon. And I was like, ah, interesting tattoo. Like what's the story? There's always a story. Always, always. You know, some of them are great, some of them aren't. And it didn't, she, she didn't want actually want to tell a story. She was like, I got it with someone. It's, you know, and she just, I was like, Oh, cool. And so I tried something else, you know, you know where are you from? How long have you lived here at church?

Chris Orwig: 00:45:30 Just those kinds of things. And you get these little pieces. And I guess, I mean maybe it's more particular story I was photographing at this event. I'm sponsored by Sony. It was a Sony event. They had models there that you could photograph to test out cameras. The models are decked out, fashionable, you know, they're kind of striking, you know, like an intimidating to me is a portrait photographer. Cause I'm like, wow, this person's, I don't know. So striking. And I, and I also know from being a teacher, the more beautiful, more striking more you admire someone, usually the worst, the photograph because you think that because they're beautiful or handsome, I'll create a good photograph. And then you don't think like a photographer and your skill level drops. You're kind of relying on them to make the picture for you. So anyway, there I am, this person and she's really tall and I just start talking to her.

Chris Orwig: 00:46:27 I kind of mentioned, I have three daughters and named their ages. And I was like, gosh, you're really talks. I noticed I had to kind of tip toe to capture the portrait. And I said, when did you hit your height? Where you're young? And she was like, Oh, I was like sixth grade. And I said, was it hard? Oh, you can imagine the names people called me. It was horrible. But then when sports came along, it was amazing. She kind of lit up. She was this person, right? And I was like, Oh, what sports? I was like, wow, there's volleyball and in that, you know, and I said, Oh, do you still play? She said, no, I broke my back. I was playing college volleyball, broke my back, got dropped from my parent's insurance plan, and now I have to come up with a way to pay for all my medical bills. So I'm modeling. And I was like, Oh my God,

Speaker 5: 00:47:08 Whoa. I just learned a lot about this person more than, than just like, this is a beautiful person who's here to be in front of my camera. And that's it. Yeah. And so with that, it

Chris Orwig: 00:47:17 Did I have a vision for like a character portrait of a backstory of a model who had her back broken and now is trying to put, you know, pay for medical bills. No, I had no clue. And I don't think we can ever know these, these kind of invisible stories, so to speak, but I search for them, you know, just, they're really simple questions and if they don't want to talk, that's fine. But she offered that. I said, wow, that's heavy. You know, I, I get that. That's a tough thing. And it, you seem like you're someone who, who has overcome a lot of adversity. Let's, you know, think about that for a second. How, how, what, who, who, how, what did I say? I said something like, well, think about people who have helped you overcome this adversity. Close your eyes, think about them, and then come back and look at my camera and it's like, bam.

Chris Orwig: 00:48:02 Portraits like mind blowing. It's so good. You know what I mean? Like, I am just like, Oh my gosh, you just gave me this gift of like, of overcoming adversity and I want overcome adversity. And you know, I'm just like so excited and I'm here. It is a fashion model, right? And so I think that is the art or arc of good portrait shirt, at least for me. And that's the stuff that I enjoy and that's where I'm like, wow, I learned a lot about how quickly I judge people just by their looks or their Heights. And how I need to remember, we all have stories and how I also am just grateful to the camera that it, it, it taught me you know, gives me these little gifts of wisdom, you know, like, like so anyway, so there you have it. So I have a vision. Yes and no.

Raymond: 00:48:52 Yeah, no, no, no. That's, that, that, that absolutely makes sense. So but I want to know let's go back to your first portrait session, right? Say your first paid client. Okay. Did you find that you have the same level of interaction? Or did this, was this something that grew over time and how did it turn out?

Raymond: 00:49:14 Hey Raymond here, and if you're listening to this, you are listening to the free version of today's interview. If you want to hear more from today's guest about the business of photography, consider becoming a premium member every week. Guests answer questions about products, pricing packages, and so much more. It will help your growing photography business thrive. This is the next logical step to join head over to beginner photography, podcast.com and click the premium membership button at the top of the page.

Raymond: 00:49:43 Change you. There you go. Oh man. Yeah, absolutely. That, that's, that's one of those things that is so powerful to learn. And once you experience that firsthand is when I feel like you can truly, you can truly become the photographer that you're meant to be, if that makes sense.

Chris Orwig: 00:50:05 I think that is it. I think, and I think the, the pay just allows you to be more of yourself, right? And if the pay doesn't, let's say, you know, you're kind of, you know what I mean? More of yourself like it. I think it's like any job that we get maybe in life, but when you, when the pay kind of cause pay is just energy. It's just like now I get to do more of this thing and if I'm getting to do more of the thing that I truly love and people, it resonates with people and the results resonate, everyone wins. But if I'm getting paid to do this thing that isn't really me and I'm kind of faking it, you can pull it off for a little while, but eventually it all falls apart. And so that's where I, I, cause I see students do that.

Chris Orwig: 00:50:50 I see them, you know, get so excited or, or get overwhelmed or whatnot. And, and maybe what I mean by that is my first paying job or any paying job, I'm still dreadfully nervous every time. I mean, I don't know why I feel like I should be over it by now, but I am not. No, I'm thinking like, like I, I keep thinking like I might blow this, I might totally not get the shot. You know, there's no guarantee photography. There's never a guarantee. It doesn't matter how much of a quote master of the craft you are, there is no guarantee. And I just have learned to lean into that. That's okay. And if I'm photographing someone who I am really, really nervous to photograph like a famous person, I try to not be impressed by fame, but sometimes I am, because, you know what I mean?

Chris Orwig: 00:51:37 Like some famous people I don't really care about, but then there's those ones where I'm like, Oh my gosh, my whole life, if I could meet one person, it's this person. Who is it? Well I, the first one that came to mind right now, as you said, that was bono from the band. Youtube. Yes, yes. But I, I think like if it was that I don't know, he's kind of a down to earth person too, but if whatever person it was and I, I, there's times where I say, I just got to tell you I'm totally nervous because I've, I mean, I know this is so nerdy and I know you get this all the time, but I've just, I've admired you my whole life and the moment's finally here and I just don't want to blow it. And, and usually people respond to that like, ah, don't worry about it man.

Chris Orwig: 00:52:19 I like this. We got this. And then like when they say we got this, they're basically now your teammate, they're actually going to give me something that I couldn't have created if I was trying to just like act all cool. Like, Oh yeah, like I'm cool guy and I don't, you know, so anyway, the point being is I'm being honest with that. As those things happen, it's a great way to do it, you know? And I'm sure weddings are like that too, where, I mean, you can just cause I'm thinking of weddings I photograph or whatever people photograph, you know, there's times where like something's overwhelming just going to a wedding. It's like, Hey, I gotta just tell you right now, this is so overwhelming. The music is so loud right here. I feel like we're trying to create romantic pictures, but it's just so hard for me to do this. Do you guys have any thoughts? And there'll be like, I felt the same way. Let's walk over to that other tree over there just like 20 feet away from the speaker. I know we told you beforehand we want it here, but let's go over there and now you're collaborating and you went,

Raymond: 00:53:19 Yeah, yeah, yeah. I've never personally been in that situation, but I could see how how that could be beneficial. Just cause again, it can be stressful on our wedding day and it's always hot in the reception. And once they walk outside they're like, Whoa, this feels wonderful. This happened to me just two weeks ago where it was outside. It was like literally subzero, like minus 30. Oh my gosh. Or not minus three degrees, but it was, it was 30 degrees, so it was below zero. And there in the reception it was very hot, very warm. And when I asked him to come outside, they both walked outside and like, Oh, this is wonderful. Like this is fantastic. And you're like, it is below freezing right now. What do you mean? This is fantastic. But it's just that time away and their own personal experience that they bring to that, which is, which is great.

Raymond: 00:54:05 But speaking of personal experience I got, I got a technical question for you and this isn't, we don't talk about this much on the podcast, but I want to talk about your switch to Sony. You know, you talked about being an ambassador for Sony, but for years you were shooting cannon. Yes. And so in the beginning of photography podcast, Facebook group, I see a lot of posts from new photographers asking, you know, I don't like my one camera. What's the best camera set up? Right. And I think on like what they're asking them, I think what they're looking for is that they're not happy with the images that they're taking and they're hoping that it's purely the camera's fault and that once they switched to a new system, they'll be taking much better photos. But as a professional or in your words, the professional amateur.

Chris Orwig: 00:54:54 Yeah, yeah. I'll tell him, embrace that. And I as the amateur thing, you know, the word obviously means love and friendships. So it's like someone who loves it, but yes, go ahead. Yeah,

Raymond: 00:55:04 Close in. Exactly. What goes into that decision of switching brands for you?

Chris Orwig: 00:55:10 Yeah, that was huge for me because I had so much gear and mostly as all of us photographers know, you don't buy all your gear at once, so you buy, you buy the camera and then you save up for that one and the lens and then that one. Then eventually years later someone looks at your drawer full of gear and they're like, Oh my gosh, you know, how did you do this? And it's like, well, it took me 10 years, you know, or whatever. So I had all of that. And, and more than anything, I had this comfort, you know, just this, I didn't like the gear. I think gear should disappear. There should be no awareness or thought process related to gear. It should just kind of become invisible, kind of become you know, let's just go to music. It's like the person playing the guitar isn't like, well this is such and such a brand guitar.

Chris Orwig: 00:56:04 They're thinking musically, they're not thinking about the gear or the mic or the amp or they're, I mean, they did all that work and they know all that so intimately that by the time they're actually creating the music, they're onto the musicality of it, not onto the technical side of it. So one of the things I think about with that, and I'll answer question in a roundabout way, is, is first of all, like any camera that you just walk into a store close your eyes and hold your hand out and grab a camera is good enough. I mean, like deer right now is so amazing. It's ridiculous. So it's all good enough. And this is true of all the mobile phones we've had at this place. I mean my kids have old mobile phones, but they're still good enough. Those have still captured images that have been published in national geographic in our museum.

Chris Orwig: 00:56:48 So gear is good enough. I mean that like, like let's just get that out of the way. Then second, I think it really is about finding something that you feel sort of connected to in the same way. Let's go to guitars for a second and imagine if you don't play the guitar, imagine you go to the guitar shop and there is a wall with 30 guitars on it. They all kind of look the same. And they're acoustic guitars. I mean they basically have six strings. They have different sort of shapes. They have different wood. They're made out of the rock. But what happens with guitarists is they'll pick up guitars and they'll play a song on it and he wants to try another one. Then they'll kind of find one where like, wow, I can't quite articulate why, but I like this one. And so I think with, with camera gear, I'm kind of a non technical person when it comes to gear.

Chris Orwig: 00:57:39 I'm asking is do I like it? Does it feel right? And obviously that has to be technically amazing. Obviously image quality is crazy important. You know, all those kinds of things are in there. And so part of it for me, it took me I think almost three years to make the switch. A lot of people make the switch like overnight. I'm just like, Oh my gosh, I had two cameras, you know, and then I kinda got to the tipping point and eventually kind of sold everything off and went to the other other thing or went to Sony. But the, the so anyway, I'm just, the reason I'm saying that is if you're considering making a switch, don't feel the need to rush it. Rent something, test it. Cause everything is different in your hand than it is online.

Chris Orwig: 00:58:34 Does it matter how many reviews you read? There's always the negative reviews. There's always a positive. You just have to experience that. And then what it is for me, I mean kind of getting to the brass tacks, why the heck would I switch going? Mirrorless means I can shoot back light and not fry my eyes. And I love backlight. And people who shoot backlight without mirrorless means they're actually magnifying the sun into their eye, even if they just catch the edge of the sunshine and they're not directly backlight. And that's really bad, really bad for your eyes. So while on a, on a mirrorless camera, you're looking at an LCD screen and so you could literally point the camera straight at the sun and it wouldn't affect your eyes as long as you had one eye closed and one eye on the camera. You know what I mean?

Chris Orwig: 00:59:18 Yeah, totally. Which is the way most of us shoot I think. Yeah, good point. So that I love and then the size and then the other thing is the focus. What I find, I got really good at shooting Shiloh and I like shout up the field and with, with Canon I think I could get probably two or three out of 10 shots tack sharp when I'm shooting it. Really, really shallow depth of field. And now with my Sony stuff, I mean this sounds exaggerated but nine or 10 out of 10 shots are sharp and I actually don't even focus anymore. And it, it first it was so disappointing. It is so funny. But cause I, it took me a decade to get really good at focusing and important shirt cause when you're photographing people, it's all about the eyes for me. And you have the, you know, this little teeny slice of focus.

Chris Orwig: 01:00:03 So I earned it. Like I had the skill and then when I went to Sonia I was like, that skills are irrelevant. Like that. Like, come on you guys kind of like, I was like, the guy was like, when I was in school, I used to walk both, you know, uphill both ways. Now your kids ride electric scooters or, or you know, or you ride snowmobiles. Yeah, yeah. You know what I mean? And I was like, but then once I got over that initial ego element, you know, where it's like loss of ego there I was like, this is, this is actually a paradigm shift for me because there have been times where my emotion, I'm really, you know, let's say I like I've mentioned, I cried after a photo shoot or something really intense is happening. I can sort of trust my camera even when I can't quite see clearly or I can allow things to happen that I couldn't before and I can compose a new ways.

Chris Orwig: 01:00:57 Then I can, I know there's different ways people like back button focus or different things, but now basically there's freedom and freedom can be dangerous cause you're like, well I can do anything I want, but I sort of learned, Oh this is kind of soulful and, and so back to the guitar, like you hear the strum of the guitar, I'm like, Oh, this resonates. I like this and it doesn't, I, you know, I am an ambassador and so I am biased to got, you know, got to say all that. But when I first shot Sony, I put tape over all of my cameras. I've always done that over the logos and stuff. And then now I've been at a few Sony events and they're like, Chris, why do you always cover up our name? You know, I'm like, yeah. I'm like, well you know, I don't know.

Chris Orwig: 01:01:40 I, it's like an old cause journalists used to do that. My old journalists friends, cause then people ask you about the camera and they're getting into the camera and in a portrait shoot, almost every time in the shoot I hand my camera to the subject. I'll be like, Hey, can you hold this while I tie my shoe? Or I set it on the ground and I do that. Cause I don't want them to think this is a $5,000 piece of equipment that I need to be afraid of. Which it really is, but I just want, Oh, it's just this kind of thing we're using. And it doesn't really matter. I'm trying to belittle the significance of that, but either way that's why I did it. I don't know if that makes sense. Yeah. and and it's been happy and I feel like I'm part of a community and a family in a way I've never had before.

Chris Orwig: 01:02:23 And I say all of that too with people to never say someone else needs to switch. Cause the worst thing in the world with all of this camera stuff online now is people are so discontent. The new version comes out, they're like, Oh, or someone else hypes some other camera system and they're like, Oh I, I'm not, I don't have that. And the reality is that's just noise and, and it's all, remember I started, it's all good enough and it's all great enough. And the goal I think as a photographer is to say, rather than say that if, then what if, if if I had that, then I could do something great. It's like, you know what, I only brought one lens with me and it's a 35 and I want to do portrait. I don't like 35 for portraits personally, but I'm going to lean into that.

Chris Orwig: 01:03:12 I mean, cause what are my options? Like wish I had a different camera. I wish I had a different lens. Wish it, you know that that thinking doesn't work. I like the Picasso thing, the quote where he said, if I don't have red, I use blue. And I think that's one of the most profound things he's ever said. I use blue. Yeah. Which is, you know, as photographers we think, well, if only, you know, the, the wardrobe was a little different or if only the light was a little better or, but the, I think the artists out there, they're like, Oh, it's red. You know, red, I ran out of red, I'll use blue or, you know, and I think that's why you can hand a camera to people who are really good photographers, doesn't matter the brand, make, model anything. And, and I've been around some of those people the CRISPR cards, one of them, I hung out with him.

Chris Orwig: 01:04:02 He's, he's a, a venture, a travel photographer. And I've been standing where he's standing and I'm just like, I have no idea how the heck he created that. And in a situation say with his phone, I have the same phone he has, you know. So there's, we're equal in that way, but he somehow instinctively and intuitively and quickly tapped into something I completely overlooked. So anyway, that, you know, so gear, you know, gear is good. It's great, it's fun. The other thing I will say with gear too, cause I tried to not get people to into the whole gear race is that gear can also ignite a fire. Like remember I say in the beginning when I got my camera, the momentous moment. And so that happens to me. Like when I get a new lens I'm like, Oh my gosh, I got to kind of step up my game because this lens is a really good lens and we all know you can make really horrible pictures with really expensive gear.

Chris Orwig: 01:05:00 Very much so. Yeah. And so you kind of have to like raise to the challenge. Like this lens is calling me to step up my game. Like, I don't know, 35 very well, I better figure this out. I better, you know, I better figure out where this breaks, where this falls apart, how, how close I can get, how far away, how high, how low, how everything. So anyway, I do think gear can really ignite a fire if someone is an adult drum and if they are completely stuck, gear can help. I'm not advocating that you go out and buy everything you want. Too much gear too quickly is the worst thing you can do for yourself as a photographer. But sometimes a single piece of gear, like I'm considering getting a GoPro. I don't like GoPros. I don't like that super wide angle lens.

Chris Orwig: 01:05:42 But for some reason I have this instinct that I need to learn how to shoot ultra wide and with a small format with not being able to see the image. You know, it's equivalent. Maybe if someone picking up a film camera, if they've never shot film and they're like, you know, it's like it teaches you things that you, you won't know what you learn until after you go through the experience. Yeah. That makes sense. Like imagine like if I said, okay, here's your challenge, I'm giving you a GoPro, go shoot your next wedding. And you would, you would work harder in preparation for that. And I would say, and this wedding, it's going to be televised and it's going to be in people magazine. That's a huge budget. And you have one GoPro and you know, you would just

Raymond: 01:06:27 Hopefully two or three dozen batteries.

Chris Orwig: 01:06:29 Yeah, you have battery, you, whatever, you know, if all the supplies you want. But just the only camera lens combo you have is this. I imagine it would ignite a fire in you that would just be absolutely crazy and there's no guarantee anything would turn out. But I guarantee you would learn a lot.

Raymond: 01:06:49 Oh man. That is quite a challenge. In fact. Could you imagine that? What if you had to do that? Oh that'd be horrible. As somebody who loves GoPro, GoPro is probably one of my favorite cameras only because it removes me from the equation of photography. And I've talked about this plenty of times on the podcast. Whenever I go on vacation, the only camera that I'll bring is my GoPro because I don't look at the camera, I just turn it on. I just, I turn it onto burst mode. So it will take three photos in a second or five photos and two seconds. I believe. I'll just take the picture whenever something is happening later on. I choose the decisive moment and then that's it. I was still there with my kids. I had fun and I'm willing to take that hit of image quality. Even though right now the image quality is fantastic, but I'm willing to take that bit of a hit to be able to enjoy more of that time with my kids. But as far as a wedding goes, I have learned a lot of the limitations of a GoPro. And you're right, I would Oh man, I would, I would prepare for weeks.

Chris Orwig: 01:07:52 Yes. And you would do test shoots and you would, do you know what I mean? And nonstop. Yeah. And so that's where I think too with gear, you know, I know we're going to little exaggerate with the GoPro, but for someone listening, if they're kind of thinking about gear think about it, not just the excitement of it's shiny and it's new and it's well-reviewed, but just say like, what is this piece of gear going to teach me? And then I think when that box up and you unbox it, you have to ask yourself that question. You know, what, why is this? Why is this in my life and what is it going to teach me? Because it's going to teach you something if you're willing to listen to it. If you kind of are like, wow, I got this figured out and I know and I'm going to go kind of impose my will on it, you won't really get to know a lens or a camera very well.

Chris Orwig: 01:08:34 But I think if you step back and say, wow, you know, it taught me the 85 taught me. I really like to work up close. But you know what, this, this is true story. I was talking to a friend about this that I was saying, you know, I feel like I, I'm stuck in my photography is there, my friend's name is Katrina Heisman and I, and I, I just need to figure out how to grow. And we were at this photography event and she said, well Chris, here's the deal. It's so obvious you love the 85 you always shoot up close, you're up close. Stuff's amazing. You know, it's an all your bugs. I've, everyone loves it. But you need to think like a cinematographer. You need to have the, you know, the, the scene setting shot which is pulled back the mid level shot and then the up close.

Chris Orwig: 01:09:17 Scott, you're just missing two of the three shots. And I thought, Oh my gosh, you know, you are, I mean like, like my immune. So obvious. But then I did what she said and my results just went through the roof. And part of that meant I had to change my gear cause you can't shoot a wide angle scene setting shot with an 85. I mean you can step back far away but eventually it just, just too narrow of an angle of view. Right. So so anyway, ask yourself, what, what, what is this gear going to teach me? And then, you know, maybe back to the guitarist or something, sometimes you, you get a lens and you realize what it taught me is I actually don't like this lens or this camera. That's okay. Part ways. You know, I think some of us feel we feel this burden of ownership of like will that cost so much? And it's like, you know, as artists sometimes you make expensive mistakes. Like yeah I'm going to lose $400 cause I'm going to have to sell it used. But this just isn't for me. And I've, you know, I've had to make those mistakes for, hopefully you ran it beforehand. Hopefully you don't have to do that. But I mean we've all done it, right? Yeah.

Raymond: 01:10:27 I mean, the thing unfortunately with renting, and I am a huge advocate for renting, is that at some point you just don't have enough time with something to truly learn. You know what it can do. But I will say that when I first started shooting weddings, it was with zoom lenses cause I thought I was like, Oh, the 24 to 72 ways. Like that's, that's the wedding lens you gotta have. And I was the laziest photographer in the world because I just zoomed into everything. I didn't move my feet. And after that first wedding, I was like, Nope. And sold it immediately. My wife was like, you just bought this lens. And I was like, I know, but I'm going primes, I gotta shoot primes. And that's, that's what I did because I figured out that it wasn't right for me. But at the same time, I've rented other zoom that I've thought, what am I doing shooting primes? It's so versatile and I can get so much more. Or so, it just all comes at a time.

Chris Orwig: 01:11:21 It does. And I also think to Matisse, the painter, you know, later in his life, he was in a wheelchair and he would put his brushes on these huge long poles and you had paint these big pieces sitting in his wheelchair and then he couldn't do that anymore. So he went to paper cutouts and he used scissors and he cut out paper and created these beautiful pieces. I actually liked some of his cutouts more than his paintings. But what I love about that is how he adapted. And what I mean by that is at different ages we're able to physically carry different camera gear, or maybe the primes like right now are great for you, but, or for me for that matter. But let's just say, I don't know. I have a break my ankle and I need that to be able to zoom in and zoom out because I'm not as mobile or I need that really light small camera.

Chris Orwig: 01:12:06 I think the, the people who create great work are like, that's okay. You know, I'm gonna, I'm gonna adapt to this stage in my life. And that's another, you know, reason. These mirrorless cameras are so nice. I can have this powerful kit that's really small and light and shoot certain ways. And so I think as we navigate through our arc as human beings and as people and I'm responding to that either emotionally, cause sometimes emotionally it's like I am up close. I like want to be right there. But then for me sometimes I'm like, I am so overwhelmed with all this up close

Chris Orwig: 01:12:40 Yeah. It's like, it's almost like eating something that's really good, but just too much of it does. It's healthy food, but it's like you can only eat so many blueberries or I don't know, something like that, you know, it's like I need to step back and so I need to change my gear and respond to that. And so seeing coming up with this kind of emotional, intimate relationship with gear is what I've found makes photographers really good. Rather than having this relationship based on the latest reviews, the latest YouTube videos and the excitement surrounding just with gadgetry and buying stuff. Because that's important. Buying a guitar that's well-made is important. But the question is can you create something that's musical and beautiful and expressive? And so if we can apply that musical analogy to our camera gear it can help out.

Raymond: 01:13:32 At least that's my take. Yeah. Yeah. It all goes back to kind of figuring out who it is that you are as a person and how you shoot a scene and what it is that you like. And unfortunately, you know, YouTube reviews aren't going to tell you what it is that you like. Youtube reviews aren't going to tell you you know what's right for you and it just does take that personal, personal experience. So before I let you go, I've kept you board ever. We're going to keep talking all day. I wish I could, but I got my seven year old is not going to be happy if I don't show up to pick him up from school. So I've got, I want to know from you though, what the one thing in 2020 that new photographers who are listening right now should really focus on if they want to start taking better portraits.

Chris Orwig: 01:14:21 Yeah. I would say the one thing that will kind of catapult your growth, your career or vocation or hobby or whatever it is, is to photograph people that matter to you. And the trick with photography, there's a myth that I like to try to dispel, which is some teachers will say, if you want to capture more interesting photographs stand in front of more interesting things. I think that works some of the time, but it's, it's a little bit misplaced in the sense that in portraiture, if you want to get good at portraiture and you've never captured a portrait of your dad, you need to do that. Or of your daughter or if your best friend or of that person you see every day that serves your coffee, that has those earrings and tattoos. You need to take that risk as this is someone you've known for a decade and you care about and they care about you and you're going to somehow create that picture.

Chris Orwig: 01:15:16 So if you want to capture more interesting portraits, take photographs of people that matter to you, there's a greater chance that they will then matter to someone else and try to resist the urge to go the easy route and photograph people that have some kind of a dramatic look. That's what we tend to think. You know, someone gets into it and they're like, Whoa, my so-and-so. And it's like, yes, do that. That's fine. But photographing, let's say an iron man triathlete who's really muscular and handsome and striking it's, it's not gonna, you're not gonna learn as much and it's not going to be as good of a picture compared to you photograph your brother and cause that's going to be awkward and hard and interesting and all those things. So that would be my one tip is photograph people that inspire you, that you admire, that you care about and that will then all that care will show up in those frames. And I think people will sense and feel that and it can be a great way to grow and learn.

Raymond: 01:16:19 Wow. She's a, all of a sudden I'm thinking about all the people who I want to photograph here in a, in 2020 and just really, really make a difference. Chris, man, thank you so much for coming on and sharing so much about your journey and how it is that you as I said in the intro, how you capture the essence of a human within a single photograph. So again, I just have to say thank you so much for coming on, but before I let you go, can you share with the listeners where they can find you and more of your work online?

Chris Orwig: 01:16:48 Yeah. And thank you too. Thanks for keeping me on, on track and sorry, I've gone on all these tangents and stuff and I'll look forward to hanging out. When we're at that conference and I'll capturing a portrait of you too. Well we'll do some dueling portraits, but yeah, just my name, which is Chris and then Orwig, O, R, W, I G. That's what I use for Instagram, my website, Facebook, all those. So that's really easy. And I have a new book that's come out, which I'm really proud of called authentic portraits we mentioned. So if you do a search for that at any of the online bookstores or at your local bookstore, you can find it there. And yeah, thanks a ton. This was, this was fine. I feel like we've been friends for years and this is a great way to start a friendship. I look forward to to the future ahead. Let's hang out some more and thanks to those of you who listened as well. If you want to reach out you can do so by you know, Instagram or my website and I love connecting with people who have a passion for photography in any way I can help or share. I love to be able to, to do that. So thanks for listening. Appreciate it.

Raymond: 01:17:52 I gotta tell you, I I already look forward to having Chris on again in the future so that we can finish our conversation with all the questions that I wasn't able to get to because just again, we simply ran out of time. It was just so much fun to chat. So, Chris, if you're listening, thank you from the bottom of my heart. Thank you so much for coming on and sharing so much. Not only about your early days in photography, but how you approach life and your portraits. So again, thank you for the listeners. I want to know what your biggest takeaway was from this interview. Me personally, it was my biggest takeaway was when Chris said that the camera is simply an instrument for capturing wisdom. Simply an instrument for capturing wisdom. That right there kinda, you know, made me, made me pay attention.

Raymond: 01:18:50 Like, Whoa, Whoa. You know, what does that mean? And I think you can tell that the Chris just has a genuine curiosity for his subjects. And that is what makes him able to really see who his subjects are and capture them correctly. You know, and one of the great things about that is that you can do that. That is a skill that you can develop. Curiosity is a skill that you can, that you can harness and, and bring into your photography. You know, it's not just something that you're born with. And remember earlier in the interview, Chris said that he looked back at his early work from high school and it was not good and he is not naturally a talented photography photographer and he has had to work on his craft continually to get to where he is today. So can you, so can I, so I want you to share your biggest takeaway with me in the beginning of photography podcast, Facebook group, and I really look forward to hearing it from you. So that is it for this week. Until next week, I want you to get out. I want you to keep shooting. I want you to stay safe and I want you to focus on yourself. So that's it. I love you all.

Outro: 01:20:11 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 174: Dima Sytnik - AI and the Future of Editing

Enjoy the videos and music you love, upload original content, and share it all with friends, family, and the world on YouTube.

Dima Sytnik is the Cheif Technical officer of Skylum, the company behind the photo editing software Luminar. With their newest release Luminar 4 they promise to save you time when editing by using AI to assist in the most mundane parts of the editing process.

Click Here To Learn How AI Can Speed Up Your Editing Workflow and Order Now!

Use Code “BPP” for $10 OFF Your Order of Luminar 4!

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How Skylum got started in photography

  • How AI can speed up our editing

  • The privacy concerns with AI and how Skylum solved them

  • Why Luminar 4 is different than any other photo editor

  • How AI Sky replacement works

  • Most common issues photographers face when retouching portraits and how Luminar 4 solves them

  • Who Luminar 4 is perfect for

Resources:

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast. And today we see the future of editing and it is AI. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:08 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raman interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, father, home brewer, LA Dodger fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer, Raymond Hatfield. Welcome back, back

Raymond: 00:38 To today's episode of the podcast. As always, I am your host Raymond Hatfield and I am so excited for you to be here. I truly appreciate you and you know, checking out what it is that we have to share today. So today is actually a podcast episode that will be one that I look forward to hearing in, I don't know, five to seven years time when the powers of AI and machine learning are in just about everything that we use as photographers. Because today, what we're gonna talk about is really the first step into the future. So a little backstory. Skylum is a company and they are the makers of the popular photo editor called Luminar and they are getting ready to release Luminar 4, which actually they're not getting ready to release. It comes out today, which it actually makes a huge leap forward by focusing on AI to speed up your editing and expand your creative possibilities.

Raymond: 01:34 So today I'm going to be talking with the chief technical officer of Skylum and a, which is the creator of Luminar. And you know, we just talk about everything that Luminar can do. So if you're listening to this right now, you may be thinking to yourself that AI in photography is cheating, or maybe you have concerns about privacy. And these are things that we tackle in this interview because these issues are are, are my concerns as well. You know, so your concerns are my concerns. So, you know, hold on and get ready for this interview. But first I want to give a huge shout out to both Bobby and Tyler for leaving a for leaving the podcast, a review in iTunes. Now, Bobby said in his review that he loved everything that Chris Owens shared back when he was when I interviewed him back in episode one 59.

Raymond: 02:32 And that was a fantastic episode. If you don't remember, Chris Owens is the lead photographer of the Indianapolis motor Speedway, which shoots the Indianapolis 500 and a, I mean, he really gets into the logistics of what it takes to shoot such a sporting event. So go back and check that one out again. That's episode one 59 and Tyler, Oh, Tyler Tyler is one of the few listeners who I have had the pleasure of meeting in person and it has just been fantastic to see his photography grow as much as it has. You know, it's cool to see cause he's, you know, he's, he's going places, he's going places. So really awesome both of them for leaving a review. So again, thank you both so much. You each have an everlasting place in my heart for your kindness. Honestly, I cannot properly explain how grateful to I am to everyone who has left the podcast a review.

Raymond: 03:29 So again, Bobby Tyler, thank you. Now before I start tearing up over here, there's one last thing that I want to clarify, which we actually didn't get to in the interview. Which is that many new photographers, you know, don't want to make the commitment of a monthly subscription for editing software like Adobe light room or Photoshop. And I get that. If you're just not shooting a ton right now, then I wouldn't want to pay for it either. But I asked and confirmed that Luminar for the program that we're going to talk about today is a one time purchase and not a monthly subscription. Now, on top of that, I think it's super reasonably priced as it is, especially for how powerful it is. And on top of, on top of that, I actually have a code after, after the interview for you to use, which will save you even more money and make it a no brainer. So stay tuned after the interview for that code. Okay. Let's go ahead on and get into today's interview with Dima Sytnik. Today's guest is Dima Sytnik, the chief technical officer of skylum, a company behind the photo editing software Luminar with their newest release Luminar 4. They promise to save you time when editing by using AI to assist in the editing process. This is going to be quite an episode. Dima thank you so much for coming on the the beginner photography podcast.

Dima Sytnik: 05:01 Thank you so much for having me. I really appreciate and I will be glad to answer all your questions and the help your audience was seeing bigger pictures of what we're doing and about photography. And I'm ready to share all my ideas and thoughts on this.

Raymond: 05:19 This is, this is exciting. This is like a whole new world when it comes to photography by using AI and just seeing the opportunity that the future has. Now I know that some photographers are gonna have a specific questions about you know, whether or not that, but still legitimizes them as a photographer. And we're gonna get into this deep because I've had some time to play around with the software. And I got my own personal questions to ask you, but before we get to those, can you tell the audience a little bit about how Skylum got started in photography?

Dima Sytnik: 05:54 Oh, it's actually a long because a, I started Skylum with my friend Paul, but before scholar ma, I was a developer in a small computer game company. So we created computer games and we not been like hired or we do it for fun. So I got a lot of big round of a you in the image process and, and, and, and, and truly mathematics. And we started to create small games for iPhone when I also was the, it was got the ability to create own apps sexually. And we was one of the first companies and we use names like Macphun and the beginning. And so, but just creating small games was not, not for me. And I, as in, we started looking around and see what kind of other cool thing we can do. And the, we started to create small apps for image processing.

Dima Sytnik: 06:53 We was among one of the first apps with a special effects for, I also actually, and this app was called Epic photo studio, but the first name was like 100 for the fielders. So all our, that's true. And what our competitive advantage was to create 100 different full of filters. And it was quite popular at the time. But slowly we start to grow. I mean, code base is will get bigger and bigger. And we was really interested in the, into the like high quality image processing because at the time mobile photography was so childish. And we moved to the desktop actually because I'm not just interested into the, in, in the engineering, but I was interested in the internet photography and I was really curious what new we can do for photographers. And we started to create a more advanced software for a desktop.

Dima Sytnik: 07:54 We created efx studio for the rest of the new graded creative scheme. Then we slowly moved to the [inaudible] and actually right now where we are. So we changed the name to Skylum when we got released a windows version because may Macphun was a little bit cheesy for them. And like we, we are really aiming for that business business oriented companies. So we can do some kind of bizarre things. But with this name it was do we treat you? So like for future, like it's a bad idea to include names of other company or best product of other company into your company name. That's advice for guys. But at the time we think just about as fast as fast, as fast as possible to or in your company to start making games for mobile. It was like, I saw that it was done in two days and the name was the last thing that I think about.

Dima Sytnik: 08:53 So, and the right now, we actually a pretty big company, more than 140 people and we hope we're really focused on the new technologies. And the image processing. And we moved from four, from mobile to desktop. It's quite opposite from other companies. But at the moment actually we take a look to bring over latest technologists and the high quality image processing to the back to the mobile because it, it's just grown up from the timing. We started significantly. And the overall goal is to provide a advanced and a session essentials to, for everyone who actually interested in photo editing no matter what kind of, they weren't going to use old technologies.

Raymond: 09:45 I think it's funny that you know, the last thing that you thought about was the name because for a lot of times photographers, that's the, that's the very first thing that they think about and then they worry about the photography side second, but so worried about the name and getting it right. It's great to see that obviously the name isn't as important as a, the technology or the product behind behind the name. So that's definitely a lesson for photographers to take. Now I have had the opportunity to test out your newest offering Luminar 4, for a few days now. And the big selling point of Luminar for it is that it's using AI to help in the editing process. So before we talk about how AI is being used to edit photos, can you tell me, I guess, give me a good explanation of what exactly is AI?

Dima Sytnik: 10:37 So that's, that's, that's, that's quite simple. If we, if you like I can like say about like Luminar actually all filters named AI means the results of their work will depend on the content of your images. Like they contend to where, so actually other tools without AI name, they like they can be very complex and very cool. I, I don't underestimate them and I don't over evaluate AI tools, but they like work same way on every single photo. But AI tools are different. They take a look at your photo, they automatically just wants to build ranges for image to keep it like real. They actually change their board based on the image content and under AI tools. I understand set of different algorithms which can do the thing. They have a combination of machine learning technologist to do image recognize, recognizing but and segmentation and enhancement with most cases.

Dima Sytnik: 11:53 It's like a really combination with the, yeah, I I mean machine learning technologists and classical glutens with some kind of decision trees. So they, they quite complex and it's not like marketing term as like other people think. No. We actually thinking about how we can change the way how people edit photos, take out the boring stuff and bring in new abilities for most of the customers that you rate results in a simple way. It's quite like complex process. But I think this is, this is actually the most important thing that we are doing in the software because at the moment there is a lot of different photo editing software or image. I an and actually they preach same right now they can, people with actually interfaces. There's hundreds of them on mobile phones, on the desktops. And only what they do in is the rub, the same shade, those highlights groups contrast in a different user interfaces.

Dima Sytnik: 13:00 We didn't want to be same. And we just got focused on the eye like in the last 93 years. And most of the damages that we got right now, it's just been released actually, they was in development like for two years because we set the bar quite high for us and they will continue to be improved. Actually. It's just release. I like not always happy with Oak cases, but I know that's, it's all direction and we've got step-by-step most of or tools that right now exist in the [inaudible] will be converted to the AI tools. And but there is this, there is still different tools without the I, it's, and they great, but not all, or not all tools should be based on the eye. But if I can benefit customers to save time on masking or brushing or something like this, that's actually what we're trying to do.

Raymond: 14:00 I see. So AI is, is, is becoming is scanning the photo, becoming aware of what it is looking at and then based on that it makes decisions to help enhance the photo in a way that is pleasing I suppose. Is that, is that

Dima Sytnik: 14:20 Yes. React, right. So they're pretty accurate. So first what we do is like trying to figure out what kind of results photographers will next year we talk with the photographers and see like what the are they are like work clothes, what kind of things actually they do with images, what kind of results they think it's great, what kind of results they think it's not that good. And we're trying to figure out what, what steps can be automated with the I and we use the AI in different steps of this like image I didn't know if workflow and it's side think like AI stuff is not about like just to remove the creativity or like a transform photography for from something else. Actually. It's just the way how to simplify workflows. And actually that's the, you are creator. They'll reverse our creative ever since.

Dima Sytnik: 15:26 Starts with the idea and like if you can achieve this results in simpler way that that's great. And it's like, like, Oh, how do we get ideas from like different old tool lets you purchase simple help of people like complaining that love now doesn't have like smart garage. Let's say we want a smart garage when the smart board, but that's okay. I really appreciated, we still don't have someone who's a lot of tool that people, asking and for me that's, that's completely okay. So I've got a lot of complaints about this and we do research and I say, OK, why doing it smart brush, what do you want to achieve with this? And most of the people said like, we will not do enhanced sky or replaced sky. And we came up first with a Sky enhancement tool you don't into brush and just when one father and son and second to this kind of placement.

Dima Sytnik: 16:12 So when people ask us about share with, trying to ask why, why do you need this? And most cases, a first answer is not actually what people want to achieve. It's just the way they think it will be able to help them achieve result actually. And we want to think deeper and deeper. And we wanted to simplify and automate this process because I think like we want to make broad from the idea to the end result as simple as possible and totally makes sense. Oh, and actually we just get started. And what we have right now, Luminar is just the very beginning. We are working on different things right now and they will be released later on. And not, not, not as like advertisement. But like I think next year we'll bring it with two features as a free updates for Luminar for customers.

Dima Sytnik: 17:13 Because we want to move faster. It was because we want to bring more value and because one to differentiate us from other software interface, we'll be a little bit changed, but the way we think photographers will benefits. That's why we don't want to don't have not one to have any kind of comparison between us and other software. We are different in if people like try and say, Oh we want to find like lights or without subscription or something like this. That's, that's different than not where we go in. And so we wanted to replace all that stuff with a completely different processes. And most cases if, if, if people want to just to escape subscription, they want exactly exact replica of the old workflow and the to use it in the other software, but they don't want to pay some scoop from the arm.

Dima Sytnik: 18:04 And my perspective, a like other software like lie is great piece of software and it's super cheap and it's, it's not that expensive. And and we don't want to implement all the way how people actually edit for this oral goal is to reinvent how people edit photos. We want to make their lives simpler and easier and bring ability to be creatives for much wider audience than actually right now. Because I see a lot of like boring to tutorials who are for hours and hours, how they can achieve some kind of results and people can spend a lot of time learning this and they like a, but I want, I want to bring this like super powers to end customers with the new technologies because I think like new technologists should solve problems, not create them. So for us is not, technology is actually a final result for us. Final result is the great results that people will be able to achieve with the technologist. That that's quite tricky. But I see that we can achieve in doing a lot of different great things here and luminaries it too. You can use it or I mean some tools inside look in our or you can L all the oldest stables, older tools. That's, that's completely okay. That's, that's it's a tool set for creative persons or creative photographers or the next century. That's what you want to build with Luminar.

Raymond: 19:36 Sure, sure. And that, again, that, that totally makes sense. But you brought up two things that I, that I really want to actually brought up. Three things that I really want to get into. The first talking about how you want Luminar to not be in direct competition to other photo editors but be its own entity. Something that doesn't have any competition. So aside from AI or maybe not aside from AI, I mean that's a really big, big selling point, but what makes Luminar different than other photo editors? Like fundamentally [inaudible]

Dima Sytnik: 20:09 So that, that, that, that, that that's quiet a wide question. Yeah. actually there, there is a difference. Where are we now and where we are going actually we are not, not there where we want to be actually. And we don't think you mentioned competition. Actually we don't want to be different just to be different. We just want to focus on the end user needs. And when you think about like why your competitor and over caring about like feature, feature parity or such a things you, you just stuck in that, that kind of a limitations for your brain and you will be just limited by competition. We're thinking about how we can benefit and customers within your thing that we can, can, can produce or core values. Here is a simplicity and a ability to achieve awesome results in a simple way.

Dima Sytnik: 21:10 I prefer something which will be pure and clear and don't have too much different options because in most cases at this option, soon solve with the AI tools. And some people say when like we have two simple for them, that's completely okay. Even we were so, so many. You cater, they say like, I, we sold them an hour and we can use it. Actually we can work with it because it's nothing to learn, I think. Great. So actually we're doing our job really good because I want to create such a candid to you that everybody can use without like spending hours and hours learn in different tutorials. I want to create something that will be very easy, but, but, but very powerful with a high culture results. That's actually our core values. And for sure we think about like a simplification, a use improvement user experience.

Dima Sytnik: 22:12 And we want to simplify and automate as much as possible things that actually people are doing in a seminar. And we do a lot of right now and customer surveys, user researchers, and we introduce some kind of like surveys for our customers so they can say how they use and how would they can then fit in the new technology. So that's that actually for me, it's the just very beginning of the big road and we gonna move this and that's why I'm pretty confident that we will introduce this, do new AI technologies in next year. I know you guys are like very marketing thing, but like weed doesn't got no other great indication of a smart filter that will work differently on each photo. So it's like, you know, how hiring somebody, and sometimes you might say, it's not what I expecting here.

Dima Sytnik: 23:14 Like if you move, for example, like in the classical way structure on the right, we see HDR like result in the, you applied every photo in the batch process, you've got all of them will be over crunch it and like, Oh my gosh, you might like it. But with AI structured it very smart on someone ridges it automatically enhance more detail. But if there is no important detail that can be extracted, the results will be very subtle. Some the people may be a little bit upset, but our goal is like solve problems to make images, high quality, stop people to make different tree team and just, I'm sorry. So that's kind of limitation but it's like a, it's, it's like you hired like professional retoucher and it, and, and, and it will told, you know, no guy, just please stop doing this thing. Make it subtle, make it high quality. You've got more likes even with it's results. So AI sometimes my stop you for doing some things, but again, that's why we use AI. It's not marketing thing. It's it's indication for users that this filters and technologist will decide by their own how they will retire. Just image.

Raymond: 24:29 Yeah. I love how after using Luminar for one thing that you said there, it was very clear how simple the interfaces. And at first I almost like was like waiting for more. At first I was like looking for things, so I was like, well where's this, where's that? Where am I missing things? But as time went on, as I was using the program more and more I realized, Oh I don't actually, you know, need the same tools in the same way that I was before. And the layout that is there is very clean. It's very simple and yet I could still achieve fantastic results. And like you were saying, it saves me time, which is, which is great specifically with this, this whole AI sky replacement, this is one of the coolest features is right. And this is a, I shared a video of me using it on Instagram last week and the response was incredible.

Raymond: 25:19 Like I made a quick poll, like, would you use this? Would you not use this? 90% of users said that they would absolutely use it. You know, having replaced the sky in photos that I've taken before in Photoshop. This, this is something that depending on trees and foliage and stuff could take 20, 30 minutes per image, you know, and then the results look good. But in Luminar 4 I was, I was able to, you know, click AI's got a replacement, I clicked a dramatic sky for it and it was done, you know, two clicks, brand new sky. So for those who are trying to get an idea of what this is, can you share where you got the idea for AI sky replacement what it is and are you supposed to be using it for, for every photo or just a select few.

Dima Sytnik: 26:08 Oh, great. So basically I explained to you how we came up with idea of sky replacement. So we've got a lot of questions about new features and people ask us all the time about smart brush and we figure out that actually they need this smart brush to achieve some kind of results. They don't need smart brows just to heaven. They had been in this smart brush to enhance Chi in most cases and replace sky. So we came up with this new technology was like very complex and it's like, it's, it's more than other technologist. A good thing about this, we finally got it pretty fast and it's all nondestructive so that that's, that's a huge difference. You can change your mind or original pilot's not, not touched actually. And you can change all the adjustments in real time and basically that, that that's, that's a pretty powerful technology and request in styles.

Dima Sytnik: 27:04 Do I just the part of story realizing and working with the transparent and semi transparent objects is actually the, even the biggest part of it. And we just get started and final version we'll have even much more improved technology for [inaudible] placement in which you will be able to convert like daylight photo to the nightlight with the night skies. You can try. I'm not sure actually your, your immersion is what's not able, but we will, we'll be when some night sky so you can play around and create some magical creations that's going to be fine. But that, that's pretty big. And basically you know that that's for every creative person's. I personally love to travel and I have all the different photos. I love photography, landscape, photography, lighting, landscape. But you know, weather is unpredictable sometimes to just climb the mountain time and like and see just pale sky on that like [inaudible] gray sky and I say, Oh my gosh, that's not that good.

Dima Sytnik: 28:09 Or for example, like sometimes your camera has not enough dynamic range and you just get blown out. Sky and even HDR and shadows, color highlights will not help to solve this problem. So for me, it's a great tool to enhance image and improve sky. His story about to use it or not to use, it's up to you. It's a two and everyone can use it and be like, it's inside a, like a personal, like a restriction server, like personal philosophy. If you don't want to replace kind of, not problem at all. But my opinion is like everyone teaching everyone to be, when I gave the grant results, like for example, if you buy a great lens with the bouquets and take a photo actually to teach teaching, no one will see this image in real life because you cheated with the hardware or low welcome exposure for example.

Dima Sytnik: 29:07 It's [inaudible] with the hardware too. And the way is restriction where you like start, shoot and what is the reality. So in most cases it's already there. Even like a Ansel Adams it's very famous photographers, most of the key spots is actually most enhanced Dudgeon burn and he wasn't in like an all processes and it wasn't there for, for a years. I, somebody told me that on the beginning of photography did pose a question to crop or not to grow. So, but it felt like grow up in this like take technology. But right now it's, it's, it's, it's widely acceptable and like say an about scar replacement for example. Yeah, you haven't met sky, but what if you take this guy, this guy, the one that you want to replace with like one hour before? Is it fake or not? People say maybe no that because they location one hour before.

Dima Sytnik: 30:04 What if you take this guy 24 hours that is a pretty car now so that there is no limitation. If you want to be creative person and the result is great, why not? For me, no, I will put people just against kind of placement because it's they sold too much but and low quality skier placement and or goal was to create something which will be as real as possible and it's up to you what kind of sky we want to use. In most cases, if we want to achieve completely real results, you should use Skype roughly from the same period of time. If you take to get a like sunset on satirize, you skies from this timeframe the, the nuance or if it's a daylight thought or use a timeframe from that period of time, yes, you can do crazy things like daylight to my plight. But again, a lot of people who are very, very like, you know, like strict about the quality and they may see some difference or signs that it's changed. But in most cases, if, if your goal to like bring more likeness the ground, nobody will see it.

Raymond: 31:22 I can promise you. Yeah. Yeah. You know what's interesting is having used it, you mentioned like poor sky replacement you know, photos where, where people have just done poor sky replacement. They just take out the sky and then they put in a new sky, different time of day, different, you know, location, just they just look terrible. And yet that's what I was expecting. That's what I was expecting at Luminar 4, but that is not what I got at all. I, I chose a photo that was a of a, of a bride that I had and it was kinda like near sunset ish. But when I clicked on one of the dramatic skies, I think I picked a sunset sky. And what I found was that not only did it do a fantastic job replacing the sky behind, you know, little patches of trees and being able to see behind that, but it changed the rest of the image, like an updated, the rest of the image.

Raymond: 32:15 It was a little bit warmer, there was a little more contrast and suddenly the image that I was looking at looked as if it came out of my camera. It didn't just replace the sky even if it was a different exposure, different contrast, different time of day, but it updated the rest of the image to appear much much more natural. And that is something that I have about because when it comes to AI, there's a, I I kinda also want to talk about privacy, right? When I think AI, and I could be wrong here cause I'm not a chief technical officer like yourself. So I'm hoping that you could help out here. When I think AI, I think big servers, lots of data. When we talk about AI, does this mean that our photos are being uploaded to some cloud somewhere and being analyzed before the decisions are, are, are coming back to us?

Dima Sytnik: 33:07 I am not, no. I actually, we're small company. We don't have a billions at the moment for cloud servers. So we have to be clever and protests. Everything on your local mission? It's the first symbol actually. What are you using at your local [inaudible]? It's pre-trained modals so we train models, we train with like narrow networks and you use it ready to use a technologist and we update them constantly with the software updates. But to train them, yes, we really using the big servers. We collect data we use with the guys who do training. So they do some marketing. So they do some segmentation. We train the AI to, to understand what kind of different transparencies. I would kind of different skies there is what kind of results on the achieve there is looking different neural networks and we use the a hundreds of thousands images actually.

Dima Sytnik: 34:09 Some of them is what a, as data sets from stocks. Some of them don't let it really from internet. Some of them was provided from all our customers or from our photographer that we work in with. Actually, we don't use any of your photos to train all those. We can only ask somebody if they face some problems. So we'll, it will be, they are able to provide us some kinds of images but a local messenger requires just, just actually had to have a like, pre-trained model to work with actually. And that, that that's the person who it's super private and secure for customers. And but the downside of this, you should have like better missions and like somebody might say like a Luminar is like slower than Lightroom. Yes, because it's depends on the eye and move really need a lot of memory, like 600 gigs.

Dima Sytnik: 35:09 So or technical acquirements is much higher than like other software like color or something like this. But in the end of the day you still get the results faster. Like for example, if you do portrait touch, you can synchronize among like whole photo session. Just go and drink tea or coffee or do one. And when you got back, you got the results and it's so like 90 or 70% of people actually you want to want to do, yeah, it's slower. But I think, you know, we still have a lot of room of for improvements and we've working close live with actually info and they really excited about or technologist. So, eh, they, they, they, they need something that can use their hardware as much as possible because they want to build a more powerful medicines. But at the moment most of the software trying to work just in the cloud, so nobody mean like more advanced measures, but will, it will be different kinds of software and the, well, it's computers who get junk at faster, you got the faster resolve.

Dima Sytnik: 36:24 But again, I completely appreciate it. We have some problems with performance and the we will solve them because the quality and the performance is one of, or a major goal for the next quarter after release of lumen are for. And there is a lot of room for improvements even right now even on your local mission. And we can make it much faster. But that's why we don't need like any competition and don't like any comparison because you just can compare the I technologists with the non request seek old one technologist. And the way we actually design Luminar right now, it's actually we clean up all the mess and we prepared to bring much more new add tools there. It may, it may seem like little bit empty, but that's, that's actually what we will gonna do in the future. We want to fill it with awesome creative tools and everyone can benefit from this.

Raymond: 37:29 So just to clarify, when it comes to the privacy of the photos that we have on our computers, our photos are not being uploaded and Luminar 4 is making these AI decisions based on hundreds of thousands of photos that you have analyzed on your end made decisions and then put it in the software itself so that when it comes to a computer, nothing gets uploaded. It just makes that decision right there on the computer. It doesn't go anywhere.

Dima Sytnik: 38:00 Absolutely. Right. That's true.

Raymond: 38:03 That's, that's genius. That is really smart. And as you said earlier, you know, there have been complaints about you know, Luminar for seeming to be slow. And I think at first I felt the same way. Like, Oh, this is, this is a little slow, but as you just said right there for the results that you're getting, it's still faster to wait that extra half second than it would be to, you know, change four or five more sliders and go into a tone curve or something within, you know, another editing program. It's still faster to wait for this, for Luminar 4 to, to finish what it's doing and and fix it. So maybe it's just a perception thing cause obviously more is going on in the background than it is with with other image editing software. So that's, that's really interesting and a good way to look at it because again, I, I really think that the, the, the results that came out of the images that I put in were fantastic and in very few clicks it was eye opening and it was very, very fun just to, just to play around with.

Raymond: 39:06 And one of the photos that I was working on was a, a portrait because obviously, you know, as replacement is gonna be great for landscapes, it's gonna be great for some environmental photos even at weddings. But I also wanted to test portraits. Portraits are very important to a lot of photographers. Not just wedding photographers, engagement, photographers, fashion photographers. The portraits kind of require a different skillset. So I know that Luminar 4 is using AI to help in the process of working on portraits as well. So what are some common issues that most photographers face when it comes to portraits and what needs worked on in the editing side?

Dima Sytnik: 39:46 So basically with the portrait tools we can use to gauge how portrait photographers actually using their tools to achieve results and what they paint that should, what kind of result they appreciate to be a great results. So we, we get focused on this and there's still call, we'll get rid of all tools like do automate to manually a big I smile face and never seen. So I a solved problem of phase selection and the moment it got the automatically with the texts all human skin because some of like all the old very old software, they just, when they say about skill enhancement they mean just the face actually the text phase and hence fates and the rest of the body can be significantly different from old. And then he and I that that's issued a tie solve a lot of time and then people wasn't happy with and actually yeah I watched them article, see like all old skin on different trays, different like colored tones.

Dima Sytnik: 40:55 And a apply enhancement on it to this area. And the world goal was to Greg something which can produce great results and, and, and, and keep human force, remove all old, like bigger problems or dark areas under the scheme, but make skin much better. And there is amount slider and mostly for tastes like actually the father you will, they're more fled skin, you God and that you should stop where you think it's, it's your like a preferable result and [inaudible] does everything else. And there's a UI like I can say Aetna or blemishes removal. So actually instead of using erase tool Clements column and STEM to AI, automatically analyze and then Andrew do it for you. Actually that's the perceptible. And but we appreciate, we still learn in the eyes. So we're still, we're still try to teach AI work better and that we get in a lot of different choirs how we can improve it.

Dima Sytnik: 42:02 And we does get started actually w w w right now we have a lot of really great positive results, but there is still some scarf cases and we strongly against any mental owl fine tune for AI or goal. If you don't happy with results, you should send us English and we will try night work by the this case particular. So it's, I, you know, nobody is perfect and by we are not perfect sometimes and we will go in and make it smarter and smarter and smarter. And that's, that's, that's the way, you know, it's like, like I never had the exchangeable battery, but in general it makes your life a little bit easier to care about like third party batteries, just more of the new replace your phone. That's super simple. And this kind of simplicity actually is, is our core values. So what make something to just work and and there's a portrait enhancer.

Dima Sytnik: 43:04 So that's that. That was pretty tricky to create something which can produce the way how professional photographers those phases we don't want to get and build something that will produce very like, like funny or cheesy effects. Like a lot of mobile apps extra right now is doing. They, they, they, they produced some kind of results that you can just get smile on it. It's not a high quote than professional results. And we've, we, we made this portrayed enhancer and actually this technologist pretty smart. So you don't care about Moskin for phase four. Like I's for April's, it doesn't pencil out magically and for us was really critical to preserve all the spores and, and hair, even small one on your face and produced something which will be very close to the professional retouch. And with this sliders, you can never go like too much.

Dima Sytnik: 44:09 Everything is in the ranges that like professionals will allow an appreciate, but it's not because they are professionals. They have some kind of taste sometimes. And like, we want to stay, we want to see results that can be accepted by our magazines or high-quality studios. Certainly can play around this and get on the result that you will be pleased with. And a that's like, or core values is not just to bring AI technologies on the table but produce something great with it and automate process of a scheme and price retouching and have all of much more other great things that we will bring in to this area. Yes. In general, you know, sometimes somebody say they eliminate, it doesn't matter. It doesn't have days and days, but we don't have this for reason. I think not having a feature is much better than heaven, badly implemented or have old fashioned feature.

Dima Sytnik: 45:11 So yes, it's, it took us much longer time than just to cook it somebody else's solution. But at the moment right now, all the solution that exists on the market actually wasn't very late, invented like around 20 years ago. So it is, and then the on the same, the same solution moves from one software to another to another to another. And they just wrap it in addition user interfaces, but use even the same like marketing with the Tyson and right now like Oh my gosh, so then there's like new money maybe trained or 40 or 50. My Jennifer, they wired the same. So oral goal is to change the way how you edit images and we're maybe not so fast with it but you know, all the bunch of things requires much more time. But at the end result it's much better than just using the old way to solve problems.

Raymond: 46:03 Of course, of course. And I realized now that that as we've been talking about Luminar 4 and AI, AI is kind of like has this a stamp on it as if like you just bring it in and it's done. But Luminar 4 isn't like that. Now while you can use obviously AI to say enhance the sky or or or use it to enhance a portrait, there is still flexibility, right? Like you can control how much yeah, I guess how far AI takes it in a certain direction. It's not like you just upload the photo AI takes over and then there's nothing that you can do. Correct.

Dima Sytnik: 46:39 Yes. Because you know right now everyone is artist I think and the photography is simplest form of art. It's very hard to learn how to pay or play music, but everyone can take photos. But if you take a look at the tutorials, there is so beauty tutorials on how to take photos or handle camera and so many tutorials with retouching and a lot of people like to say, okay, I'll just take photo and retouching and it's not for me that's complex. Even the sport can like harm somebody's ears. So all goal is to bring very simple tools to create awesome photography, images and photos and we call this approach. As I told you before, like a content aware image editing. We want to build tool where you can image and say, okay, I have a problem with the face. There is a two for phase, I have a problem with the sky. There is a two, four sky on her place. Okay. That's, that's the new Skype and the in which way stuff. Thinking about others occurs, flex White's, there is new layer change mode overlay. No, no, no, no. That's, that's not our way. Yeah, we have layers for sure. But or goal for future is to bring new tools that come to change the way how you do your photo editing and image editing.

Raymond: 48:00 I love it. And it's so, it's just so different. It feels refreshing, which is really fun because you know, as, as having been in photography for, you know, 15 years now sometimes it feels as if things can get a bit stale and to see something new come along is really, is really fun. It's refreshing. It's, it's, it's rejuvenating. So I've, I've been having a blast playing around with it. And I know that the listeners are going to enjoy it as well. In fact, I made a kind of a tutorial for using Luminar 4 that. I will post in the show notes of this episode if anybody wants to check it out and some of the key features that's going to be the place to find that. It's really, really interesting stuff. So before I let you go, can you share with me real quick? Who is Luminar perfect for? Is it perfect for every photographer? Is it perfect for just a few photographers who is Lumina are perfect for

Dima Sytnik: 48:56 Actually or goal as a company actually is to create best software for people who are actually interested in photo editing. And we call them artists. Like Photo artists, they actually not edit just photos to achieve like, okay, result to be posted somewhere. But they really want to express themselves as artists to create something that they can be proud of and, or like, or, or, or biggest mission is to make them happy. We don't want to do the software on, to create tools that will make them happy. And when they happy, we're happy to actually. So that's, and the item ologists is the way how we make them happy. And we, we decided how, the ways, how we want to make them happy. There is a Jew, right? Like, eh, things that we wanna do with Luminar.

Dima Sytnik: 49:55 Our first is to bring superpowers for people who wanted their photos, like sky replacement. It was very complex. It's existing on the market a long time ago, even maybe from York times, but we wouldn't do make it super simple. Second thing is new tools for creativity. People even may or may not ask, but we will bring them new cool tools so they can express themselves as artists in a simpler way. And third thing is a hum to use. I think software should be fun to use right now. We on the track and we want to make something which people will love. Just just to use, just, just to, to browse. We, I, I had features I love when people just having fun with software and adjustment preferences did, pink is not the way how you will enjoy software. So will be much more awesome tools and much more like final things to this officer. Don't make it less formal to be your like photography friend w on which you can rely. And we just think in this way and we don't think about like any competition thing. Only about how we can benefit or customers and photographers around the world.

Raymond: 51:10 That's perfect. That is the perfect way to, to, to wrap up this this interview right here. DEMA before I let you know, before I let you go, rather, can you let the listeners know where they can find more about you or Luminar online?

Dima Sytnik: 51:26 Actually they can visit our website or, or phrase grow, but that's super simple. Over websites, Skylum.com and they can find all information. Oh, just like search for Skylum or Luminar and the Facebook and they get all different informations. I have like very small. My Instagram, it's called like too many ways, but it's really rare updated because I really super busy, but that's just my personal small Instagram channel. But then, you know, I'm, I'm like, you know, I can say like there is a program like Shoemaker without shoes. The same for me. Like, I'm working on the tools, but I not benefit because I really had this sky placement and I get amazing results and I thought, Oh, now I can make my Instagram channel super popular. Now I can change all of my photos, which is boring to amaze and I can get like sun set on from Mars. I can, I can add great things that actually [inaudible] by the way, a sky replacement is really awesome. [inaudible] You can use, not just replace sky, but to change your image completely. If you want, I can share your some fun thing that we made here in skylum and we just had build them jugs about what actually people can do in future with sky replacement.

Raymond: 52:58 Oh man. I would love to see that. I bet the the opportunity is or the just all the, you know, things that you could do with it would would be fantastic. So. Yeah, absolutely. Absolutely. Well Dima again, thank you so much for coming on, sharing everything that you did and giving us a little peek behind the curtain as far as what the future of editing is going to look like. So again, thank you so much and I hope to talk to you soon.

Dima Sytnik: 53:25 Thank you so much to the pleasure to talk with you. Thank you for inviting me. [inaudible] It was great. And I hope your listeners, we'll try Luminar and share their opinion how we can improve it because a, it's on the way how you can, the better it's too see, not just, the positive side, but the negative side and listen to customers what they need, what they want to achieve. And I really glad we'll be glad to hear any, even even in file, doesn't dreams maybe who knows? We can [inaudible] true. The real,

Raymond: 54:01 You know, one thing a is clear to me after that interview you know, it at least to me it's that AI is not going to remove you or me as the photographer out of the equation, you know, because especially especially in the edit, I think AI is, is so new that we have a lot of concerns about it. We don't know where it's going and it seems so powerful that you know, many think that AI is just going to replace all of us and that's not what's going on here. AI is simply being used as another tool that honestly I'm excited to have. I'm really excited to have. My biggest takeaway was that, you know, you, you know, just like what Dima said is that you can cheat with hardware too. I loved hearing how photographers back in the day used to think or used to say rather that cropping was cheating.

Raymond: 54:53 Cropping your photo was cheating. Like it's kind of the same. I get it. If it didn't come out of camera that way, then you know, it's cheating. But at the same time is off camera flash cheating is using a neutral density filter to add motion to a stream cheating. It's not. These things are just simply a tool and a very powerful tool at that. So as I said earlier, I got something special for you and Dima and the whole Skylum team's special shout out to Lillia and Jane for their help. They have created a special offer for you, the beautiful listeners of the beginner photography podcast. If you want to try out Luminar which again is a one time payment, no monthly subscription, they hook you all up with a $10 off coupon for a win. Actually live in our four was released today. If you're listening to this.

Raymond: 55:48 So just use the code B P P at checkout and that will make the price again even lower, which is a no brainer. If you ask me again, I've, I've had time to play with this and this is powerful, powerful software and I almost can't believe how cheap it already is. So if you want to check it out, you don't want a monthly subscription. Definitely. I posted a link in the show notes of this episode and to be completely transparent, it is an affiliate link, which means that I will receive a commission if you decide to purchase through the link, which is at no additional charge to you, but you will receive all of my appreciation. So again, that link is in the show notes and the code for $10 off is B P P at checkout. That is BPP for beginner photography podcast.

Raymond: 56:39 If you didn't pick that up, but you're all very smart than I know that you did. So check out the show notes. If you're in Apple podcasts, you just swipe up, there's a link right there. Click that link and then use a code BPP and checkout for $10 off. So that isn't, I think that there's going to be a lot of discussion about this in the beginner photography podcast Facebook group. And honestly, I'm really excited to hear your thoughts as this is, this is a good one. This is, this is a good one. So until next week, I want you to get out, keep shooting, stay safe, and focus on yourself, love you all.

Outro: 57:14 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 173: Misha Wynn - How to be a Second Shooter

Enjoy the videos and music you love, upload original content, and share it all with friends, family, and the world on YouTube.

Misha Wynn is a luxury wedding photographer from Dallas Texas who today talks about how to be the best second shooter you can be!

Become A Premium Member to access to more in-depth questions that help move you forward!

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • What is a second shooter in photography

  • Why become a second shooter

  • The roll a second shooter plays with the main photographer

  • The biggest challenges finding a second shooter

  • Do second photographers edit their own photos

  • The difference between a good second shooter and a great second shooter

  • A misconception people have about being a second photographer

Premium Members Also Learn:

  • What do you pay a second shooter

  • How to get your first opportunity second shooting

  • How to know when you can financially afford a second shooter

  • How to protect yourself legally when hiring a second shooter

Resources:

_LAN7931.jpg
_PMP2635-2.jpg
1400 square-17.jpg
DSC_0070-2.jpg

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast. Today we're talking all about being a great second shooter. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:09 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, father, home brewer, LA Dodger fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer, Raymond Hatfield.

Raymond: 00:37 Welcome back to this week's episode of the beginner photography podcast. As always, I am Raymond Hadfield and I am super excited to be here today and I really want to share a story with you before we get on into this interview. So this past weekend I shot a wedding and it was a wedding at a venue that I had a that I'd been to before. It's a, it's a very nice location, but it had been probably probably three years, no two years since I last shot a wedding at a, at this venue. And since that, it's like an old, a cathedral. Okay. Old wooden, you know, monolith. Like this place is giant. But since the last time that I was there, they converted the lobby into a coffee shop and they converted the like I guess the East wing into a gym. So last time I was there, the only people who were in this entire place was the wedding party and the the caterers and whatnot.

Raymond: 01:47 But this time, tons and tons and tons of people just everywhere. And that made it kind of you know not frustrating, but just, you know, you just had to deal with that extra element. And well let me, let me, let me start before that. So the wedding that I shot this weekend actually strangely, really fed my ego as a photographer, but it was also incredibly humbling. So everybody at this wedding was they were happy and they were just truly happy. You know, like, one of the reasons why I love shooting weddings is because it's generally like the happiest day of your life, you know, barring children you know graduating with like a major degree, like a huge accomplishment. It's one of the most important days of your life. Did. You're going to remember. And generally people are very, very happy. But you know, sometimes there's family drama.

Raymond: 02:49 Sometimes there's, you know, this, that the other thing, poor planning, you know, whatever it is, sometimes there's an air of a tenseness at. But this wedding had none of that. Everybody was so happy and everybody was just truly enjoying themselves and being there. And what was weird was it, they went out of their way to appreciate me. Like they're not, they're not there for me. Like I'm not putting on a concert or anything. They're there for their friend or their family who, who's getting married. And yet everybody kept giving me compliments, which I thought was so strange, so strange. It was so foreign to me. The best man told me after we had taken all of the Brown party photos, he said, I can tell that your photos are going to be great because you just make everybody feel so comfortable. I know that I'm not gonna look awkward and stiff in your photos.

Raymond: 03:47 And I thought like, wow, that's, you know, that's a, that's a pretty big, you know compliment. Especially, cause he had not seen a single photo. And then even later, the bride told me after I did show her one of her photos just from the back of the camera, right, the, the small three inch screen, she said, this was so weird. She said, Raymond, I love this so much. And then she said, you were made to do this for others. Thank you. And I was really like taken back. Like I'm not, I understand that this feels like I'm just like tooting my own horn here. And this isn't how I wanted this to come off because that's feels very awkward for me. And that's not what I'm trying to get at. That's not, that's not the point of this. But I was taken back at this because, and this is the story that I want to share with you, is because up until that point, I had been having a lot of internal doubt at this wedding a lot.

Raymond: 04:47 Like I said, I thought, Oh, this cake, I've been to this venue before, it's great. We're like, we're gonna make some great things happen. I had showed up now there's a coffee shop, there's a gym going on. The two places that I really wanted to take photos were off limits for a different event, which at the time I thought were for the, it's not for the wedding. Like we were not allowed to go to these very to extremely photogenic locations because of a different event going on. So suddenly there was a, well, what are we going to do about this? Before I had shown up the bridesmaids phone had died. So when I got there, I couldn't find the room that they were in. And you can't just go knocking on all these doors. Cause now there's tons of people. The lighting was mixed and it was splotchy.

Raymond: 05:36 And when I say it was mixed, it was like so mixed. Like there was like an orange looking light that I had never encountered before in my life. Like yellow? Yes. Green. Yes. Blue. Yes. This color is hit. It's hideous. Right? It's very splotchy. The ceilings are beautiful. They're like 15, 16 feet high, but a, because it's a really old, old, old building. There's like smoke detectors and sprinkler six systems like six feet off the ground and they're bright red and they're everywhere and you just can't avoid them. So again, as I'm saying, like in my head, I was already facing this uphill battle, which never makes things easier. It just makes things much, much, much harder. Worrying. What am I gonna do? I like, I really liked this cup. I really want to make something unique and great for them, but kind of my ACEs were taken away from me.

Raymond: 06:32 But to hear, you know, the just two people go out of their way to tell me how much they appreciate how I was handling myself. And the quality of the photos was just, was just so humbling because it reminded me how little wedding photography is about us. We get into wedding photography because we like photography and we want to take pictures and we want to make money. But the winning photography isn't about us at all. It's not about having the best lens. It's not about having the best camera. It's not even about, you know, paying $10 an hour at a park and you know it's a really shady parking lot and you're still unsure that your car is going to be there and then it's probably going to get towed at the end of their wedding. It's not about that. These are things that you can't worry about because a wedding is their day and they hired you. So the thing that you need to do is to check yourself at the door and do the best that you can and you need to know that it won't be perfect. It won't, you know, timelines won't match up. The light is going to be bad. Your cameras, autofocus might act up. You're never going to shoot a perfect wedding, but you can always shoot the best wedding that you can. And if you do that, then you will always be happy with your work.

Raymond: 08:06 Speaking of being happy, I want to give a huge, huge public shout out to Amanda vicars for her five star iTunes review. Amanda said, I was honestly very skeptical about how I could learn photography from a podcast. Since it's such a visual thing, but I walk away with new tips after each episode. The beginning photography podcast has been such a great resource to me as a new photographer and I'm so thankful to have found it. It's even great for binging hold episodes, which I've been doing a lot lately. So Amanda, I am so glad that you are actually going back and listening to those past episodes. I really tried to ask questions that are not topical. I try to get answers that will last the test of time and won't be obsolete after the new you know, Canon Sony, Nikon D a nine or seven marks seven comes out next week, you know, or whatever it is.

Raymond: 09:04 So, so, so thank you for not only listening to the show, Amanda, but for taking the time and learning or I guess doing what you're actually learning and using it. So Amanda, again, thank you for your review. I truly appreciate that. So this week I chat with a wedding photographer all about how to be a helpful second shooter for wedding photography. But I know that you all are going to get a ton out of. It's a, it's, it's a fun interview. It was a fun interview, but like always I save a portion of the interview that is focused more on the business and photography or the business of photography and making money with your camera for premium members. And this week premium members are going to learn how much a second shooter gets paid, how to make your first opportunity to second shoot and exactly where to find photographers willing to let you shoot with them and you know exactly what to say and what to look for in a contract to protect yourself and the main photographer when working together.

Raymond: 10:05 It is great stuff. In this interview and if you want to hear the entire interview, you can hear all the actionable business advice from today's guests and past guests by becoming a premium member. So head over to beginner photography, podcast.com and click the premium membership button at the top to sign up today. So that is it. With that. Let's go ahead and get on in to this interview with Misha Wynn. Today's guest is Misha when a luxury wedding photographer from Dallas, Texas. Today we are going to be talking about the relationship between a primary wedding photographer and the second shooter and how to be the best second shooter that you can be. Misha, thank you so much for coming on the podcast.

Misha Wynn: 10:55 Thank you for having me. I'm so excited.

Raymond: 10:57 Yeah, there is a, we kind of had a brief chat right before we started recording and I was telling you that in the beginning of photography podcast, Facebook group, I seem to get questions quite often about, you know, second shooting, kind of like what is the role of second shooting you know, how much would I expect to be paid? Do I edit the photos, you know, that I'm shooting. Yeah. So there's a lot of questions that I have today and I'm really excited to get into it with ya. But before we get into the second shooter side of things, let's start with you. Can you tell me how you got started in photography in the first place?

Misha Wynn: 11:34 Well, I originally started with wedding photography in 2008 and so I started wedding photography. I didn't start with any other time. And my background is in architecture, so that's what I went to school with. But I really fell in love with all sorts of types of art, drawing, photography. But I was sitting my desk one day, 2008 and said, you know, I want to start a business. You know, I want to start something that I love to do that, that's fun, that I'll actually enjoy. And you know, start looking through some magazines and bigger out chocolate tography and you know, I just thought, you know, when a show what in photography. And so one thing about me is once I start something, then it's really hard for me to stop until I, I, I've completely gotten it. So awesome that that's what I've done with wedding photography. And so you know, I took off running with it and it's, it's been a great journey.

Raymond: 12:30 Oh, very good. Very good. So when you first started, I kind of want to know about that, that first decision that you made, right? Because you thought I got to do something else. This isn't fulfilling it, you know, for me. So I got to find something. You found photography. Tell me about that first camera purchase that you made and when you went out and started taking those first photos, where they ever think that you had hoped for right away.

Misha Wynn: 12:56 No, not at all. No, I, I when it's a local camera store and bought like a beginner camera with the kit lens, cause I had the 18 to 55 lens and then it just had 200 lens. And so, you know, I didn't have a speed light or anything. And so I just went out and started taking pictures of friends and all of that. And what I noticed was my outdoor photos were fine, you know, they were good. But when I actually had my first job as a photographer you know, the ballroom was pretty dark and I went in and I think we did the wedding for free and I couldn't get my images sobriety. And so I just kind of went back to the drawing board, did a lot more research and then I bought eat whites and then, you know, eventually I upgraded.

Misha Wynn: 13:45 But the very first wedding idea, it was very scary because the images didn't come out the way that I thought that they would. And I didn't realize that I didn't have enough lighting. So, and you know, my camera wasn't really sufficient for [inaudible] room or a dark setting. So it took a lot of practice. You know, a lot of free sessions, a lot of dragging my kids out to different fittings to take pictures and friends. I remember one Christmas, I have a friend at the time, she had been married for several years and I convinced her to put her wedding dress back on December and let's go out to the park and take some photos. So I had a lot of, I guess I had a lot of support and so with a lot of research I was able to, and training, I was able to figure out what, what exactly I needed to, to get the look that I wanted.

Raymond: 14:38 Yeah, yeah, that makes sense. So when you first got that camera, did you just throw it in Otto or did you know that a manual was the way to go or, or how was that progression for you?

Misha Wynn: 14:48 No, I threw it in, I threw it in auto and so, you know, I kept reading and kept researching and then I went to aperture priority and now work F from there for a little bit. And then, you know, it wasn't until I really upgraded my camera to where I really just like into manual when we started, you know, taking some classes and you know, just going to workshops and really learning how to work to get everything to work in manual.

Raymond: 15:19 Yeah. Right, right. Yeah. What was the hardest part, would you say? W when you went to go learn manual, what was the hardest part to realize?

Misha Wynn: 15:25 Well. you know, the, the tricky thing is I think some photographers struggle with is the ISO because you don't want the images to be grainy and that's what you hear. So you don't want to turn it, you know, put an ISO up too much because you don't want the images to be granny, but then your images are dark. And so it's kind of that scary, scary thing. That's the feeling that you have a not knowing exactly which settings to set. And so it was, it was, I was really scared. So about try. Yes. Yeah. So I think that was my biggest fear. So, but like I said, I did a lot of free sessions or take friends out in different settings and different rooms and test out what really worked. And one day maybe we'll look that I would want it.

Raymond: 16:15 Yeah. So now let me ask you a question. Now that you've been shooting since 2008 have you ever had a client or somebody who you've photographed look at your photos and be like, Whoa, these are, these are grainy.

Misha Wynn: 16:28 Yeah.

Raymond: 16:30 [Inaudible] Has no non photographer ever said that to you? No. No. It's these stories that we put in our head. Yeah. We get so worked up about these things and yet you know, it seems like the people who, who the photos are for you've never seen, never seem to notice, but it's a,

Misha Wynn: 16:50 You know, it seems like a lot of times, especially with weddings, they're more worried about the moment. So capturing the moment sometimes if the image isn't exactly perfect, they sometimes they love the moment.

Raymond: 17:00 Yeah. Yeah. You're, you're willing to what's it called? Have a suspended disbelief. Is that the, where, where you're able to look past something that isn't ideal because another part is preferable. That was a terrible definition. I apologize for that. So then talk to me a little bit about the moment side of things. Cause if you start it off and you're like, I'm going to get into weddings, moment is obviously very important. In fact, one thing I say on the podcast very often is that moment matters most, right? Yeah. And it's for that exact reason that you were just saying. I've never had anybody say to me like, no, I take that back. I've had one, I've had one bride say this one is a little too grainy. And in her defense it was definitely too grainy. But aside from that, nobody, nobody's ever said anything like that. So how do you I dunno train your eye or, or your brain to anticipate those potential moments?

Misha Wynn: 17:56 You know, honestly, I think it really goes back to you know, my architecture training in a lot with architecture, you have to be really particular and really critical of every little thing, every little piece of a building, every little aspect of a building. And so I think it comes from that terms. And so when it comes to second shooters, that's been something that's been a really hard to teach. But for me, it's more so sitting back, waiting for the moment, anticipating the moment. And the more weddings that I shoot, the more I, I know what's coming and what to anticipate.

Raymond: 18:34 Right, right. Yeah.

Misha Wynn: 18:36 So it's, it's not just shooting a bunch of random images where people just standing around it, it's capturing that one person response their emotion, you know, whatever is happening on their face. Just capturing that moment instead of just a group of five people just standing around.

Raymond: 18:55 Yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah.

Misha Wynn: 18:56 So, so I think I intentionally scoped out moment versus just taking shots.

Raymond: 19:03 That's smart. That's smart. Now you said there that I'm training a second photographer to kind of see those moments is, is very difficult. And that we're definitely gonna be talking a lot about second shooters here. But in just one sentence, can you tell me what is the job description of a second shooter?

Misha Wynn: 19:24 You know, a second shooter is in my opinion, someone who can come in and provide supplemental images to mind. Maybe miss some of those images that I missed or missed some angles or the capture some angles that I may miss. I think that's the biggest importance of a second shooter when it comes to two weddings.

Raymond: 19:46 Yeah. So they are shooting, they're there with you on the wedding day as a second, a second set of eyes. Yes. Okay. Gotcha.

Misha Wynn: 19:56 Seeing that moment from a different perspective.

Raymond: 19:58 Right. So when it comes to second shooting, one thing that I anticipate people potentially asking is who is second shooting for and why not just go off and, and start on your own as being the main photographer?

Misha Wynn: 20:20 Well, you know, at the beginning I did do a lot of shooting by myself. And what I noticed was there was a lot of anxiety of not being able to capture every single thing. Every wedding is different. And you never know what you're gonna run into once you get there. So there is a little bit of comfort of having someone else there to, you know, capture a few other images or help you with the dress work or help with other aspects. That is the benefit of having a second shooter. And that makes sense.

Raymond: 20:49 No, it does. It does make sense. It does make sense. But I'm thinking if somebody is listening right now and they love photography, right, and they're thinking, I want to go off and I want to shoot weddings. Yeah. Now I'm a little I guess a little bit of insight on the, to the audience is that there is a lot of listeners who do have a nine to five job or, or maybe they don't have the time freedom or, or even the desire to go off and shoot weddings full time on their own. You know, maybe their job has excellent benefits, you know, whatever it is. Would you say that second shooting is perfect for them or a second shooting perfect for the person who one day wants to be the main photographer. Can you kind of walk me through that? I guess that wasn't really that great.

Misha Wynn: 21:37 No, I completely understand. I think it could be either. You know, I think for some people they don't like the business end. They just want to shoot, they don't want to deal with, you know, booking or accounting or any of that. They want to shoot it. Second shooting would be perfect for that person. Second shooting would also be perfect for someone who's wanting to learn the business and learn how to shoot a wedding to think [inaudible] work for, for each person. But I think that's something that you'd have to be honest about. You know exactly where, where you want to be. And I think you should be honest with the lead photographer about what your goals are.

Raymond: 22:14 Oh, interesting. As the second photographer. That makes sense. That makes sense. We're kind of in this industry where a lot of people since since artists Oh subjective were it's hard to be a, what's the right word? It's hard to be critical of your own work because being critical of your own work changes depending on how you, how you view it and I guess your confidence, if that makes sense. Yes. So I've met, you know, multiple photographers over the years. Some of them have very little technical skill, but high confidence and some of them have high technical skill but low confidence and they would rate their abilities as about equal. Right. So for you as the main photographer, what have been some of the biggest challenges of finding a second shooter?

Misha Wynn: 23:00 That's a good one. I'd say finding someone that is dependable is one of the biggest issues. When I looked for a second photographer, I'm looking for someone to use longterm. And there are certain reasons why I'm looking for someone to use long term. But I look for someone long term. It usually not someone just for runway or just for one event. So finding someone who's constantly gonna show up on time and have their equipment and have what they need and know what they need to do that, I think that is something that's very difficult and that's, that's been, they're very difficult to find. After that I would say finding someone whose shooting style matches mine. And that's something that I can teach or something that I can can work with. I just need them to be really dependable. Yeah. I need to know that, you know, if, if the bride is in one place and the groom is another place that they're gonna show up when they're supposed to. Yeah. Yeah, it's very important. After that, I'd say technical skill which is something that could be taught. The other thing that's really important for me is someone who's able to capture those moments that I want them to be able to capture.

Misha Wynn: 24:21 In a certain perspective. It's someone who understands how to

Speaker 4: 24:26 [Inaudible],

Misha Wynn: 24:27 You know, capture a shot. And so I think that can be a little challenging as well.

Raymond: 24:36 Challenging as far as finding a person who you are confident is able to find that or challenging in teaching somebody how to do that.

Misha Wynn: 24:48 Well, I think that's something that I think it's really difficult to teach them on how to compose a shot and to know what to shoot and how to shoot it. The thing with a second shooter is I'm paying you to come and work along with me. Yeah. So it's easier if I have someone going to mentoring with me or someone who's volunteering to come along and they can walk along and see exactly what I'm shooting versus someone that I'm paying and I have to mentor you at the same moment. So that, that is a challenge. And that's very difficult because if I'm mentoring you during that time, then you're capturing the image, the same images that I'm capturing. So which means I have to have another photographer that, that so second, another Jupiter. Yeah. So that's another thing for I guess aspiring second shooters to know is, you know, to be honest with what your skill level, if you know that you're, you're not very skilled, then maybe you go out and shadow with, maybe you gladness says help

Misha Wynn: 25:48 Versus offering to second shoot.

Raymond: 25:50 [Inaudible] So one of the questions that I've been asked multiple times is you know, how do I, how do I start second shooting? And it seems as though the way that most beginners go about it is they just send out emails to every, you know, they'll search for Dallas wedding photographer and whoever's on that first page, they're just going to send them out an email and say, Hey, can I go with you to a wedding and a and shoot with you? And inevitably they get next to no response. So when it comes to second shooters, are you actively looking for a second shooters or are they coming to you?

Misha Wynn: 26:27 I'm usually actively looking for them. Okay. So then follow up

Raymond: 26:31 Question. Where are you actively looking for them?

Misha Wynn: 26:33 Oh goodness. You know, I have Facebook groups. There's networking events that I go to and then also as look through Instagram and social media. If I run a cause of a photographer, images that have just really caught my eye, I may reach out to them and see if they're open to second shoot. But one thing I would say about the networking events and the Facebook group, I think those are very good oppor opportunities for a beginner to go in and network and meet people. And maybe invite a photographer out to lunch or out for coffee, just to talk. You know, if you're at a networking event, you run across a photographer and you talk and it seems to be some sort of, you know, chemistry there and you know, maybe ask them out for lunch or for coffee and just kind of pick their brain or ask questions. For me, I think it's, it's more important for a beginner to offer something before asking them. So if you offer to come out and help with the bags or lighting, I think you'll get a better response versus, you know, asking for someone to, to hire you. Sure. Yeah.

Raymond: 27:44 And mentor you while being offered something versus, you know, asking. Yeah, it's one of those it is tough. It is tough because you know, a lot of listeners have a family and they don't really want to give up weekends so much, but they do want to dip their toes in, in shooting weddings and being paid to shoot weddings is a, is a good reason or I don't know you know, reason to, to, to be away from the family for the weekend. And if, if you're not getting paid, then that does make it a little harder. But when it comes to you know, the point to where a photographer, you've reached out to a photographer or they've reached out to you and said like, Hey, can I just follow you to a wedding? They go to the wedding. That next step is bringing them on as a second shooter.

Raymond: 28:35 So that's when we get into the pay. So how do you pay a second shooter? Hey Raymond here. And if you're listening to this, you are listening to the free version of today's interview. If you want to hear more from today's guest about the business of photography, consider becoming a premium member every week. Guests answer questions about products, pricing packages, and so much more. It will help your growing photography business thrive. This is the next logical step to join head over to beginner photography, podcast.com and click the premium membership button at the top of the page. Yeah, so that leads me directly into this next question, which is does the second shooter edit their own photos or is it the job of the primary photographer?

Misha Wynn: 29:22 I think it's the job of the primary photographer because I would think that you would want the gallery of the images to look very cohesive, look very similar, have a very similar editing style. So for me, I would prefer to take Ryan images and edit them with my own.

Raymond: 29:37 So how do you handle that? How do you handle that at the a, at the end of at the end of a wedding day? Do they just hand over cards or do you prefer them upload photos for you?

Misha Wynn: 29:47 My preference is as is to take a car. I would give them a card. Hopefully they have a dual slot. And then I would take that card with me so that I'm in possession of the images at the end of the night. So, you know, I've been, I've had cases where the second photographer hadn't uploaded all of the photos, like some of them have gone missing. And you know,

Raymond: 30:13 Well, I, yeah, this is this is completely unrelated, but I worked with another photographer as a, as a favor. And she was from out of town, the main photographer, but she was traveling back because she's from here originally and she was shooting the wedding of a of a, of a friend who she grew up with and she was looking for a second who was here local and she knew me, so she reached out and asked if I would a second with her. And I said, yeah, absolutely. I was really excited to do so cause I hadn't shot with this photographer before. So at the end of the day I said, you know, do you want me to give you cards or just upload them? And she was just like, just upload them. I'll give you my Dropbox. All right. No, I don't remember if she gave me the Dropbox.

Raymond: 30:56 Oh no, no, no. I'm sorry. It was Google drive. It was Google track. So she just said upload them to Google drive, send me the link, I'll download them and then we'll be good. And I said, fantastic. So that's what I did. I came home, I took all the raw photos, I put them on Google drive. I had to pay for like, you know, a terabyte of storage, just a, just for a little bit to upload all these photos. Right. I sent her the link and then probably and then right away, you know, I got the response. Perfect. Thank you so much. Like this is great. I kept that link up for probably six months and then I was like, you know, it's already done. It's all good. Six months. I went ahead and deleted that folder off of the Google drive because I've had, it had been six months since the wedding kind of happened.

Raymond: 31:41 And two months after that I get an email that's like, Hey, where are those photos? I'm ready to edit that wedding and I can't get those photos. And that was my response. I was like, Oh no. Like this is a well they're gone. You know, I don't have those images anymore. Cause yeah. They were, and that's, that's, that's kinda the problem. So that just like a word to the wise for those listening, right. Like if you're ever in that situation, maybe just send out an email or a text before you delete all those photos. And, which is what I should've done. It's what I should've done. I just assumed that after six months that the photos had been downloaded, edited, delivered, and the no longer needed.

Misha Wynn: 32:23 Yes. And that's scary. And you know, some, I will give out my login for Dropbox and the photographer to upload so we won't have to go with that sharing folder thing. You know, and my, my second photographers will back up my images as well and it's in a separate, in a separate location. But giving them, my Dropbox has worked on, they can upload images. I don't have to worry about that. It was, I know that can be really, really scary and I feel like Dropbox is, if you have a business account, if you accidentally delete something, you can go back and get it for I believe a year. Oh wow. Wow. Yeah. They have it in as hidden deleted Oh section. And you can go back and, and retrieve deleted images.

Raymond: 33:06 That is a great feature for that exact reason, that exact reason.

Misha Wynn: 33:11 Yeah. That's something that's really good to know. Well one thing I didn't want to talk about was my personal experience with second photographers. I do have one photographer that I've been working with for about four years and then another photographer that I've been working with for about three years. I really like to use the same second photographer. There have been, you know, cases where I hadn't been feeling too well or, you know, my kids got sick or you know, a piece of equipment is failed and that second photographer, because we work so well together and we, and she knows exactly how I work, she can kind of fill in without any gaps in. So that has made things so much easier for me. Cause we never know when an emergency is going to happen. Right. You know, you never know when you know, I was in the middle of a wedding and my mirror got stuck because I couldn't.

Misha Wynn: 34:06 Yeah. Kara. And so, you know with working with some of you're very familiar with our camera can, you can, you can take over for a second and that person can shoot the images that you want them to shoot. But if you bring someone in every time that's new, when you're continuously working with these new people, then it's really, really hard to do that. Yeah. It's really, it's really a challenge. So I'm just over the the time period that I've become a wedding photographer, I've had issues and you know, things happen and sometimes the weddings don't go as planned. When you have someone that knows what the end goal, the end result is that it makes it a lot easier.

Raymond: 34:48 So speaking of that end result then, are you having a, are you teaching your second shooters what shots that they need to be looking out for? Do you have a shot list or is it we're going to go in, we're going to look for the best moments and whatever happens, happens.

Misha Wynn: 35:05 Well, as far as shot lists, I have shot lists as far as family shots mainly [inaudible] or unless it's something that the couples with the deplete, you know, request. Sure. but, but what I will do when I'm bringing on a second photographer, I will send them a gallery of images, a full gallery so that they understand the type of shots that I'm looking to capture. That has been very helpful. You know, if the central photographer actually looks, but that, that has been there, that has been very, very helpful. And, and at times when I'm with November until I will, you know, take them and say this is the shot that I would prefer, this is the angle that I would prefer and here's why. So yes, that is something that I go through, but at the beginning I will send over a gallery when we do that. They understand what,

Raymond: 35:55 So when you reached out to me and sending that first email, you sent me a Beyonce song lyric, can you share with me real quickly what that lyric was?

Misha Wynn: 36:05 Oh, it was goodness whatever she lacks. Yes. Whatever she lacks. She's right over my shoulder. And it's Beyonce and Jasmine. Yes. Yes.

Raymond: 36:16 So that right there, I think when we're talking about second shooting is solid, solid, solid, solid. But I think a question that many a second shooters might have is, and you kinda brought it up there, is if somebody's just shooting, if we're taking it literally directly over your shoulder, is the main photographer, are they just getting the same photos and if so, is that what you want or do you have them go and look for something different?

Misha Wynn: 36:43 No. Oh, we get different angles. We've been to, if there's an emergency, if something breaks, then that person can just step in and just, just, just take over seamlessly. So now we don't really get, you know, I would say as a team, we don't really get the same angles, the same shots. If I'm not there, then she knows exactly what shot that I would take.

Raymond: 37:02 Yeah. Has there ever been a situation where you specifically had to tell another photographer like, no, go over there and get this exact thing, this or this other thing because I'm right here shooting. You're kind of in the wrong spot. Like how do you deal with difficult situations with the second photographer if they're not doing what you had hoped that they, that they would be?

Misha Wynn: 37:23 Well, usually if I'm working with someone for the first time, I will tell them exactly where to stand and which lens I would prefer for them to view. And I'm hoping that I'm not being too bossy, so you know, and for a second shooter, I think that, you know, if you're being told what to do, I definitely don't take it personal. Right. Yeah, I will tell them where to go, what angle I would want them to shoot from. Usually the way I do it is I'll ask them to take a shot from this particular, you know, whatever particular angle and then I'll explain why I like that shot. So that's helpful.

Raymond: 37:58 Oh, gotcha. So that they know what the intention is behind the photo that you want them to take. I love it. Okay. I love that. That's very smart. I would just be like, go over there.

Misha Wynn: 38:08 Yeah, yeah, yeah. Well, some, sometimes, you know, I've had, I had one case where I would tell her what to get and she just wouldn't, you know, just kind of did her own thing. And so of course that's what I do. But you know, it didn't work. But there are some intentional shots that I do like and I do try to direct

Raymond: 38:31 [Inaudible]. So when it comes to having a shooter, as you just said, sometimes they don't work out. Sometimes they're not what it is that you're looking for. And other times you'll work with them for four plus years, you know? Yeah. So what would you say is the difference between a good second shooter and a great second shooter?

Misha Wynn: 38:50 Oh goodness. That's a good one. A good second shooter. We'll ask questions is not afraid to ask a question. A great, a great second shooter. We'll ask questions. A great second shooter, we'll go in and take charge, take the lead, take plenty of shots, even if she's unsure, if you need that shot, just to make sure that you have it and you want it. You know, a great second shooter. We'll take direction. Well when you, we asked, you know them to do something, they'll go do it. They don't mind doing it. You know, if you asked them to do something as simple as holding a light stand there, they're happy to do it. They're more of a go getter. That makes a great second shooter. Just an average second shooter I think would just kind of sit around and wait for you to tell them exactly what to do instead of just, you know, taking charge. You know a good second shooter would probably, I think all of mine are great.

Raymond: 39:54 Yeah. It's hard to talk about the ones that aren't good

Misha Wynn: 39:58 Would, you know, just just be someone who doesn't have an idea of what it is that you're looking for in that person who hasn't researched what you're looking for, hasn't asked for questions or didn't look at the gallery of images that you were needing or you know, too timid to step in and get that good shot, you know, or ask the groom to, you know, straighten his bow tie or that sort of thing. So the great, the great second shooter is going to be really on top of things. You know, you can build a bit of that passion. Yeah. Ready for it. Yeah. Yeah. And someone who isn't who's humble enough to take direction, you know, and also understand that they are working for you and this is, this is your client. You know, the other thing that I want to touch on is being respectful when it's going to be difficult as sometimes a family is difficult, but you have to realize it's not your wedding. So as a second shooter, you gotta come you and you gotta be respectful and a laugh, you know, don't take anything too serious. If the uncle's, you know, making weird jokes, it's kinda laugh it off and just keep doing your job. That's something that's very wrong.

Raymond: 41:08 Yeah. I feel like that's, that's probably what's holding me back. I think most when it comes to actively looking for a second shooter. And that's just because I've worked with, you know, various second shooters and some have been really good and then moved away to Amsterdam. And then some of them have not been so good. And then it just didn't work out. But the ones that aren't so good seem to not, I don't want to say they don't have the personality, but like you said, sometimes there's a situation where like, there's a little bit of family drama, you know, and they will try to comment on it like, Hey, what would, if we just, and it's like, Nope, this is not, this is not our place. And now you commenting is a reflection of me commenting on this and I don't want any part of this, you know, just smile and say, you know, whatever happens, happens, we'll try to make this work. This isn't my family. I'm not going to get into any of this drama. And I think that it's finding that line, which is really, really difficult for new photographers. You know what I mean? So that is a, I don't know, I guess I didn't have a question.

Misha Wynn: 42:17 Yeah, well, well, speaking of that one thing that I do like and that I tell the, you know, associates or new second cuter, you know, as you go in offer to be of some help, you know, the brides and they're getting dressed and they're struggling with the different, maybe offering to help or maybe tell her mom, her mother and she looks nice, you know, she looks pretty, you'll ever drive, you know, that sort of thing or be friendly. But definitely not be critical, you know, just don't say anything. Yeah. Just don't say anything, but definitely offer you know, compliment and encouragement. That's what weddings are about. And so that's what I encourage my second tutors to do. Even if it, even in a difficult situation, you know, sometimes we'll address it with humor instead of being overly critical. So there was this one case where you know, my second shooter, she had taken the, the grooms suits to take some photos of it and it was completely wrinkled. And so she called me over, she said, I'll do so. And so what I did was I went in and I made a joke. The guys were in the room.

Misha Wynn: 43:34 Yeah, well I owl would wrinkle with a, with a wrinkled tax. And so it just kind of looked at me. I said, what? I said, did you guys no

Misha Wynn: 43:45 Take your Texas to the dry cleaner? And they just looked at me, all of them. I said, well, let me check. So that tells me they're, you know, so I went and looked in, I would say most of their shirts were just wrinkled. They were just kind of thrown in the department bags and chill. I say, guys, I'm going to bring the steamer in. I need you guys to do this and this theme so you can look nice for the wedding. And so it was, it turned into a joke and then by the time I left the room, they were laughing. So you know, when I could've gone in and been really critical and I think that would've just headed home or she could've gone in and said something pretty mean, you know, which could have set the tone for the wedding.

Raymond: 44:26 Of course, of course. Yeah. And that is a fine line because as a paid professional, you do want to be helpful and you do want to make sure that they look their best. But you know, sometimes that doesn't mean helping you know, put up the alter, you know, like, yeah. Like, or like hanging extra flowers. Sometimes it, sometimes those are things that the family needs to take care of. Yeah. Because you do still have a job that you need to worry about. Now when it comes with the bride and the groom looking the best that they can look. Yeah. You know, I'm, I'm gonna make that same comment. Like, what are you guys doing here? Come on. We need a steam right here. Born and comes to, you know, helping put up I dunno. Flyers or banners or signs or something like that. I'm not, I'm not gonna offer, I'm not going to do that. No. Do that. So that's interesting. Yeah, I hadn't really thought about that, but it's really something that needs to be learned through experience and really can't be taught through a book I guess. Like help here, don't help here, do this thing, don't do that thing. That's right.

Misha Wynn: 45:24 You don't want to make anyone feel awkward or weird during our wedding. No. You know, it's already a stressful moment, honestly. When you go in there and you can, you know, tell a joke or offered to some sort of assistance or compliment or something to kind of ease the nerves and it makes it a little easier, you know? And also having a more calm demeanor versus a more arrogant demeanor. I've seen some wedding photographers that are really good wedding photographers, but they're very arrogant and they make the room tense any rooms. And so, you know, I feel like that's not our job. Our job is to be there, to be of assistance and to make sure you have great wedding photos.

Raymond: 46:05 Yeah, absolutely. Absolutely. I love that. What do you think is w what do you think is a misconception or something that somebody would be surprised about to learn about? About specifically about being a, a second shooter? Hmm.

Misha Wynn: 46:25 I think some second shooters believe that they don't have to be assertive. I think that they feel that they can just kind of hide behind the lead shooter and just kinda do whatever that person does and, you know, not really take an insurance policy. Yeah. You know, and I think that's completely false. I think you know, both jobs were very important and I think it makes the lead shooter job very difficult if they have to babysit someone, constantly tell someone where to be and where to go and what to do. And I think that can be very challenging. So I, you know, and at the end of the day, if you, if you as a second shooter, if you take 2000 images, I mean, that's, you know,

Misha Wynn: 47:09 Not, you know, maybe not ideal, but you know, it's not horrible. But if you don't take the right images or if you don't take enough in, which is, I think that's what was case. Sure, sure. That's why I say go in, shoot away, do everything. She can just, you know, work your butt off and I think, okay, y'all

Raymond: 47:28 And let's have cake at the end of the day. Yeah. Yeah. I like that cake. Oh man. Man, last night I had a wedding in the cake. I don't know what was up with the cake, but it tasted just like, like peanut colada. I mean it was like coconut, it was pineapple. It was so delicious. And then at the end of the night, the couple were like, Oh, you know, did you eat, did you have cake? And I said, yeah, of course I had cake. And she was like, what, when did you have? And I said, I think it was pina colada flavored. And they both looked at me like, what are you talking about? And I was like, Oh, it was kind of coconutty little pineappley. And they both looked at each other. They had no idea like what I was talking about. So I don't know if the cake Baker like they asked it, they were like, do you mean pistachio?

Raymond: 48:05 And I said, no, this was [inaudible] definitely help cause guys so I don't have the cake. Baker screwed something up. But whatever it happened, it was amazing and there's no complaints. So I always that piece of cake and yeah. Yeah. You have to have to, I mean what other job lets you eat cake every day that you go to work. Yeah, no, no, not the best job in the world. Fantastic. Well Misha, I want to thank you so much for coming on and sharing everything that you did, obviously about second shooting even part of the business side of second shooting and how to get into that. Before I let you go, can you share with the listeners where they can find you online and just learn more about you and check out your photography?

Misha Wynn: 48:44 Yeah, I'm located in Dallas, but we travel everywhere for weddings. And my website is www dot lavish. She looks that calm. I can fell on Instagram at [inaudible]. She looks.com or [inaudible]. I'm also on Facebook and Twitter. I also have a mentoring program that you can read all about on my website. Again, www dot letter she looks like,

Raymond: 49:08 How do you find Twitter works for you as a wedding photographer? I've always been fascinated. Yeah, it doesn't, it doesn't work. So why are you still there? I don't know. You know,

Misha Wynn: 49:20 Other and connect with other professionals. [inaudible] Twitter, you know, other than that, no benefit.

Raymond: 49:30 It's, I love Instagram. Instagram has been great spot.

Misha Wynn: 49:33 Yeah.

Raymond: 49:34 Awesome. Awesome. All right, well again, Meesha, thank you so much for sharing everything and I look forward to keeping up with you in the future and seeing everything that you got going on. So thank you again.

Misha Wynn: 49:43 Thanks.

Raymond: 49:45 Woo wee ma. That was jam packed full of great stuff. And my biggest takeaway was just simply how easy Misha made the, the whole thing. You know, we as photographers tend to I don't know, overcomplicate things and she broke it down. Super simple. I mean her tip of sending a new second shooter, a full gallery from another wedding, just to get a sense of the style and where they should be shooting from was just great stuff. Super simple. You know, no need to bring somebody in and have a long training day before a wedding day, you know? And that was just great. So I want to know what your biggest takeaway is from this interview with Misha. I've actually added her into the beginner photography podcast Facebook group and I would be willing to bet that you would love to hear from you and to hear you know, you saying thanks for coming on the show. So that is it for this week. I want you to join me next week when we talk about the future of editing and using artificial intelligence to speed up the editing process. It is good. So until then, get out, keep shooting, stay safe and focus on yourself. I love you all.

Outro: 51:05 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 172: Different Photography Business Models and How To Pick The Right One For You

A business model is a conceptual structure that supports the viability of a product or company and explains how the company operates, makes money, and how it intends to achieve its goals. Choosing the right business model is more important than you could know for creating a photography business that can support you and your family financially and live a life with less stress and overwhelm.

A business model is a conceptual structure that supports the viability of a product or company and explains how the company operates, makes money, and how it intends to achieve its goals.

Choosing the right business model is more important than you could know for creating a photography business that can support you and your family financially and live a life with less stress and overwhelm.

The two business models that are at polar opposites of each other are

Shoot and Burn

Boutique

Everything else falls in between these two.

Shoot and burn photography is focused more on high volume at lower prices. As a shoot and burn photographer, you are simply selling your time.

Boutique photography is client focused shooting less volume but at higher prices. As a boutique photographer, you are selling your art and vision.

In this episode, I go more in-depth on the two different business models and share how you can eliminate all competition.

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

BPP 171: Gavin Wade - Creating An Amazing Client Experience!

Enjoy the videos and music you love, upload original content, and share it all with friends, family, and the world on YouTube.

Gavin Wade is a wedding photographer from Orange county whos clients can not stop singing his name. You have to see the length of the reviews his clients leave about his photos. Gavin is also the founder of CloudSpot the Client photo gallery and delivery system that has quickly won over my heart. Today we are going to be talking about how to deliver a world-class client experience with your photography!

Become A Premium Member to access to more in-depth questions that help move you forward!

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How Gavin started his wedding photography business

  • Why Gavin loves shooting weddings

  • How many weddings Gavin has shot

  • The simple thing many new photographers overlook that is costing them success

  • The importance of focusing on the client experience

  • How to ensure your photos are unique and personal for each client

  • What makes CloudSpot different from other client gallery systems

  • A unique way some photographers are using CloudSpot

Premium Members Also Learn:

  • How to communicate your talent, value, and experience to a potential client

  • What exactly sets apart the photographers that thrive from the ones who struggle

  • Gavins wedding shot list

  • How to increase your profits after the wedding is over

Resources:

gjw_0025.jpg
gjw_0267.jpg
gjw_0231.jpg
storyboard-3.jpg

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

BPP 170: Vincent Pugliese - The Only Marketing Strategy You'll Ever Need

Vincent Pugliese is a photographer and business coach with more than 25 years of photography experience with both Sports and Weddings. He has built his business without spending any money on advertising or facebook ads. He shares how he did it with the only marketing strategy you’ll ever need to be successful.

Become A Premium Member to access to more in-depth questions that help move you forward!

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How Vinny got the opportunity to photograph the Stanley Cup Championship

  • What makes building a personal network better than running facebook ads

  • Why there is so much push back on in person networking

  • The simplest way to so appreciation to someone who has given you value

Premium Members Also Learn:

  • How Vinny moved to a new state and booked a high ticket wedding the first day they moved

  • How to build relationships with venues

  • and a step by step process for who to reach out to and what to say when growing your personal network

Resources:

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast. Today we're talking about the only marketing strategy you'll ever need and it is easier than you'd ever imagine. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:12 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raman interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, father, home brewer, LA Dodger fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer Raymond Hatfield. Welcome

Raymond: 00:41 Back to this episode of the beginner photography podcast. As always, I am a Raymond Hatfield and I am so excited to have you here today. If you are listening right now, all that I can say to you is thank you so much and I hope that you learn a ton from this episode. And honestly, if you, if you don't learn a ton from this episode, you're either dead inside or a, you are just the Dalai Lama. So there's going to be a ton in this episode for everybody and I'm super excited. But before we get into that it is now, it is now day 12, since the Dodgers lost the DC to the NATS and now the man sexually swept the cards, which I don't think anybody saw coming, but regardless, they're headed to the world series. And while every day that pain of the loss of the Dodgers against the, the NATS is, is less and less seeing the Nads move up like they have builds this fire inside of me that is just anger and that anger turns to rage, you know, and, and it's where I daydream when I'm behind the wheel of my car, about the whole team coming out onto the field for a game, one of the world series and the first person up that stairs just trips and falls backwards onto the rest of the team causing just some horrific, hilarious snowball of players who have to now forfeit the game.

Raymond: 02:06 Four broken ankles and wrists is that would be the only thing that would you know, avenge the Dodgers lost in my eyes. That would be the only thing that, that, that, that I'd be okay with happening in the world series and have it be a good, a good game. Even if you know, whoever wins the AOL to go to the world series just sweeps in that I still wouldn't be happy about it. I want revenge. So that is neither here nor there. Today I am chatting with a good friend of mine and past guests of the podcast who, whose approach to marketing would, would be considered radical in a world of Facebook ads and SEO. But when done correctly, it will transform not only your photography and your business but your life. Now this is a bold claim to make, but after hearing this episode a, I think that you are going to stand behind it as well.

Raymond: 03:06 So each week I save a portion of the interview that is focused more on the tactics of business just for premium members who want to use their camera to start making money. And now this week, premium members are going to hear how Vinny moved his wedding photography business to a completely new state and booked a wedding the first day after he moved, how to partner with venues and become their go to vendor to refer and a step by step guide to start building a personal network today with ease. Now if you want to hear all these things and trust me, if you want to start making money with your camera, you do want to hear Vinnies lessons, then become a premium member by heading over to beginner photography, podcast.com and click the premium membership button at the top of the page. And that is where on top of getting access to the extended interviews like I just mentioned, you are also, I'm excited about this going to get a special invite to the premium members only Facebook group that we just started last week.

Raymond: 04:12 And so far it has been a massive success. Having a smaller group of people really makes it easier to dive deep into specific problems and it has just been a joy to be in. So if that sounds like something that you are interested in, then head over once again to beginner photography, podcast.com and click that premium membership button right at the top of the page. So that is it. Let's go ahead and get on into this interview with Vincent Pugliese. Today's return guest is Vincent Pugliese. I had Vinny on the podcast a way back in episode 50, where Vinnie shared his experiences being one of the top sports photographers having shooting games such as the world series and the Superbowl, while also having a successful wedding photography business. Today we're going to dive deep into how he actually built that photography business. Vinnie, thank you so much for coming back on the podcast.

Vinny Pugliese: 05:06 Raymond, my pleasure. Thanks for having me.

New Speaker: 05:08 I am super excited to be chatting with you today. Over the past I guess almost a year now we, I've been working under your guidance, kinda trying to build the podcast, trying to build photography and the way that you have taught business to me is something that I have never read online, have never read in any sort of you know tutorials and it seems so obvious, which is just like crazy to me. So I'm excited to have you on today and talk about how you built your business, obviously from the experience and hopefully help the listeners build their businesses as well. But before we get into that, for those who haven't been listening for the past almost three years, can you share how you actually got your start in photography?

Vinny Pugliese: 05:55 Yeah, it was, it was there. Some people might relate, but it was born out of desperation. I was, it was not something where I was like, I have a calling for photography or the arts. I never did. I was in the sports and I was in the traveling and I had no money and I was, I was not the most ethical person in the world. I had been arrested for stealing. I'd gone through, I dropped out of college four or five times maybe by the time I was 22. And I this is how it started. It literally started by me waking up in the middle of the night in a cold panic because I had a nightmare that I was caught stealing from my job cause I was, we would overcharge the customers at a drive through. No kidding. Yeah, yeah. That's, and that's a whole separate podcast you've ever want to go back into it. And it would be funny to do it, but I woke up in the middle of the night because some old lady that was a customer at the store, it might in my dream, my nightmare pointed at me and said, I got you.

Vinny Pugliese: 06:50 I got you. I still, I could still see her face. I jumped up in the middle of the night sweating. That was the first time that I had thought at all, what, what am I doing with my life? All my friends, maybe not my friends, but the people I went to school with had graduated high school, had graduated college and I was still on my fifth or six major at community college, dropping out, getting a job, getting into trouble here and there and I went downstairs and was two o'clock in the morning. I remember it's May 24th I think 1994 still remember the date and I just sat at my kitchen table, I moved back in with my parents. I was not, I was a complete slacker and my dad came downstairs and me and my dad didn't get along. And you can imagine why after hearing some of the beginning and he said what's wrong?

Vinny Pugliese: 07:34 And I just, you know, serious for the first time ever I was like, I don't know what I'm doing with my life and my dad's not one for a ton of words. And he went and got a glass of water. I just sat there with my, you know, my head, my hands and he said, well he wasn't even looking at me. He goes, well you like traveling cause I would just take trips because you like taking pictures and I only had a point and shoot camera like it a little tight. It wasn't a real camera. He goes, you know, you like traveling, you like sports, you like taking pictures. Why don't you become a photographer? Three he said to me and I said to myself, photographer, I said I love w. And I remember seeing photographers on the sidelines, all the games I would go to, I was always buying a ticket in the crowd.

Vinny Pugliese: 08:11 They were getting paid next to the players. I said, I, I know I'm going to fail because I failed everything so far. But here's the reason why I started cause I said, well at least it's going to be something cool that I'm gonna fail at. Cause I knew I was gonna fail. Why, what, what would, what in my history give me any type of perspective that I would make this happen. So what happened was there was nothing to lose. So I went and bought a camera the next day, bought a Canon. Okay. 81, I think it was. Ah, yeah. And made a bad purchase on a lens. I talked to my uncle and he was like, what did you, my uncles, we only wanted the photography. I never even asked him a question. He goes, you know, they have this thing called auto-focus that's come out in the last, you're too, and you bought a manual focus camera. And I was like, well, whatever I'm going to learn. And I just started from that literally two worlds. It was my life from being born up until that day and then saying, I'm going to go do something. And all of a sudden the drive and the ambition and the passion the next day was there. And, and, and [inaudible] lives right there. So that's exactly how it started.

Raymond: 09:13 Yeah. Oh my gosh. That is a, I got to say, if I had a, a, if, if our son Charlie ever got to that point to where, you know, you said that you were at 22, I'd be, I'd be worried for sure. But obviously looking back, it's great to see your, your rise.

Vinny Pugliese: 09:27 My brother's still tells the story and it, I don't think he's ever forgot. And he's like, I used to say all the time, what are you going to do? Like he would say about me, I was so worried about you. I'm like, yeah, but the funny thing is even in high school when they were saying that, they're like, what do you, and I remember thinking, I'm not worried, I'm going to figure something out. I remember at 17 years old in the hallway, my high school said [inaudible] everybody's going to, you know, Tufts or whatever, universities are going from long Island. Like I'm fine. It was four years later where it finally hit me. But I'll tell you if I did well in school, I would have been an accountant or something and this never would have happened. So I'm grateful for all those lost years.

Raymond: 10:01 Yeah. And it's interesting because a, obviously me being a 31 it's interesting thinking back to high school, I can still very vividly remember high school and thinking after I graduate high school, like I'm an adult and I'm going to have to know these things. And I always felt very fortunate, quote unquote, knowing what it is that I wanted to do, be in that creative field of photography or cinematography. But I knew a lot of people who didn't. They, they, they had no idea what they were doing. And I, I always remember thinking they're screwed. You know, they're not going to have it. They have no idea what it is that they want to do and they are screwed. But now that I'm 31 and think back to 2222 is still, I feel like 31 is psyllid baby, you know what I mean? 22 was even younger.

Vinny Pugliese: 10:43 And where does it even come from if you think about it? I cannot think of a time in my life that I was any dumber than when I was 17 or 18 years old. So at 17 or 18 years old, you're telling me I've got to make the most important decision of my life that's going to affect the rest of my life. And if I don't know what it's 17 I'm screwed. Who teaches that?

Raymond: 11:02 Right? Right. Yeah.

Vinny Pugliese: 11:03 It tells us that it's, it's insane. And we're doing that to our kids today. You're 14, you better pick your major, you better. Are you serious? Like just go live for a while and get some experience and then decide why do you need to, it's, I think we, we are screwing kids up left and right by doing that.

Raymond: 11:23 And it's not just you because I get dozens of emails every single week from people who are from listeners who are in their forties or in their 50s who are saying that they just picked up their camera for the first time and there's always a sentiment afterwards that's like better late than never. Or like I wished that I started earlier and it's like, no, now now's the perfect time. You still have plenty of time to learn photography. So it's great that you are, that you're living proof of it, you know, 22 isn't it? But you don't have to start when you're, when you're 14 or make that decision. So okay, let, let's move on with these questions. I'm, I got super excited. I always get excited talking. I love, like, we can just go right from there. I love it. I know, I know.

Raymond: 11:59 Oh my gosh. Okay. So, so the last time that you were on, we actually talked about your, specifically the whole episode was about your experience, you know, shooting the world series, the Superbowl Stanley cup, some of the world's top sporting events. And recently I read your book freelance to freedom and you share the story of how you got the opportunity to shoot those games. Right. and I think that's where I really want to take this episode because as I said earlier, this is, this is really kind of like the untapped marketing, a strategy, I guess, if you even want to call it that. But really it's so much easier than that. So can you share the stories specifically about how you you know, how you got to shoot the Superbowl? It was because you didn't shoot any games prior to that season. Is that right?

Vinny Pugliese: 12:46 The, which it depends which one, which one are you talking about?

Raymond: 12:49 Well, I think I'm talking about the Stanley Cup

Vinny Pugliese: 12:50 Stanley cup. Yeah. Okay. Yes, that's a perfect example of it. So well, the funniest situation is in the very beginning, right? That story that I just told you about from my kitchen table, I bought a camera and I w I started sneaking into games while I was a big New York Rangers fan. Well, that was three weeks before the Rangers played in the Stanley cup. Two weeks before he played the Stanley cup for the first time and you know, they, they could win the cup for the first time in 54 years. Huge fan. And I bought a ticket to game five of the Stanley cup and it turns out that they beat Vancouver two games in a row and they could win the Stanley cup in Madison square garden on the night that I have the ticket first time in 54 years, if you're, if anybody is a ranger fan or old enough to remember that it was historic.

Vinny Pugliese: 13:33 I'm in the building with my camera. It's literally the first time that I'm using my camera to shoot like for real and I can photograph the Stanley cup. Well, I'm in the top section so I'm not getting a good grade. I can get something. Well they lost and there was no Stanley cup. Fast forward 20 something years later, I've been a professional photographer all those years, still have not photographed the Stanley cup. It's the only thing I want to photograph. The only thing I want, I'm like, I've shot the Stanley cup, the world series, the Pope for different presidents, everything you could imagine spend a day with the Dalai Lama. I still haven't photographed a Stanley cup victory. So I've been, I'm in Pittsburgh now for the last 10 years. So I've been photographing the penguins for different outlets, you know, different agencies. And every year they come close and they don't win.

Vinny Pugliese: 14:16 They make it the conference finals and they lose the big. So finally I got, you know, we have three kids. We start running our, our mastermind business, everything going on and I have less and less time to shoot the sports and less and less desire to it. It's almost winding down. But I still want the Stanley cup, almost like a player like, and the, my career, I knew I needed the cup. So, but, but I'm not willing with everything else growing to like photograph every, no February, Tuesday night game versus Winnipeg. I don't, I don't want to do it. So I started, but I've learned through all these years that everything comes down to your network. Everything comes to it in terms of building a business and it's so underappreciated. We go to SEO and [inaudible] and Google and how do you get found this way and how do you use these marketing techniques?

Vinny Pugliese: 15:00 But 87% of jobs that you get in the world are, are, are from referral. It's just a way, whether it's photography or it's, you know, regular jobs in businesses. That's how people get jobs. It's been proven. Nobody pays attention to it. Nobody focuses on that. That's all we ever did was focused on that. Helping other people get jobs that way. Connections and then ourselves. So what I noticed was little by little I was getting in everywhere. You know, it was LeBron James. I wanted to photograph him in, you know, the conference finals on their way to their third straight championship. Miami could not get a pass at all, but I made connections, friendship, my friend Brian, Brian [inaudible] who works for ESPN, literally they're about to win the championship. I sent him a text. Brian, you need another photographer for game six and Indi two minutes later, does a past waiting for you.

Vinny Pugliese: 15:46 Your we'll call you. You want to stay with me on my hotel? Shoot. Two days later, LeBron James is right in front of me for the national Anthem. They don't win, but it keeps going on like this. So the Stanley cup happened like this. Didn't shoot one game all year, the entire 2006 season. Then shoot one game. But through connections, through helping other people. This guy named Jared Wicker, Hamza photographer in Pittsburgh, I'd sent work his way. Weddings, portrait work. We've developed a relationship. The penguins win the conference championship and I'm like, I got to shoot the Stanley cup. I'm gonna miss it. Driving back from Nashville and I get a phone call from Jared saying, there's going to be a phone call from you from an agency in Sweden. They need somebody to shoot the finals. I'm already booked. I recommended you boom, phone call. Then next thing I know I'm shooting game five of the finals where the penguins can win it.

Vinny Pugliese: 16:32 I walk into the photo room and I get one of the tigers tells me everybody's mad at you. I'm like why? They mad at me cause we bust our butts all year shooting every game and you just walk in here, game five of the cup, the thing we've all been dreaming for and you're going to shoot the Stanley cup. And I'm like, I've been trying to tell everybody how to build a business and I want to use my time efficiently. And it worked out well. They lost that game. One in San Jose, same company called me back the next year, go to Nashville for game six go. If you want to shoot that force, penguins win the Stanley cup. I get the picture of Sidney Crosby. You know, it just caps it all off. And it just came down to the fact that I shot two hockey games and two seasons and both of them was Stanley cup final and it was only because of the network we built around us.

Raymond: 17:13 Yeah, that's so great. And it wasn't even like you're known as the Stanley cup photographer. No, it's not like you were sought after. It was purely because you built the group of people around you, the network of people around you who you know, you obviously tried to help in any way that you could and they were happy to reciprocate for you. But it's interesting because when you say that you walk into the photo room and all these other photographers and attitude, it's so interesting how inside I still feel like if I was one of those photographers I would be mad too because all these years you're told, you know, you've got to work harder. I've got to work harder. That'll work your butt off. And here you are. You know, you come in and it's not that you like found a cheap, it's that you found a way to, to utilize the work that you are doing to work smarter.

Vinny Pugliese: 17:57 It wasn't the first game I ever shot. I did bust my butt for years and years more than more. And that's the whole thing I didn't relationships get, yeah, those relationships get developed during those times. But you know, they, they compound success compounds, whether it's money or, or jobs, you, you put your money in the bank, you, you invest it, it compounds. But same with relationships. And same with your work. When you're seeing their night after night meeting people, you know, normally photographers just put their head down in their camera and they Chimp and they don't talk to people. I talk to people, you know, I find out what other people kind of needed, how can I connect other people have just real conversations. That's how you get known and then all of a sudden everybody kind of knows you. And then when something's available, boom. So the funny thing about that is we've transferred that into every aspect of our business. And I think that's a lost art of business is building great real relationships with generosity and not just trying to, how do I get as much money as I can or get as many jobs as I can.

Raymond: 18:51 Right. So in the beginning, this is kind of what I want, one thing that I want to know about you in the beginning you know, building these personal relationships. Was it, was it because you saw the potential of them getting you further or is that just kind of in your DNA to talk with people, get to know them and be that

Vinny Pugliese: 19:10 Connect or, no, in the beginning it was very selfish. It was very selfish. It was how do I get what I want to get? How do I get into this? How do I get that? And you know, I'm a, I'm an Italian from New York. We you to figure stuff out. A lot of times you know, you, it's not always easy. Everybody's always talking, everybody's always fighting for things and you got to figure out angles. So I learned to figure out angles. It wasn't very I want to say ethical cause I don't think goes that far, but was very selfish. It wasn't unethical, but it was, it was how do I get what I need? And what happened was I learned all these skills and I learned the value of it. But I also learned that it was very empty. By the end. I had gotten everything I wanted.

Vinny Pugliese: 19:50 I'd shot all the games though. I'd been there. You know, I've, I've anything you can imagine. Yeah, we've, I've done walking with Tom Brady as he's walks out to the field, shooting a champion. You get a super, I shot his first super bowl, everything you can imagine. But by the end of it, I think it probably around the time that you even interviewed me, it was like all these great stories, but not as many, but not the friendships and the relationships like I would've wanted, right? Because it was all about what I need and I see that a lot in this world and how do I get what? So literally I have to flip the script completely to where I know the skills on how to build it, but I was building it the wrong way. I was building it for why I needed and then when I start reading people like Seth Goden and Bob Berg and the go giver and all that type of stuff where generosity is the key, helping other people out.

Vinny Pugliese: 20:35 Zig Ziglar, you can get anything you want in life if you just help enough other people get what they want. Right? And the only problem with that is it's really focused on getting what you want. But the whole thing is the generosity. The people that, every story that I tell you came from the generosity of somebody else. When I got on the field at Lambeau field in 1995 as a fan and I'm photographing Brett FARs MVP season and am I literally my hat on backwards cause I was in the crowd and it got an NFL films came by and said, are you shooting today? That's what I'm sticking pictures, you know, for myself, I drove the Greece, I went on a 14 day tour, the Midwest photographing different States from the crowd, the last games, green Bay got a ticket last minute, snuck to the front row and NFL films photographer, his assistant didn't show up, opens the gate for me, gives me a press pass.

Vinny Pugliese: 21:20 I now in the huddle with Brett Farve, just an incredible that I left that night ago. This is a literally walked out into the parking lot after being in the press conference and I said, this is what I'm gonna do with my life. It can't be in the crowd anymore. I've gotta be on the field. That came from the generosity of Jim Jordan from NFL films seeing me, we're still in connection to today. He still tells my story how that started. My photography career, I always thought it was me in my pictures, in my tenacity. It was always somebody giving me an internship, somebody gives me a tip, somebody giving me a connection, somebody else along the way did it for me. And I never really recognized that. It's the whole, you know, I did the study of this, you know, Frank Sinatra my way. Like that's his song promise. He didn't write that song. Paul Anka wrote that song. He didn't do it his way. He was helped even with that song, I'm doing it my way and that was the ego that I had to get over. So once I, once I put all that together about five years ago, then everything just changed. The book, the course that we did, the masterminds, the community, the speed, it all changed when I started leading with generosity to build a network and it just continues. So yeah,

Raymond: 22:28 I told them the hard way. We all do unfortunately. So when, when when you, when you go in there, I don't, I, I hate to say aye. It's framed as if a, if, if, if this was all done intentionally like from the starts. So I guess, let me, let me rephrase. Why do you think people have such a hard time accepting that this is such a great answer, right? That this is such a great way that this is that that you can build a business this way. Why do you think so many people would rather try Facebook ads, focus on SEO and do all these other tactics when something as simple as just forming a relationship with, with somebody else can, can obviously prove to be so beneficial

Vinny Pugliese: 23:11 Because it seems too simple.

Raymond: 23:13 Mm.

Vinny Pugliese: 23:14 And being simple as the most complex thing you can do and people just didn't know and nobody's selling that. How do you make money off of that? Right? You can make money off of telling you you need the SEO and [inaudible] content. Facebook ads, which, and I'm not saying they don't work, but I am saying we've never used them. And our podcast launched and within three weeks at a hundred reviews on there and 10,000 downloads in the first month. And it just keeps growing. I don't promote it. It's all from the network. It's all from putting out content that people really want to listen to and promoting the people within there that are the P like telling stories about my friends that do things. Yeah. Tell interesting stories about myself that people want to share and it grows that way. And I think there's not a whole lot of money to be made that way so people don't talk about it and, but yeah, it's just the truth.

Raymond: 24:07 So why do you, what makes, what makes the personal network better you think? When, when in a world where you could not talk to anybody, right? In theory you could not talk to anybody. Start up a Facebook page, print up tee shirts, you know, and then just run Facebook ads and make money. What makes building this personal network better than doing things like that?

Vinny Pugliese: 24:29 Well, first of all, it depends on you. I want [inaudible] real relationships. I want real friendship. The retreat we just came back from the mastermind is three days in the mountains of Tennessee and we're just, there was, nobody was on their phone. It was 17 of us just talking, eating dinner together, brainstorming, met people crave relationships. Everybody's on their phone, everybody's dialed into their computers, their heads are down. Nobody's talking. When you put people in a cabin and talk for three days, the tears. We just had a conversation just about two hours ago about just life changing. Nobody does it anymore and everybody's so into how do I optimize this? How do I maximize it? But I can tell you from my perspective, I had a million acquaintances and no friends seven years ago. Everybody knew me. I was friendly. I could have a beer with anybody.

Vinny Pugliese: 25:18 You have dinner, but I had nobody that can go deep with not one and the ones that I did, they weren't that clear. So it, I'm just saying this, this is only my story I'm not telling you to be asked to do is I personally in my heart needed this. I needed real relationships and friendships and people that I can help out and that I can trust. And the whole thing came down to like helping other people out, which I was not taught and nothing gets my parents, but it was always, well, if you get this amount for a gift, you give this amount back and you kind of keep score and everything. Well, they didn't do this for you. I'm not going to do it back. And it's losing all that. How do you go out of your way to build people up to share their work? We're so quick to share a celebrity or a sports team. You know you're a Dodger fan, right? Yes. We're so quick to talk about our teams. They don't need you Raymond. Right? They're going to make enough.

Raymond: 26:09 Don't say that. No,

Vinny Pugliese: 26:10 I actually, I do need you now. They need you. They need you in that extra innings, but, but they really don't need your money, but your friends need your support. Your friends who you go to there, you know, get your hair cut from them. They're the ones that could really use you talking about them. Not the Dodgers Dodgers have enough money to promote, but we don't do that for each other. So if you do that, and that's all it is. I like, I'll give you an instance today. One of my podcasts about my friend Chad Jeffers, he's a, he's a guitar player for Carrie Underwood, and he's got a course that just came out and so I did a podcast and I promoted it today. Literally he goes, and I don't know what kind of audience he adds rock stars. Well, he takes my podcasts and then does a great post about it. I didn't ask him to do it. I wanted to promote what he's doing. I want to make him successful. In turn, I didn't ask them now, now my podcast is getting out to people I'd never would've gotten it to, and I never asked for it. It's generosity first with no expectation, and that took me 40 something years to learn.

Raymond: 27:07 Yeah. That that generosity first is, is is really an interesting concept because we do live in that world of like, you know, a win win or an eye for an eye or you do this for me and I'd be more than [inaudible]

Vinny Pugliese: 27:18 Scratch my back. I scratch yours. Well that always comes from you scratching first.

Raymond: 27:22 Exactly. Yeah. That, that, you know, what does it, quid pro quo. Right? But you personally, I want to share another, I want you to share another story of yours because you were running a very successful wedding photography business here in Indiana and you and your wife had decided that you were just going to up and move essentially like across the, well,

Vinny Pugliese: 27:46 Pittsburgh tomorrow, not yet far enough to come back

Raymond: 27:49 To an entirely new market. Yup. Right. Where most photographers, myself included, would just poop their pants. Thinking of the idea of having to start over again from scratch and yet you two had none of that. So can you share, how did you, how did you make that transition with literally no time, no downtime between weddings. Hey Raymond here, and if you're listening to this, you are listening to the free version of today's interview. If you want to hear more from today's guest about the business of photography, consider becoming a premium member every week. Guests answer questions about products, pricing packages, and so much more. It will help your growing photography business thrive. This is the next logical step to join head over to beginner photography, podcast.com and click the premium membership button at the top of the page. That is a, Oh my gosh, there's so much there to unpack and I hope that everybody goes back and listens to that because that singlehandedly alone I have implemented, I've started to implement by reaching out and asking that exact question to my friends and I've already seen a return on it and it wasn't like, as you said, it should come from a place of generosity and that's where I'm trying to frame everything and that's where it is coming from.

Raymond: 29:11 And already I've seen returns on it and, and that feeling is just really good inside that somebody else wants to help me because I helped them.

Vinny Pugliese: 29:20 Can I ask a personal question about your podcast and maybe edit it all out if it's not? Absolutely. Let's go. How many can I ask? How many downloads you get per month, per month? So we just hit our first 20,000 downloads. Seriously, 20 are those unique downloads or downloads? I believe just total total downloads. Okay.

Raymond: 29:42 Whatever. Whatever. Lipson's stat news.

Vinny Pugliese: 29:44 So these people, I'm calling out your audience right here. So I hope you don't mind these 20 possibly, I don't know how many thousands of people it is. You know, multiple episodes. How many reviews do you have in your podcast? 112 hundred and 12 reviews. 20,000. Yeah. Downloads. Yes. Now, is there value in your podcast? It's what makes somebody keep coming back. Value content. You're, you're, you're, it's somebody who's not let somebody listening to more than once. There's value there, right? Missed opportunity from so many people because I can tell you by me listening to podcasts, reading books, leaving reviews, writing notes, thanking them for what they did. Do you know how much effort it goes into writing a book? You know how much effort goes into doing a podcast a lot. They just hear this to get the number one thing people crave is appreciation and you put all this stuff out there and we all know I have a podcast.

Vinny Pugliese: 30:41 You put it out there, there could be crickets. I stopped the blog four years ago because I thought nobody was reading it. No, there were no comments. And then for a year I kept hearing why did you stop that blog? I loved it. I never knew you were reading it. It would have been nice if somebody told me that, cause I would've probably kept going. So can you imagine how much effort you're thinking? If you've got 2000 reviews, why shouldn't you have 2000 reviews? If you've got $20,000 a month, people aren't thinking about how they can help the people that are helping them. Yeah. So there you got that to get a plug for you to get more views. I just want to use it as an example, but I'm serious. It's like who are the people who've helped you that you'd haven't appreciated this? For the audience who, who, and that's what I do. So I make a list of it, you know, I want to make sure that the people around me are supportive because if they do better Raymond, you do better too.

Raymond: 31:35 Yeah. Yeah. That's very true. That's very true. There's, there's been a several weeks where you know, you'll go by and as you said, kind of like you just, it just crickets, you know, you try to put it on this time to put out the best content, podcasts, you know, whatever it is out and a win. Now it's like you don't do it for specifically for the feedback. But regardless, it always is nice to, to hear that somebody, somebody appreciates that.

Vinny Pugliese: 32:02 Yeah. And, and, and to the listener, put yourself in Raymond shoes or anybody else's shoes. You want the same thing for your business. You bust your butt for 12 hours shooting a wedding or a portrait shoot. Isn't it great when you go to the mailbox and there's literally a handwritten thank you card from your client with a gift card. Oh man. It makes you want to do better work. You, when you go online and you see that review on your photography website about they were the best photographer ever. Why don't we do that more? And it really is that simple in a lot of ways.

Raymond: 32:33 Yeah. This three months or so ago, I I shot wedding for a couple who I had a great time at their wedding, had a lot of fun. We weren't like the same type of person, but regardless, like we still had a very good time working together after the wedding. I was like, these are great photos. I worked my butt off to, to edit like the entire wedding that weekend and I delivered them their photos on Tuesday from their Saturday wedding. And I never heard a single word, you know, about it. And I'm not saying again that I, that I do it just to get that recognition, but I will say that, that it took longer to build their album than it did some other couples because I guess some of that momentum went away. Excitement, that excitement, that excitement. So that's a, that's something interesting to think about. Interesting. Something about, yeah,

Vinny Pugliese: 33:25 Just to think about who do you go above and beyond for. And a lot of times it's subconscious, but man of somebody is referring people to me, if they're sharing what I'm doing, Gary Vaynerchuk calls it guilt marketing. You feel guilty not helping that person back. You know, somebody sends somebody to you and you know, like, ah, you know, Raymond semi, somebody that would be good for what I do. Like I really need to literally connect him to somebody that be good for his podcast and I don't, it's not even an eye for an eye or keeping score

Vinny Pugliese: 33:57 That I'm not helping them out.

Raymond: 33:58 So fantastic. Fantastic way to kind of wrap all that together. And as you were saying that, it made me think of how you connected me with with Nick Adams and I've been excited to to chat with him. He's been very busy. But I hope to get him on the podcast here soon as well. And, and it's just that, it's that appreciation. So just publicly, I want to say thank you for it, for that.

Vinny Pugliese: 34:21 Well, you're welcome. And I just, I just want to leave with this. It's like, think about that. I know you, I know Nick, right? You too. You need to know each other, but you probably would never connect if in my position I didn't connect you to everybody else in that situation. Everybody else knows somebody here and somebody there and they'll never know each other. You become a connector, then all of a sudden they both appreciate you, appreciate you. And I'm telling you two years later when you're at a conference and you both blown it up, well, all three of us are there and they go, how'd you guys meet? Oh, Vincent connected us. You become a conduit in so many different people's lives by being a connector with no expectations, and it's just all part of the process.

Raymond: 35:00 It's going to happen. We're going to make sure that it happens on, on May 24th on a on a May 24th. That's what we're gonna make it. Right. Well Vinny thank you for coming on. Thank you for sharing everything that you have about just from the real world experience that you have learned about building this personal network in a very, I hate to say radical marketing strategy but it's in some ways it is, it can be looked at it that way. And you laid it out in a pretty step by step process and made it very easy to consume for a lot of the listeners. And I know that they've got a bunch out of this, so I'm actually going to personally my audience to share their goals for 2020 in the group and we are going to make it happen. See, see how many people we can help in 20, 20. So, and that's all because of you. So thank you. Thank you very much.

Vinny Pugliese: 35:50 You are the best man. Thank you.

Raymond: 35:52 Before I let you go, can you share with listeners how they can discover more about you and find out about the, a total eye freedom podcast and and, and who it's for?

Vinny Pugliese: 36:03 Yeah, in the total life freedom podcast. It's really fun. It's about three months old. It's a daily short form solo show. So the daily podcast, five to eight minutes, it's just me ranting, telling stories. I, I have no intro, no outro, no music, and even say my name, we just get right into it. Tell your story, give you a lesson, hopefully some inspiration. So that's iTunes or Spotify, wherever you listen to podcasts. That's that. So excited for me right now and everything we do is a total life freedom.com. Oh, I don't even know if I told you that you read the book. I wrote the book called freelance to freedom. I recorded the audio book and I give that away totally for free. So I want more people to ever read it. So if you go to the website, there's a link for free audio book, feel free to download it. It's all yours. So,

Raymond: 36:49 And that's exactly, that's exactly where I got it. And I'm actually gonna make a video of how to put it on your phone so that you can listen to while while you're in the car. So I will post that in the show notes. If anybody wants to download that links to download Vinny's book as well as how to put it on your phone. We'll we'll be in the shownotes Vinny again, man, thank you so much for coming on and sharing everything and that you did, it was a pleasure chatting with you today. And I, I, I'm just so thankful for our relationships, so thank you.

Vinny Pugliese: 37:14 I am as well. Thanks so much.

Raymond: 37:16 What did I tell you? What did I tell you? If you didn't take anything away from this episode, then you're dead inside. That's it. That's the, that's the only explanation that it could be or, or you know, maybe your mind is just too analytical. You can't see the direct correlation of how this would work in a business like photography. But I assure you, I have, I have seen just small changes in my own business related to this exact topic and I'm telling you it does work. And my biggest takeaway was just that, you know, we are all you know, w when you, when you run a business, you are selling, you know, that's, that's what we do. We sell. But if you stop thinking about it, like selling and you start thinking about it like serving and helping people cause people want your services.

Raymond: 38:02 It's not like you're trying to be a shady used car salesman. People want your services. So if you can find a way to serve people, you know, we are, we're just as people naturally inclined to focus on ourselves. And this comes from a place of survival and now we use it in a place to thrive instead of just to survive. And if you help somebody achieve their own goals, you know, maybe somebody's goal is just to, you know, capture beautiful memories of their own family and you can help somebody achieve that of theirs. Not only will that make you happy for helping them, but then you become the hero in their story. The one where they achieved their goal is you become the hero. And we often overcomplicate things that just simply don't need to be over complicated. So that is why in December I'm going to be hosting a challenge.

Raymond: 38:55 I'll have a special episode come out all about how to create goals and how to stick with them. You know, in your photography, whether it just be, you know, as a hobby or as a business, it's not, it's not going to matter. And then we're going to share your goals in the Facebook group and find an accountability buddy so that we can once and for all, hold on to our new year's resolutions and achieve our goals. So that is it for this week. I'm so excited for that. Until next week, I want you to get out. I want you to keep shooting, I want you to stay safe and I want you to focus on yourself. That's it. I love you all.

outro: 39:31 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 169: Shooting Film: Waste of Money or Key to Greatness?

Enjoy the videos and music you love, upload original content, and share it all with friends, family, and the world on YouTube.

Shooting Film has always been seen as the purists’ form of photography. All mechanical and get it right in camera. Today with digital photography film is seen as the ultimate test of your abilities as a photographer. If you can shoot film you are great at photography. Today I talk about the stigma that shooting film has and whether or not shooting film is right for you!

Save on top quality used camera gear like the Canon AE1 and the Nikon FE2 film cameras I mentioned in this episode by shopping KEH.com! Shop through our affiliate link by clicking the button below!

In this video I show you how to develop color negative film at home. This is the easiest way to develop film. This process is very simple and it works well with 35mm or medium format film. This is the cheapest way to shoot film by far.

DSCF1779.jpg
Film 1-7.jpg
Film 1-14.jpg
Film 1-33.jpg
Film 1-45.jpg
Film 1-51.jpg
Film 1-60.jpg

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Its been a tough week for me. The Dodgers, the most winningest team in baseball this year... lost in game 5 of the devisional series to the washington nationals. The game started off strong but with back to back home runs thrown by Kershaw of all pitchers who in his 11 year pitching carear has never allowed back to back home runs during the regular season... caused the dodgers to tie the game and then a grand slam in the 10th sealed the dodgers hopes for a third attempt at a world series win.

Im heartbroken. We were so close. We were a shoe it. It was a done deal.

But you go to bed and wake up the next day and the world just isnt as... rich as it was the day before. But you have your cup of coffee and you keep moving forward.

Oh sure you still think about it. How could you not? There are memories all around you. Hats, shirts, the sticker on my car, the coffee mug Im currently drinking out of, the photo of the field at dodger stadium that hangs above my computer to look at every single day... and its painful but... you cant change the past. so reluctantly you force yourself to move on.

so there you go.

If you have been in the fb group youll know that as of recently Ive been shooting quite a bit of film.

Ive taken my film camera out at weddings and a few family events and people often ask why.

Why Im shoting film.

With digital workflows being seamlessly integrated into our lives, why shoot film?

Some ask with genuine curiosity and some ask with a sense of superiority with digital but either way Its a solid question

Let me preface by saying there are a lot of different paths in photogrpahy.

There is no one answer

What works for some wont work for others especially if you have a clearly defined goal attached to it.

When I graduated film school my mom gave me my Dads 1987 Pentax k1000 with the 50mm f2 lens that they bought at Sears

I shot with it off and on for 2 or 3 years and loved it but one day the light meter broke, and I was broke so I couldnt fix it and I didnt do much shooting

Earlier this year I found a roll of exposed film, didnt know what was on it, developed it, fell in love. (feel, light, colors, texture) I mean truly loved it. I posted some of those photos in the show notes of this episode, check them out! Beginner photography podcast.com episode 169 or just swipe up if youre in apple podcast app

So I went to buy some more film and while at the camera store... bought another film camera a Mamiya 135AF shot 3 more rolls

Then I went to get them developed

Development and prints were $65 for those 3 rolls. way too much to be sustainable. For that price digital is a no brainer.

But I thought, If I want to shoot filml thats the price I have to pay since I dont have a spare room in my house to convert into a film dark room.

A few more months went by and I shot a few more rolls of film. Still loving the rawness and feel of the photos.

so one day I was on youtube and the internet gods delivered exactly what I needed to see. A video by Willem Verbeck called develop film color film at home

that video is in the show notes as well.

I watched it and I was amazed at how easy it was!

And how... you didnt need a darkroom!

Now, you do need a Dark Room to load the film but I just use my bathroom with the door closed and hang a blanket over the door to prevent any light leaks.

But thats easy and quick.

I bought everything needed to start developing my film at home and I was set!

Lets talk about the pros and cons of film.

Pro

Because youre limited by how many photos you can take you have to Slow down, More intentional, More in the moment

No editing if you have a lab scan the photos (need to convert negitives to positives in lightroom if you scan them yourself)

Film cameras dont go obsolete and they can be found with GREAT lens for CHEAP!

Con

cost of money

Cost of time if you develop yourself. The whole development process from warming up your chemicals to development to drying, scanning, and converting takes about 3 hours from start to finish per roll.

Consistency is hard to achieve unless you develop and scan yourself.

The biggest myth I hear about shooting film is people think shooting film in itself will make you a better photographer and thats simply not true. Unless youre hyper focused on learning film photography its possible you wont learn a thing. Many times I get back photos and think "I wish I knew what my settings here were, because this isnt the photo I was looking for"

With digital your settings are baked into the photo and you can learn from them.

Plus go back and look at your parents old film prints, you WILL find bad photos. so simply shooting ON film will not make you better.

Why do people say it makes you a better photogrpaher.

There is something psycological when you know you only have 24 or 36 photos you can take. You ask yourself even if its not consious weather or not what your looking at is worth a photo. If it is, you take one or two photos. Not 20. And its its not worth a photo, you take 0 photos. not 20 photos.

When you imagine someone taking $1 out of your pocket everytime you take a photo, it makes you slow down.

Ok its not exactly $1 but Ill get into a cost break down in a second

When you slow down youre more intentional with your photos. You ask yourself if this is the best photo you can take. You pay more attention to how you frame your photo, you question if 2.8 will be enough DOF or if f4 is the right answer. You look at your backgrounds and colors diferently. youre more aware of that bright red background or that telephone wire that cuts right through someones head.

And simply being aware of those things will help you make better, more intentional decisions. Because you know youre limited by frames and cost.

Every year indianapolis hosts an event called motorcycles on meridian where an estimated 30,000 motorcycles show up. Growing up I was an avid rider and decided to go to the all day event and shoot some film.

I brought 2 rolls of film. 36 frames each, 72 total photos possible.

I was there shooting for 4 hours and shot a total of 40 frames.

If I was at a wedding for 4 hours I would shoot close to 1000-1200 frames.

But I had a hard time shooting those 40 frames! Why?

Well how many shots do you need to tell a story? You need a beginning, middle, end, and you need wide shots, medium shots, and closeups. You want some environment and you want some details.

Thats 8 different photos right there, then some photos you take a few shots off just to make sure you nailed exposure or the moment. So even if I took 3 of each photos thats 24 photos. Then I just started experimenting with composition and looking for moments to anticipate action. After 40 photos I was toast!

I got home, developed the film and I have to say Im pretty proud of the photos.

You can see some in the show notes of this episode.

Are they the best photos Ive ever taken? no

You might look at them and think they are garbage.

Photography is subjective I get it.

But did it teach me anything about photography?

If you think about an event or a shoot, analytically (map out the who what when where and why) (what shots you need, what lens you would use for those shots, what you will say to your subject, if you need any additional lighting, where it will be placed ect) then you can achieve great things with those limited resources and dont have to go in to debt to shoot film!

And make no mistake, this is how you SHOULD be shooting digital. With Intention.

Ok covered that now... Cost

Its not quite $1 for every photo but lets break it down as if you were starting from scratch today, as I did.

I shot 40 frames becuse I had to finish up my previous roll before I loaded a fresh roll. So lets break down the cost for 36 photos. A standard roll. $8

Lets assume you have a camera, if not you can get one online for under $100 and remember film is the full frame. So you can shoot full frame for $100 with film!

Ok so then you need to develop it.

You need a tank, a reel, chemicals and bottles to hold the chemicals.

The chemicals cost me $40 shipped and last for about 16 rolls of film.

Eveything else you only have to buy once and cost me about $60

So we are at $100 to get started and be able to develop 576 photos.

and then just $40 in chemicals to develop every 576 photos after that.

so $128 for 16 rolls of film and $40 for chemicals is $168 / 576 photos = $0.29 per photos.

Is that a waste of money?

I dont think so An entry level DSLR is about $500. You could shoot more than 1200 shots on film for that price, which INCLUDES the camera.

Plus is anything a waste of money if youre trying something new? No.

If you dont like it you have gained so much experiance. And I will gladly buy your unused film!

If youre a hands on person. Someone who loves to really know how something works in and out. Someone who likes to try new things and do fun experiments. Someone who is curious. Then I think shooting film is a fantastic option for you.

That why I listed it in my free ebook 46 creative photography ideas which you can grab by signing up with the link the show notes or heading over to the resource page at BPP. com.

But is shooting film the key to greatness? not any more than shooting digital would.

So this episode is a bit clickbaity because as you now know. Shooting film is neither a waste of money or the key to greatness.

It all comes down to shooting with intention.

If you shot digital with the same attention to detail as you would naturally do when shooting film, then your skills as a photographer would grow just as fast.

If youre just shooting photos for snapshots, casual photos of the kids things you want to remember than maybe film isnt for you. But if you want photography to be your artisic expression. your creative outlet, more than grip and grin photos then I cant stress the potential benifits shooting film has for you.

If youre interested but totally lost on where to start, to look for a film camera

or what to look for, I would stick what whatever digital camera you have.

So if you shoot canon, the Canon ae1 is a great choice and will work with your canon digital EF lenses. And if you shoot nikon the Nikon FE2 is a great choice. Both cameras can be purchased for under $100. When buying used gear online I always use KEH. They test the gear and stand behind it if something is wrong. You can go to KEH.com or use my affiliate link in the show notes of this episode which really helps the show out at no cost to you.

And if youre interested in shooting film but dont want to develop it yourself then there are several places online to get your film developed and scanned. The darkroom .com is one and it will cost you about $12 per roll.

So as I said, shooting film is neither a waste of time, nor is it the key to greatness.

Shooting with intention is the key to greatness.

Thats it for this week.

Get out, keep shooting, stay safe and focus on yourself.

BPP 168: Success without Social Media?

Social media overwhelm is real. And after Kimberly in the Beginner Photography Podcast Facebook group asked of its importance I knew this topic had to be talked about. So today I share how you can be successful as a photographer without social media and tips on how you can simply remove the overwhelm of using social media to promote your photography.

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

BPP 167: Photographers Summit - What it takes to get started!

With the launch of my course Auto to Amazing students got access to several live Q&A sessions with well respected and successful photographers where they could ask specific questions they had about getting started in photography. This is a mega interview with Photographers Nick Church, Matt Payne, and Andrew Hellmich.

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically by Temi.com and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

BPP 166: Emma O'Brien - Tackling Black Dog Syndrome

Emma O'Brien has been a portrait and pup photographer (as in dogs) for more than a decade. Her series "The Black Series" gained her international attention and raised awareness for shelter animals that I cant wait to talk about.

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How Emma got into photography

  • What came first people or pets

  • Why Emma left wedding photography

  • What was Emma’s main source of photography eduction

  • The hardest part about photography to learn

  • Where Emma got the idea for The Black Series

  • When Emma first got involved with shelter animal photography

  • How Emma keeps her subjects still and focuses

  • How to add emotion and story to your photos of pets

  • Commonly bad info Emma hears being taught to new photographers

Premium Members Also Learn:

  • How to make money photographing pets

  • How to convince pet owners to the worth of pet photography

  • What photography products pet owners purchase

Resources:

DSC_1007-bw.jpg
DSC_1656-bw.jpg
DSC_2266-bw.jpg
DSC_0022.jpg
DSC_9122.jpg

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00 This week on the beginning of photography podcast. We talk to a photographer who used her camera to save the lives of those in need. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:10 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, Father Home brewer, La Dodger Fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer Raymond Hatfield. Welcome

Raymond: 00:40 Back to this episode of the beginning of photography podcast. As always, I am your host Raymond Hatfield and this is a really fun and inspiring interview that we are going to get into today with a photographer who was just, I mean, her voice is infectious. If you don't find yourself smiling or laughing, then you just must be dead inside because this is a she just brings out that quality that just makes you want to smile. And it is a, a really fun, and I can't wait to get on into it with y'all, but I wanted to share this. Last week, I was interviewed on another podcast of the wedding photo hangover podcast, which is hosted by two, actually pretty local photographers, at least here in Indiana, a fellow wedding photographers, Steven and Dustin. And if you've never heard an episode of the wedding photo hanger or wedding hangover podcast, then you are going to be in for a treat.

Raymond: 01:37 It is not your typical podcast, but I have a ton of fun. So we talked about a whole lot of things like me going to essentially an all boys high school how I melted a GoPro and and then I just do a terrible job answering questions from random photography, Facebook groups throughout the Internet. So if you're interested in any event feel free to go ahead and just search your favorite podcast player for the wedding photo hangover podcast and you will, you'll be able to check that out. It was, it was fun. So Steve and Dustin, if you guys are listening, thanks for having me on. I had a blast. All right. Now I want to give a huge shout out to one of our listeners Malgorzata who that is a mouthful. And every time I say it I feel like I'm saying it wrong, but she's told me that I say it right.

Raymond: 02:35 She left a five star review for the podcast on iTunes and it was a, it was really inspiring actually. She says a few months back, I didn't have a clue what a podcast of wise and after being asked to do a senior shoot, I found the podcast app and search for beginner photographer. Thank goodness Raymond Raymond's podcast came up. I've been hooked ever since. Raymond really wants us to succeed and develop skills at our own pace here I learned the most. So do yourself a favor and listen, you'll be hooked. Malgorzata, thank you so much for leaving the review. They truly, truly do help the podcast more than you can imagine. And you are a talented photographer. You know, looking at your photos. If I was just looking at your photos, I would never guess that you are a quote unquote beginner. So I am honored that a, that you listen to the podcast and are able to take away so much each week.

Raymond: 03:29 So again, Malgorzata thank you for your review. Okay. So this week I have a chat with Emma O'Brien who photographs or photography really changed course for her when she asked how she could help her local animal shelter. So this is a great interview. I think you guys are gonna pick out a time, especially because I talk about the importance of shooting for free when you're first getting started. And not that Emma was just getting started, but she's still, you know, took a break and shot something that she was passionate about for free and it really changed the course of her career and you're going to pick that up. And as always, I save a portion of the interview that is more focused on not so much the beginner aspects and things that you need to know to get started, but it's more focused on how to start making money with your camera.

Raymond: 04:20 And then I save for premium listeners. So this week premium listeners are going to hear how to make money photographing pets, how to communicate the value of pet photography to pet parents and what products pet owners want from their sessions so that you can offer them too. So if you are interested in any of those things, then head over to beginner photography, podcast.com and click the premium membership link at the top of the page where you can become a premium member and here all of the past interviews with past guests and all of their best tips in starting to make money with your camera. So that is it. Let's go ahead and get on into this week's interview with Emma O'Brien.

Raymond: 05:04 Today's guest is Emma O'Brien. She is a portrait and pup photographer as in dogs. For more than a decade. Her series, the black series gained her international attention and raised awareness for shelter animals. And I cannot wait to talk to her about it. Emma, thank you so much for coming on the podcast.

Emma O'Brien: 05:22 Thank you very much for having me. It's great to be here.

Raymond: 05:25 I'm excited to chat with you about kind of everything that you're doing, because what's great to see is that you know, many, I interview many photographers and kind of in their own sense, I feel like a lot of people are using photography to change the world, but you're doing it more in a literal sense, which is really cool. And I think that that's a bit of a mind shift, a mind shift that I'm really excited to chat to you about. But before we get into that, I gotta ask, what came first? Was it portraits of people or pups,

Emma O'Brien: 05:55 Portraits of people, started my career as a wedding photographer. What do you believe?

Raymond: 06:01 Really awesome. Okay. So then how, how did you, how did you just get started in, in wedding photography or how did you get started in photography in general?

Emma O'Brien: 06:10 Yeah. Okay. So I went to college in the UK, so I'm British, but I live in South Africa in 2004. So of course we were at college in the dark room and doing stuff on film. And whilst I was there, somebody who was on the course with me was working for a local photography studio and it was one of these guys who kind of did very cheap weddings and just sent other photographers out to do them. So she said to me, you know, he's looking for, for other people, so I'll introduce you to him. So, so great. So off I went and I think I shot a couple of weddings for him and I thought, yeah, I think I could probably do this myself. So I, you know, the, the beauty of being very young and brave, you know, and I'd, so I'd just set up a business shooting weddings and it kind of, that's how it started. Oh my gosh, I love that.

Raymond: 07:01 So what was, so how, how before I, let's see, so you learned photography, you were taking a course in, in university for photography itself. Okay. So can you kind of take me back there because I think that a lot of the listeners are, are still stuck there, right? The point of going to university, especially for taking photography, is to learn photography. In those early days when you were starting to learn and understand, what would you say was the hardest part for you to grasp?

Emma O'Brien: 07:33 I'm just trying to think. Really. I'm one of those people who just kind of decides I'm going to do something and I'd just go and do it and then figure it out along the way. And I think a lot of the time, so we don't want to really want to talk about what those weddings look like for that shot. Perhaps.

Raymond: 07:50 I'm the same way. You don't have to be shy.

Emma O'Brien: 07:52 We don't need to look at that work from 15 years ago. And I just think, I feel I figured it out along the way and I learned the hard way with lots of stuff. I lost half a wedding once. Very awkward conversation to have with a client, but I think I just kind of got on with it. And I think the one thing, cause I get asked a lot with people, photographers that I work with here you know, how do I get started? And I think the thing is you've just got to start and you've just got to pick up the camera and go and shoot. Yeah. I think lots of people get very caught up with, oh, I'm not quite good enough. You know, if you, if you're going to do like cheek weddings, which was what I was doing. So the expectation was super low, thankfully it's okay and you can just kind of go for it, you know?

Raymond: 08:38 Yeah, yeah. That I totally agree. I totally agree. I had a, a similar entrance into photography or specifically shooting weddings when I, me and my then girlfriend moved across the country to a place I had, I'd never been here before, before we moved to, and I just, I don't think that I was ready to shoot weddings, you know, but I went for it anyway cause I just thought, well, I know how to use my camera. So how hard could weddings be? And as you know, it's hard. It's not, it's not that, it's not, you know, if you know your camera settings are good, it's, it's definitely more than that. So tell me about how you, how you lost that, the half a wedding. Were you shooting on film at the time with [inaudible]?

Emma O'Brien: 09:19 No, no. I say I started shooting weddings digitally, so I was at college doing a lot of black and white stuff, but we were shooting, I'm shooting digitally. In fact, my dad, you know, my dad was quite a keen photographer, so I, I stole his nick on d one that he had at the time. So that was the first thing I went to news. And I uploaded everything to a hard drive. And of course, you know, I had like two memory cards and I had quite a few jobs coming in. So I'm copying stuff off the memory cards onto a hard drive. That is one of those old ones with the wheels that span in it and it fell off the desk.

Raymond: 09:55 Oh No. Yeah, yeah. That's, that's all it'll take. That's all I will thing. I don't think people understand how, how fragile hard-drives really are when they just sit on your desk. You never think about them, but just a simple bump can really do it. So luckily now we're cloud storage.

Emma O'Brien: 10:14 Absolutely. Especially those real old school ones, you know, that were big and you plug them in and they had a power supply. So I think that the newer ones are better, but you know, I learned a very valuable lesson about backing stuff up and then, you know, that was, it was an awkward conversation with that client.

Raymond: 10:32 Sure. Yeah. I can imagine.

Emma O'Brien: 10:34 Yeah. But it was one of those things. It's gone, it's gone. There's nothing we can do about it. So I actually got to move on. It was a second wedding, so it wasn't too tragic.

Raymond: 10:46 Tell me, tell me that that wasn't the last wedding that you shot and you decided, you know what? No more people, I'm going straight to pets. Pets aren't going to be mad if I lose their image.

Emma O'Brien: 10:54 No, no, no, no. I just learned the lessons. I was like, right, okay, we need to get more memory cards. We need to invest more in stuff and it needs to be a case of the cards don't get wiped until the edits are complete and stuff is backed up in several places.

Raymond: 11:10 I'm sorry, one second, Charlie. I'm on a phone call right now. Okay. Can you give me a few minutes? Thank you. That's Charlie. He's obviously feeling much better now. Sorry about that. I usually have a curtain that goes across, but we just got new cats and they were climbing on the curtains or ripped the whole thing down. So clearly it wasn't anchored in correctly. So that has, yeah. Growing up I had a cat. Cat's name was Buckaroo Bop. I have no idea why we named the, and Bob. He was a fantastic cat and then he passed away when I was probably like maybe nine or 10. I was pretty young, but we had any other animals a until, or we never had any more chats until recently when my wife was like, hey, somebody's work is giving away cats. So now we have cats and now, now we have cats. But yeah. Yeah, we just we just got them a neuter the other day, so there's still kind of loopy walking down town. I don't know what to do with themselves. Yeah, it's been, it's been an interesting few days for sure. So I apologize for that, that interruption.

Emma O'Brien: 12:20 Really. It's fine. I'm hoping we've got six dogs here, so I'm hoping they all stay quiet for an hour or two a locked away. I'm hoping they're quiet, otherwise it'll be lucky. And there's a parrots. I'm also hoping he stays quiet.

Raymond: 12:34 Oh, parents that I never, I never got into birds, but a, I had neighbors who had birds and I think that's why I never got an independence.

Emma O'Brien: 12:40 Yeah. Yeah. They know that they are an interesting,

Raymond: 12:44 I love that. So I guess we could just use this as the perfect segue. How did you go from shooting weddings to start photographing animals and was that kind of like the intention or did it just happen organically?

Emma O'Brien: 12:58 So it was a bit of a surprise to me. So I started my, as I started shooting weddings in 2004 in the UK and in 2000 there's dogs barking now in 2009 m I moved to South Africa and I think by that point because I'd also got divorced, I got to the point where I actually really was not digging the idea of photographing weddings anymore. In the UK it was very difficult. I don't know what the weather is in Indianapolis, but in the UK, you know, it's very rainy and I just got to the point of being very frustrated with shooting weddings and it would start to rain and people would look at you like you're going to perform some sort of miracle. And I actually found it, you know, it ended up being less about the creativity and often more about damage limitation.

Raymond: 13:45 Oh that's a really interesting way of looking at it. Yeah.

Emma O'Brien: 13:47 Yup, Yup. And I got frustrated cause I'm thinking, you know, here we are at this venue and I could be doing this shot, this shot, this shot. And actually now we're stuck inside and I've got my flash gun and it's all gonna look a bit, you know, rubbish. So actually I just found that very stressful. So so I decided to want to move to South Africa. I did retire from weddings and I just concentrated on shooting portraits. So that's what I started building my business doing. And then in 2011 I went to my local SPCA and I adopted a little sausage dog called Jeremy and also was there. I got chatting to them and I said, look, I'm a photographer, can I help you somehow? And we came up with this idea of shooting an annual fundraising calendar and that's where it all started. So I never set out to be an animal photographer. It just kinda happened. And then I kind of discovered that I really loved it and it had a bit of a gift for it. And then of course the clients started arriving. Yeah. So, and then I ended up helping other shelters. I'm photographing their dogs up for adoption. And then I kind of got my name out doing, doing that. And then, and then it's just kind of, it's morphed from there. It's just totally unplanned

Raymond: 15:04 As some of the best things in life are for sure. Yep. Yep. So when, when you, when you walked in there and you ask them how you can help, you said, you know, I'm a photographer, you had no preconceived idea of, of that the future could hold for you as photographing animals. It was just you simply wanted to give back and then you just enjoyed that time so much that you're like, you know what, I'm going to offer this to paying clients. Is that it?

Emma O'Brien: 15:33 Yup. Yup. Absolutely. So it just kind of, it went, the next two people bought the calendar I'd shot and then started asking me, Oh, can you come and photograph my dog or my cat? Yeah, I mean, it just, the kind of very organically grew from there. So it was never something I sat down and thought, well, I'm going to be a dog photographer. Totally. I sorta, I'm as surprised as everybody else, I think clients.

Raymond: 15:55 So what were some of the biggest challenges that you faced when you started photographing animals coming from, from people, I'm sure that the technical is probably transferred over just the same, but what about the actual shooting itself was challenging for you?

Emma O'Brien: 16:12 So I think the thing with, with dogs, I think it's quite interesting for people listening to the podcast who are thinking, oh, I'd Kinda like to get better pictures of my pets. It's getting the angle right. And you do have to kind of approach it a little bit differently. In fact, dogs are very similar to photographing children. I think you generally get the best shots of them when you're at eye level with them. Or if you've got your dogs a little bit higher on sitting on something. And I figured out along the way that also it's much easier to keep dogs still if you put them on something. Cause they, they, they know, they sort of, unless you've got a very well trained dog, you know, they will sit and then walk off or turn sideways. So you've kind of gotten the learn all these tricks about elevating them a little bit, making sure you've got somebody holding treats above the camera lens so they look straight at you. And then I've got a collection of excellent and very strange dog noises that I make that make sense.

Raymond: 17:11 Do you have any squirrel noises?

Emma O'Brien: 17:12 No Squirrel noises, but I've got like cats and a prairie dogs that sometimes works. I've got an app on my phone and I've also gotten very good at doing cat noises. So when people are photographing their dogs, I'll be making these noises and they're like, is that you?

Raymond: 17:29 Wow. You Bet. Good making that noise. Yeah. Wonderful. So did you, obviously these are a lot of tricks that you just pick up over time. Is this something to kind of take me back to that first shoot that you did for the shelter? Did you just show up and you're like, Hey, I'm gonna make noises, I have treats, I'm doing all this stuff. Or did you find yourself kind of frustrated trying to try and to take those photos?

Emma O'Brien: 17:53 I'm just trying to think. I think these are things I've learned along the way. I think treats are always a very obvious one cause most dogs will respond quite well to biscuits or you know, or sausage or something like that. And it was just kids too as well. Absolutely. See you can bribe them with these things. Say they it is a bear that it kind of overlaps. Say it's always having somebody helping as well. So I think this shelter photography can be a little bit more challenging cause often you'll move, I tend to move the dogs out of their pens or their runs cause I don't like having the cages and everything on display cause I think it's actually very off putting for people. So it's finding a spot. And so our South African shelters won't even compare to your American shelters, which are often very beautifully set up and they get caught a lot of government funding and they look very neat and tidy. It's a little bit more basic here. So then you've got to find somewhere where there's some good lighting and the backdrops. Okay. And there aren't too many other distractions around. So it's kind of a bit of a Juggling Act of trying to get the sweet spot, which is always a bit of a compromise I think.

Raymond: 19:04 Sure, sure. Now for, for that first shoot were you just trying to get one good photo of each doc? Cause obviously for portraits of people you want a variety of images, you want to, you know, different poses and looks yeah. For for the animal shelter. What was your, your thought process there?

Emma O'Brien: 19:22 So when I'm, I mean mostly I kind of do this when I'm photographing old dogs is my, my kind of modus operandi if you like, is I like dogs looking straight into the camera. And I like them quite animated cause I like to just capture that little moment and glimpse of personality. So for me it's kind of that, just that momentary connection with the dog. So it's kind of always getting someone to position them front on and then obviously do all the tricks and squeaky balls and toys just to get them looking straight at me. Cause I think especially when you've got dogs that are up for adoption and you wanting to find homes for them you want people to be able to kind of connect with that dog, if that makes sense. So they can kind of look at them and think, oh, you know, I really like that little kind of cheeky glint in his eye. Or you know, that dog he has got really soulful eyes. So for me it's very much about kind of get that connection and really capturing that personality in the shots.

Raymond: 20:19 And then did they say what they were going to be using the or I guess how the, how the photos would, would be used? Would it just be online? Are they printing out flyers or, no, I'm sorry, you talked in the beginning it was purely for the calendar.

Emma O'Brien: 20:31 Yeah. So the SPCA calendar one was, yeah, the shots were going in the calendar. And then for some of the other shelters that are sort of started doing stuff for a lot of it was going onto Facebook in their adoption albums.

Raymond: 20:42 I see. Okay. So then how did the idea for the black series come along? Cause I kind of talked about that in the intro. I just, I, I mentioned it. Can you kind of, can you tell me where the idea came from? What it is and then what it was that you hoped to accomplish as well.

Emma O'Brien: 20:58 Okay. So I'm, I'm kind of always trying to think of ways to encourage people to adopt shelter dogs. So we've got four here at home and mine are like proper mixed breed mati creatures. So I did do a project previously called maths, which I self published as a book. And I, I actually focused there on mixed breed shelter dogs. Cause unfortunately they fill shelters worldwide. People want pedigree dogs. So all these kind of mishmash of dogs that are brown and different colors. So I did that project and then I was kind of thinking, you know, what do I do next? And then the idea just came to me for four black dogs cause I thought, you know, that's subtle. Make a really cool series cause it works beautifully together to capture black dogs cause they all look quite different even though people sort of perceive them to be a bit boring and a bit the same.

Emma O'Brien: 21:49 So I thought, right, I'm going to tackle that. And I'd been playing around with these black backdrop photos in my studio for my paying clients and I photographed a couple of black dogs against it. And actually it shouldn't work, but it works really well. So I thought, right, I'm going to do this black series, I'm going to do black on black cause I d I don't, I haven't really seen it done anywhere else. And then also they're making them a black and white as well, just to really make the dogs the personality of the dogs. The focus in the pictures.

Raymond: 22:19 Yeah. Yeah. I think what's interesting is a, you're right, black on black, it doesn't seem like it should work. But when you look at your photos, the way that they've been lit, the way that they'd been composed, and how you really try to pull out that personality, which by the way, all of your captions for your photos of these animals are fantastic and definitely worth the read. A great a great stress reliever for sure. But I think I think what's interesting obviously is, is your lighting, like you said, you know, and getting that that personality to come out really makes these photos work. And then I was going somewhere with that. I was thinking again about the captions. You have one about it. I think it's like a little Jack Russell with like a beautiful scarf on. And I was thinking about that photo real quick.

Raymond: 23:08 No, but, but, but you're right having it as, as a full black series, I think what it does is it brings all the attention to the animals, the animal face, you know, whereas we can see the whole animal. I feel like we know what animals look like, you know, like, and as somebody who, I mean, I've, I've never, you know, looked at a pedigree animal, tried to, you know, look at them for how perfect they are. I just always look at that face because animals look funny. And when you have the same color of backdrop in the color of the animal, your attention just goes right to that face and it does bring that personality to them. So that is, I just want to commend you on that. That is, you know, great job for taking a risk and it totally, it's fun. So I totally stole your thunder. Let's get back to the idea as to why why, why focus on, on, on black animals?

Emma O'Brien: 24:00 Okay, so I think following on from the mixed breed months that I did the series of, the other thing is, is black dogs are the least likely to be adopted if they end up at a shelter. They are there's quite a few theories on, I've done a bit of research on it. And I think the problem is they all kind of a perceived to look a bit boring because they don't have individual markings. I think there's a bit of a perception that maybe they're more aggressive cause some of them, especially if you've got dogs with very sort of bright brown eyes, they can look a bit a bit menacing. So then it's a, it's a thing called black dog syndrome. It's a, it's a huge problem worldwide. So for me it was kind of what can I bring attention to with my work and try and get that message out.

Emma O'Brien: 24:50 And I did it in, I didn't want to with the talking about the captions cause I was kind of putting this series together and I thought, you know, I've got the option of going super serious with it and you know, this is Casper and he spent 10 years at a shelter and he's just been adopted. But I think we're all a bit fed up of negative and serious stuff. So I just kind of am. And it was a total personal projects. I thought, you know what? Screw it. I'm just going to go wild here and I'm just going to let my inner creative out and do some scribbling with these captions. I thought let me just make it totally fun. And I captioned them, obviously locked the dogs with people. And it kind of, everybody loved it and it got, you know, it went viral on board Pandora. I mean, it's gone round the world, this project. And I don't think it would have done if I've kept it super serious.

Raymond: 25:36 Sure, sure. Everybody likes to, like you said, people are very serious. It's kind of, you know, we hear a lot of sad news. If there's anything that can kind of brighten your day, especially for, I mean, underneath it, it's a, it's a very sad topic, you know, that I believe that you shared with me that that black dogs are the most euthanized animals, like you said, because they're not, they're just not being adopted. So taking this seemingly sad subject and then kind of turning it around and, and giving them that personality really does help. So what was it that you hope to accomplish? Was it just the awareness or was it something, something bigger than that?

Emma O'Brien: 26:14 So it was literally making people more aware of it. And just kind of drawing attention to it. Cause I'm very much you know, we've kind of talked about how, you know, starting out as a wedding photographer, but I actually wanted to become, you know, become a photographer when I grew up because I wanted to tell stories. So it was always very influenced by documentary photographers. So w Eugene Smith is one of my all time favorites photographers. And loved that he was, you needed stuff for life magazine. And I loved that he shot a body of work of a Japanese village and a lot of the children there were being born with limb deformities and actually turns out that the, there was a factory kind of nearby that was pumping effluent into the water and they were eating the fish and these children were being born very deformed.

Emma O'Brien: 27:07 And the images he took made the world aware of it. And it also was very instrumental in them winning a lawsuit. And I was just so inspired. I thought, you know, how, how amazing to be making work that makes such a huge difference. So that was always, it's always kind of been my motivation with it. So then to put this series together and just to do something to do my bit to I guess make a bit of a difference in the world was what kind of drove it. But to do it in a way that was relatable and entertaining is not quite the right word, but that, that would, people would pick it up, enjoy it and share it. Cause the more that happens, obviously the more people know about it. Cause I've had messages from quite a few people who've seen it who didn't know about black dog syndrome. So it's been quite wonderful to know that actually it has the work made an impact.

Raymond: 27:57 So have you gotten any messages of hearing of people who have adopted a black dogs or cats purely by learning about you know, the education that you're providing them to through these photographs?

Emma O'Brien: 28:12 Not yet, but I did have quite a lot of messages from people who'd seen the series and were busy sharing their adopted rescue dogs with me. I had a message from somebody, I think it was in Australia who said, I didn't know about this, but the next dog I'm going to get, we will be one from a shelter and it will be a black one. Wow. So yeah, no it's amazing. So I'm not kid. Good. I've, I've done, I've done something there. So one thing I was going to just drop in for you is there's a documentary that's on Netflix called life in the dog house. And it's a documentary about Danny and Rollins rescue now. I think they are in Texas somewhere. We'll just have to check that. And it talks about they have rescues in their house, so they've adopted out like 11,000 dogs, which is phenomenal. But there's a sequence in, in the documentary where they go to a shelter cause they often go and pick up the dogs that are sort of running out of time. And the shelters give them to them, say can adopt them out. And there's one sequence where they go to a shelter and that shelter won't allow them in, but they bring out black dog after black dog after they bring out like 12 black dogs and hand them over to them.

Raymond: 29:23 Oh Wow. Wow.

Emma O'Brien: 29:25 So it was kind of, it's, it's, it's a real, it's a reality.

Raymond: 29:28 Sure. Not just in South Africa, but we're worldwide.

Emma O'Brien: 29:31 Yep. Worldwide. Yep.

Raymond: 29:33 Oh Man. That's that's, I'm going to have to check that out and obviously I will put links to that in the show notes if anybody listening to check that out. So let's transition a bit from the black series, cause obviously I'm taking photos of, you know, cute animals just sounds totally like a dream job. Right? It sounds like so much fun. You just get to play with dogs all day. I get the pet up, it's awesome. But I want to know how do you convince you know, when you're not working with the shelter, how do you convince potential clients, the pet owners to spend money on, on pet photography?

Raymond: 30:10 Hey, Raymond here. And if you're listening to this, you are listening to the free version of today's interview. If you want to hear more from today's guest about the business of photography, consider becoming a premium member every week. Guests answer questions about products, pricing packages, and so much more that will help your growing photography business thrive. This is the next logical step to join head over to begin on photography podcast.com and click the premium membership button at the top of the page.

Raymond: 30:40 Yes, I love it. Oh my gosh. So many. So many great tips right there on obviously not only being able to make money photographing animals, but just, just how to do it in a very efficient way and, and get that done. So let's talk a little bit kind of about you know, as somebody who, who shot weddings, you understand and as somebody who wanted it to tell stories with their camera, you understand that when you go to a wedding there's a very clear story that's being told that day and you have to, it's your job to capture it. How do you how do you add story onto your, onto your portraits of, of, of pets for your clients?

Emma O'Brien: 31:21 That is a very good question. I think for the, for the studio portraits it's kind of, it's, it's not so much a story I suppose as well. It's kind of capturing that moment in time. With the dogs. Especially if I'm just shooting, just shooting kind of dog portraits. You're capturing people's beautiful for children. But if I'm going to a park or something, so often I do do location shoots as well. So sometimes I'll always find out from a clients you know, how their dog is with, with traveling, what are they like coming to new places. Cause I'll say some dogs would really not cope very well in a studio at home. So if we go to a park or something, you've got a bit more scope for, for capturing a bit more variety I suppose. But I think for me it's about capturing, especially if you're photographing pets with their, with their owners or their parents as you sort of, everyone refers to themselves as it's kinda capturing that interaction and that sense of fun. Cause dogs are fun, you know, space especially, you know, most people say to me, or my dog doesn't behave, we all can. I don't really expect them to, it's fine cause you should meet mine. They really don't behave.

Emma O'Brien: 32:33 Yes, it's a bit like a circus hit most of the time. So, so it's capturing kind of the interaction and the moments of people kind of holding their dogs and something funny happens and it's like there's little in between moments as opposed to the very staged portraits. And I think like with the studio stuff, it's like capturing the, recapturing the dog's personality. So I'll say to people you know, I'll kind of, I don't like to show people too many pictures during this, you know, after the shoot. I think, I don't know how, how you feel about that. Cause I know some photographers are like, don't show the client anything on camera and some people will happily flick through. But I always like to just show them a couple and just say to them, have I got the dog as you see them, have I got there real? You know, when you look at them and you really see, you know, Lucy for instance, is this a really Lucy look? And most of the time if I've done my job properly, they'll say, yes, that's perfect cause you've just, you've just got that. You just got Lucy's trademark, whatever she does. So it's kind of way, it's just that kind of personality really.

Raymond: 33:39 You know, I think I'm saying a lot of times when I ask that question as a, as a wedding photographer, I think of sometimes photos as as a series. And, and as I asked that question to you, I was kind of thinking about that question as a whole and how even often think of that photo the Afghan girl by Steven, Steven McCurry who that is just one photo. Right? And that's not, that's not like, we don't, we don't, it's not like an environmental portrait. We don't see the, the, the environment in which he's in, we don't know her living conditions. It's just that close up portrait and yet portrait so much. So much story can be pulled out of that one photo. It's on how we see it. And I would assume that it's a lot of times the same for same for an animal.

Raymond: 34:28 You're not trying to, trying to, you know, go off and create something that's like met, you know, like, like for an engagement session, you're going out and you're trying to like look at this beautiful place and look at how much like in love we are, but let them portraits. It's a little it's a little different that different. You made me want to change my questions and to think about photography a little bit differently today. Thank you for that. Let's talk a little bit about lighting. You obviously, as you said, you go out in the in the field, you photograph animals at the park or at home, and then you also photograph animals in the studio. Would you say it's about 50, 50, or is it split a little bit differently? It's probably 50. 50. Okay. And do you find that that's, that's because that's primarily what you show is the stuff that you shoot in studio video? So

Emma O'Brien: 35:20 I think also here it's been a little bit, cause we're, we're in South Africa, we're just coming out of winter now and in winter around kind of around Johannesburg where we are, it doesn't rain all the winter, so everything the is okay, see the leaves fall off the trees, which isn't really great, but the grass goes brown. So actually outdoors in a park or anything, it's pretty much off limits. So the only other option is to go kind of into this Johannesburg kind of city center, which used to be, it's quite cool, but you've got to be a little bit careful, you know, it's a little, it can be a little bit you know, it's a bit of a dangerous place potentially. So if you've got clients who are brave and that can say to them, how do you feel about a real kind of grungy urban shoot, that's cool. They'll go. But oftentimes people all say, well, we'd rather come to the studio. So fought for winter, I've been doing a lot of studio stuff and now it's spring is here and it's starting to get green and warm up. So I'll be doing more, more outdoor stuff's just a little bit weather dependent.

Raymond: 36:28 Yeah, yeah, yeah. I would, I would totally imagine that. So when you are outdoors, obviously indoors, you need full control of lighting. When you're outdoors, what does the lighting setup look for you? Or is it all natural? Do you have a that flash on a soapbox?

Emma O'Brien: 36:43 Nope. Say I do all, all natural lights. And when I'm outside and if I'm doing kind of park shoots, I generally steer everything towards kind of late afternoon to say you get that nice kind of afternoon lighting. I tend to backlight everything. So, and then I work with a, I've got a silver reflector that I work with. I think for me it just, I keep it simple cause I think also with you know, like I said, I'll do lots of stuff with dogs and with children and with families. And I think the less complicated you make it, the easier it is for people to feel comfortable. Cause for me, you know, my, you know, my work is very much about capturing character in a sense of fun. So you know, there's lots of, I see lots of photographers who these beautiful, very artistic shots, which look wonderful, but it's totally not what I do. So I tend to just try and keep it very simple. So it's just clients don't feel intimidated. And also if they, if they're not quite in the perfect spot, I can, I could move. It just, it doesn't, there's not too much kind of precision involved cause with dogs, you know, you kind of difficult to be precise. It's tough to sort of roll with it other than right over there I pay. That's fine. Let me move that way, you know. So,

Raymond: 37:58 So then how does that vary when you go into the studio? Cause obviously you're going from a very simple, you know, show up and shoot, just angle the reflector to now being in the studio for control of lighting. Is it, just tell me how different of an experience that is for both you and the client.

Emma O'Brien: 38:16 So my studio set up, I still keep it quite simple so I've got a really big octobox that I use most of the time for dogs. So I don't have to worry too much if they're a little bit to the left or you know, they're not quite in the perfect spot. Cause I think that's the one thing with dogs and like we've said with photographing is you can't get too hung up on, you've got to sit on that x I've made with tape on the floor because otherwise you're just going to have a frustrating shoot. And it frustrates the client as well. And I think I'm, you know, one thing I'm very keen on is making sure my clients have a good experience. Cause I think actually the experience of a photo shoot makes the images because people then look at those images and they're like, oh, we had so much fun. I love these pictures. Yeah,

Raymond: 39:05 We've got to do it again next year. Yeah. Yes. Exactly. 31. Yeah. So with with, with weddings, when I go out and shoot, Aye, this is gonna sound so geeky. I went through light room and looked at all of my settings and I found that f two, eight was my most used aperture when it comes to dogs and they're very rambunctious. Nature is something like f two, eight. And the shallow depth of field that you get from that something that you can use or do you have to stop down to up a five, six or an eight to be able to capture them?

Emma O'Brien: 39:41 I probably am not really quite brave enough to do 2.8 all the time because you know, you know full well you've got to be so precise with that. If it's off slightly, it's done. So I'm, I'm kind of anywhere between four and 5.6 maybe 6.3 if I've got a couple of dogs. I don't generally go much more than that because I, I do like a, a nice soft background, especially, you know, especially if you're out of pocket does, it really does draw the focus to the animal. So w we, we know about appetites and steps the field, hopefully, hopefully everyone who's listening has got a bit of an idea about that. So so yeah. And then in studio, cause I'm usually shooting against a plain backdrop. It doesn't, it doesn't really matter of course in studio I might be anywhere between six and eight depending on, on kind of what I'm shooting. White background or black background. Yeah.

Raymond: 40:38 I gotcha. Very cool. When I'm sure as kind of like last week I interviewed a photographer who shoots food, right? Lots of food and I kind of brought up the, the idea that it's like we all eat food. We can all, you know, that's kind of how Instagram gained its popularity, right? People were taking pictures of the food and posting it, but just because people were taking pictures of the food, it doesn't mean that it was necessarily good. Just because people take photos of their pets, it doesn't necessarily mean that it's going to be good. Is there any commonly taught hot misinformation or poor information that you see being taught to a new photographers who want to photograph their photograph? Pets? I don't know if you heard that. That's that really excited to go outside. Yeah.

Emma O'Brien: 41:29 Oh bless. And I'm just trying to think where he said the one thing that I'll get a lot of the time, the black dogs are really difficult to photograph, so which they are, it's all about the lighting, especially with it, you know, and I think that the thing with that is if you've got your black dog against a light background, it's not gonna work a toll and where the cell phone or what have you. So that's, that's one thing that I think people kind of really struggle with. I think there's this sort of preference for people that fill flashes like a Goto. And I'm not a big fan of fill flash, especially kind of with outdoors stuff. I think if you can learn the really learn kind of how to light stuff properly outside you don't necessarily need it. But it depends on your photography cause I think for some people it kind of suits their style of photography.

Emma O'Brien: 42:26 For mine it's kind of not really my jam. And I think also the biggest myth that I hear a lot of the time from people is that you have to shoot on manual. So I shoot on aperture priority apart from when I'm in the studio. I'm on manual obviously cause I've got, so I've got to really control the settings there. But I shoot on aperture priority the rest of the time. And there's nothing wrong with that. There's nothing wrong with that. And it's quite interesting. I have lots of people I do, I do workshops for nick on here and often people will come and they're really struggling because they've done a bit of an online course somewhere and they're struggling to work with their camera on manual cause it is quite, you know, if you're not familiar with it, it's, there's lots of things to change and you changed, you changed your aperture and then you've got pictures that are too bright. And I think people just get very frustrated with not knowing quite what does what.

Raymond: 43:17 Yeah, exactly. And that compensation between all three, your aperture shutter speed and a, and ISO. Yeah, I find that I find that as well. Well thank you. Thank you for sharing that. Have you ever had a a failure and an apparent failure to yourself that you think actually looking back sets you up better for success?

Emma O'Brien: 43:39 Right. I think the losing half a wedding was a pretty epic.

Raymond: 43:43 Yeah. I think we can all agree there. Yeah. But yeah, you are today. Yeah. So everything turned out okay in the end

Emma O'Brien: 43:50 It did. And I back up repeating, you know, I back up obsessively.

Raymond: 43:55 Can you kind of walk us through that then? I'd love to hear, I love to hear backup strategies, but that's not a question that I hear very often or that I asked me often on the pocket.

Emma O'Brien: 44:04 Okay. So we, where I live we don't have access to fiber currently. We are in Africa, so I can't at the moment use cloud backup cause we just don't have quite the Internet upload capacity. So my backup strategy is that I outflows everything from my a memory cards onto an external hard drive. And then I'll do my editing and when I actually send a lot of my off to somebody to do and I get that back and I finish it off and I will save a copy of the edits on my Mac and I'll save a copy on another external hard drive. So I have three copies and then obviously intimacy, they are back, the mockups are probably on a different hard drive. So it probably makes four copies. So I am fastidious about it and I won't wipe those memory cards until that backup is done. And I know they're all safe and I've checked it a couple of times.

Raymond: 45:01 Sure. Oh Man, I get that and I get that after that first mistake. You don't, you don't want to do something like that again? No. One question I hear a lot from new photographers is when do you delete photos? Do you, are there, do you delete the photos that you don't deliver? Do you delete all the photos after a certain amount of time? How does that work for you?

Emma O'Brien: 45:20 Okay, great question. So I will the files that I've edited, I obviously shooting in role so I can make make a roll set of images in a, in a different folder. And then once, once my editor has done at once, I've been to see the client and once they've ordered everything, I will wipe all the unused photos, all the unused raw files. But I keep the raw files I've edited, I just keep them on that drive. And then I don't, and then obviously I've got jpegs copies that are sitting elsewhere that I keep. I don't, I don't delete. I don't delete anything really aside from the unused raw files strategy.

Raymond: 46:01 Love it. Love it. Well am I don't want to take up much more of your time. You have your shared so much about photographing animals and, and beautiful dogs and even weddings as well. Before I let you go, can you share with the listeners where they can I guess a little bit more about you and where they can find you online?

Emma O'Brien: 46:22 Okay. So you can find me online. I've got a couple of websites and my website is Emma O'Brien dot com, but you'll find my, my family and my doggy photography. I also do business mentoring for other photographers. So you'll find that@mentoringforcreatives.com you can find me on Instagram at Emma O'Brien photo. You can find me on Facebook at MRO Brian Photo. And I've got a mentoring for creatives Facebook page as well. And then I also have another kind of a website that I'm sort of pitching. I'm pitching to galleries at the moment with my work. So this is my more, my more highbrow website, which is dog art.photography. So this, this, this, it's a bit more, the images are a bit bigger on that. So that's the, the Porsche site, shall we say.

Raymond: 47:14 I like to I like to tell people, I feel like so many people feel like they're, I mean, I'm not saying this, this is the case for you, but there's a lot of photographers who think that their ideas won't work or that it's not like big for mainstream. And I always love to bring up the Andy Warhol soup photo. Like who would have thought that that would've been a good idea and it certainly would've been me and yet if I would've told any Warhol and not that he would ever ask for my opinion obviously, but then that idea was a bad idea then than the world would be missing out on a piece of art that is beloved by many. So yeah, I love that you're going out and you're trying lots of new things and again, as somebody who, somebody who talks a lot of photographers who in their own way change the world, you are doing it in a more direct way. And I can't thank you enough for coming on the podcast and sharing everything that you did today with the listener. So again, Emma, thank you so much for coming on and I'm excited to keep up with you in the future and continue to read those, this wonderful capsule.

Emma O'Brien: 48:13 Thank you very much for having me. It's been lovely to be able to, to chat with you and share my work and my ideas with you. Raymond Emma,

Raymond: 48:22 If you aren't listening right now I just gotta say thank you so much for the fun hour that we spent together in just you sharing everything that you did about your inspirational story. And it's just really great to hear how, how you can use a camera too. It's not mutually exclusive to either make money with your camera or you know, do good things for the world with your camera. They're not, it's not either or. You can clearly do both. And a, you are living proof of that. Again, I really appreciate you sharing as much as you did. My biggest takeaway from this interview is simply how quickly inspiration can strike. You know, Emma said that she was a wedding photographer and had no intentions of photographing animals, especially when she first got into photography. But she tried it out when she, after she made a big move and now this is her jam.

Raymond: 49:19 Like she's known as a pet photographer and she just did it from, from doing it once, from trying something new that she didn't know anything about. She gave it a shot, she gave it her all and she found that she loved it. You don't know what you don't know. I never, you know, she never thought that you'd be a pet photographer. She tried it and now this is her thing. This is so awesome. And when you try you, you might find something that just changes your life or the life of others. So that was definitely my biggest takeaway from this episode with Emma O'Brien. Now I want to share, last week I mentioned that I created 52 presets for y'all to download presets in light room and you guys loved them. And it has been so cool to see you use these presets. To edit one of my raw photos that I posted in the beginner photography podcast Facebook group.

Raymond: 50:21 You know, one thing that became very clear to me and it's, it's kind of always been clear, but I guess just visually seeing it in front of me is just how subjective photography is. And there are just so many ways to edit the exact same photo. And what's cool is that none of them are wrong. So I hope that that gives you hope. I hope that that gives you inspiration, that a, there's no right or wrong way to do things. There are best practices of course, but ultimately that it, it's not like you get graded on how you edit a photo because ultimately you, you know, what's the saying? Beauty's in the eye of the beholder. And that is, I cannot stress that enough when it comes to art, when it comes to creating things on your own. And that is just how, how, how things need to be done for you to, to truly have a voice, for you to truly have a style, you need to go out and do things on your own and continue to do things that you like without listening to to others.

Raymond: 51:26 So if you want to download the presets for yourself, if you weren't able to make it last week and you want to check those out, and you can download them right now by heading over to learn l e a r n. Dot beginner photography podcast.com. And you'll see a a, a grouping of several courses that I have, and one of them is the 52 free Lightroom presets. So go ahead and download that yourself. Then there's also an instructional video on how to install them and get started with preset. So that is it for this week. Until next time, I want you to get out. I want you to go shoot. I want you to focus on yourself and stay safe. All right, I love you all.

Outro: 52:08 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 165: Hannah Chia - Learning Photography One Bite At A Time

Hannah Chia is a vegan food blogger from Portland Oregon. She photographs her recipes and then shares the delectable looking images for the world to see. Today I am excited to chat about the impact learning photography has had on her success.

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How Hannah got her start in photography

  • The hardest part about photography for Hannah to learn

  • Why Hannah upgraded from her cell phone to a DSLR to photograph her food

  • What is food styling

  • How to start food styling

  • The importance of dishware

  • How Hannah takes flat lay photos

  • The camera gear Hannah uses to photograph food

  • The importance of lighting food

  • How Hannah was able to keep her look consistent after moving across the country

  • How many photos Hannah takes per recipe

  • How to achieve a photography style

  • Signs of an amateur food stylist and photographer

Resources:

closeup-1429x2000.jpg
IMG_7201-1600x2000.jpg
platedskewers-2-1600x2000.jpg

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00 I hope you're hungry because today on the beginner photography podcast, we talk all about photographing food. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:08 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now, with you as always, husband, father, home brewer, La Dodger Fan, and Indianapolis wedding photographer, Raymond Hatfield. Welcome. Come back

Raymond: 00:37 The podcast. As always, I am Raymond Hatfields and today I haven't interviewed that a is going to get you thinking differently about photographing food from somebody who got into photography simply because she loved to cook. So really fun to interview. I'm excited to get into it. But first I wanted to share with those of you who are not in the beginner photography podcast, Facebook group. This week, I released a set of 52 free Lightroom presets for you to download. So for many, just getting started, editing can be, I know it, it can be intimidating, time consuming, and you know, you never know when you're done. And the truth is Lightroom presets are simply the fastest way to transform your images and bring consistency to your work. So that you can, you know, just make simple adjustments and then get back to shooting. So to get the presets and access to these step by step installed video, all you gotta do is just head over to learn dot beginner photography, podcast.com, forward slash courses.

Raymond: 01:40 And then you will find it right there. You just sign up, download and get editing. Again. That is learn l e a r n. Dot. Beginner photography podcast.com forward slash courses. So before we get into today's interview, I just wanted to give a real quick congratulations to Roseanne. So Roseanne actually left the podcast, a glowing review in iTunes where she shares the story of how for years she was a quote unquote scaredy cat and intimidated by her camera. But you know, all on her own by listening and implementing what she had learned from the podcast and from the guest, she ventured out of her comfort zone and with time is now has full control of her camera and is shooting in manual. So Roseanne, massive congratulations to you. I cannot wait to see some of your photos once you post them in the Facebook group.

Raymond: 02:41 Okay. So let's go ahead and get into today's interview. Oh, and another shout out to a Risa who actually opened up my eyes to today's guest. So thank you. Reset for that. If you are feeling unsure of your photography or that you know you're not a natural, I I know that you're going to have a lot of takeaways from this interview as Hannah is relatively new to photography herself, but she's been using photography to fuel her larger passion. So just take a quick moment to check out the show notes of this interview so that you can see a samples of some of her work. It is truly a lovely and incredible stuff. So with that, let's go ahead and get into this week's interview right now. Henna Chia is a food blogger from Portland, Oregon. She photographs her recipes and then shares those delectable looking images for the world to see on her blog today.

Raymond: 03:34 I'm excited to chat with her about the impact that learning photography has made for her and and her success. So, Hannah, thank you so much for coming on the podcast. I am excited to talk to you today for a few reasons. One, obviously because looking over your blog, you are able to create fantastic images of a, of something that, you know, seemingly everybody has access to right food. And yet here you are making something incredible that that not many people can do. And then second, because I just love talking about food and that's just a fantastic thing to spend the next hour of my life. But before we do get into that can you share with the listeners a little bit about yourself and what it is that you do and how you got into photography?

Hannah Chia: 04:22 Yeah. So currently I'm a full time food blogger and a food photographer. Slash. Stylist. I actually started doing this two years ago when I was in Grad school. So I'm a pianist, classical pianist, and I was in school for piano performance and it's basically one summer. I just decided, you know what, I like photography, I love food and I will, I'm also a begin. And so I had a passion for making Vegan recipes and sharing them. And it was initially just with my friends because they'd be like, oh, so what do you eat as a Vegan? And I'd be like, okay, let me start this Instagram account where I would basically document my meals that then I think I gradually didn't, I wasn't as satisfied just with like at first I just used my iPhone, you know, and just like to close. But then I want to explore more of the, just like styling and more photography. And I had a camera then a digital camera that I didn't really use. I just kind of had it because I was like, oh, I want to get into photography eventually. But this was a great avenue for me to actually start using it and yeah, so I'll start from there. I started posting more. I started my blog, the website, and then it kind of just [inaudible] progressed from there.

Raymond: 05:41 Interesting. So it all started simply because you wanted to prove to your friends that that Vegan food is tasty and looks appetizing.

Hannah Chia: 05:49 Yeah.

Raymond: 05:52 So then you started posting your photos on Instagram and then after, I'm assuming the success that you had had posting these photos on Instagram, you decided to start the blog, is that correct?

Hannah Chia: 06:01 Yes. And I also wanted to space like a more permanent space to place the recipes. So I could direct people like, Oh, where is that recipe for this dish? I just feel like you can just find out my blog.

Raymond: 06:13 Yeah, no, I love it. So so your love for food came before photography and then your love of photography facilitated making more food, is that right? Yes. Okay. Gotcha. Cool. So when you first started out photographing your food, all these amazing dishes, and if anybody's listening right now please check out the show notes. There's, there's a bunch of, of photos of Hannah's of her recipes that she makes. And if you've ever you know, wanting to get into vegan cooking, I promise you this is the place to do it. In fact, she has a recipe for spicy, is it Korean? A cauliflower wings that I purchased all the ingredients for it. And I'm super excited to try out this weekend because it looked so fantastic. So fantastic.

Hannah Chia: 07:00 Cauliflowers and magical ingredients.

Raymond: 07:02 It is, right. I know. We got, we gotta we gotta use more cauliflower in our lives. So when you first started making these recipes and then you, you just photograph them with your phone, what was the, what was the hardest part about the photos that you were getting and what kind of made you feel like you had to step it up to the digital camera, the DSLR, whatever was the next progression.

Hannah Chia: 07:27 [Inaudible]. Yeah, I think honestly my phone took pretty good photos and I was, I think it did really well with I guess more like flat lays. So if I wanted to take an overhead shot of a few dishes there were pretty sharp images, but I think I just want to play rounds mostly with light room and with editing. And I felt like, oh, I wanted to do certain things to make the colors pop out more. I wanted, I'm particularly drawn to more like rustic looking images. So I wanted to experiment more with like darker photos and using more shadows, more contrast. And I felt just like editing on my phone didn't really quite get me that. And so that was when, and also wanted to take more photos that were like from the side. And so you can have like that blurry backgrounds. I just, I was really drawn to those types of inches. And so that's when I kind of started just moving away from the phone and using my DSR.

Raymond: 08:24 So you said earlier that you just had a digital camera, was that already a, a DSLR? And is that what you started shooting with?

Hannah Chia: 08:31 Yes, it was a DSLR. I got it off of another student. We had like those students selling stuff, pay Facebook page and so it's a pretty old model. I'm actually, it's still the one that I'm using now and I just, it was like the body with just the camera body. And so I started researching, oh, what kind of lens should I use for food photography? And so I decided to get like a Prime Lens, which is pretty cheap too. Yeah, so that was the camera body we used. And then I got a prime lens specifically for food photography.

Raymond: 09:07 And you said that you're still using that camera buddy? Yes, I still could you tell me what camera it is?

Hannah Chia: 09:12 Yeah, it's an icon. D 90.

Raymond: 09:14 Okay. Yeah. So that is, that is an older body, but that's, that's fantastic. Now this is what I love to hear. So many people think that obviously, you know, gear is what makes the photos and here is proof that this, I believe it's like a seven or six or seven year old cam and the d 90 is, and yet that you're able to create these, these fantastic images. And as you said you know, it's all in the glass and playing with with light and stuff. That's awesome. So when you first started using the DSLR rather than your phone did you already have an idea of how to work a camera or or did you have to learn photography from the ground up?

Hannah Chia: 09:54 I had previously been using a DSLR to just take pictures of people like my family and my friends, but I primarily just use the, I just one of the auto settings or the ave mode, I think it was, yeah. But then I was like, oh, I really want to learn how to use the manual mode. And so I really had no idea at that point how to manipulate like the shutter speed and opportunity and all that. So I think what it did was just a lot of googling and looking in the manual. And just seeing also, I was doing a lot of research on people who also did through blogging and some of them have like their aperture settings on there and like what shutter speed they use. And then I was like, okay, this is what ISO means. So it's just doing a lot of research primarily myself.

Raymond: 10:43 So did you ever see one of these other photographers settings and then try to use it in your own work and realize, oh, this, this doesn't work at all or something, something's not right here.

Hannah Chia: 10:52 Yeah, you can't because the light conditions vary so much.

Raymond: 10:57 Absolutely. So then what, so what was, what was the struggle, right. So once you learned what aperture, shutter speed and ISO were, even though you were using settings from other photographers, where was that struggle? And I guess how did you, how did you overcome that?

Hannah Chia: 11:13 It was just a lot of trial and error. I think endo helps that I had a very consistent lighting setup, so I just picked a spot. It was in my old department in Houston, but it was just a really nice window. And it was kind of like a diffused light because there's a tree outside the window going to blocking direct sunlight. And so had I had really good lighting and I think that for me was the key. And that's when my photography started getting a lot better was just figuring out, okay, this is the learning that I have. And think honestly for food photography or any photography in general, lighting is just critical. And then it was after that I set up the lighting or I set up the, I guess camera where it was and then figuring out what were the best settings. And so I started using manual mode and I think I just bumped down the aperture. Really, I'm a lot lower so I could get more of like that depth of fuels in the backgrounds. Yeah. So it was a lot of trial and error essentially.

Raymond: 12:18 Yeah, no, I would, I would imagine especially with that, that's great that as you said, you know, you kind of have this one consistent which was this window and a, the quality of light that was coming inside, which I'm sure would make it a a whole lot easier to or, or would give you the ability to quickly learn those settings rather than having to change the light and then figure out what to do every single time. Cause that would, that would just be a mess for sure. So when you first got that DSLR, when you first started taking pictures and then you would bring them into light room, where you getting what it was that you wanted out of these photos or what were you hoping to get out of using it, using your DSLR?

Hannah Chia: 13:01 Probably just image quality. And one critical thing for me was switching to Ra are shooting in raw and because I liked to play a lot with white balance. So you can, when you shoot in raw you can, like a lot of information is carried over. And especially I like to shoot really low lower exposure pictures. So just darker photos. And I feel like when I, once I started shooting in raw and transferring it over to light room, then I was like, oh, okay, I can do so much more with these images because I'm not losing all this information from just shooting like jpeg. [inaudible]

Raymond: 13:41 Right. Yeah. Light Room is, is one of those things that once you figure it out it's like this whole, this whole other world of photography just completely opens up with the, with the ideas and the, and the possibilities. That's cool. So I think I could be wrong cause I'm not a a food photographer, but taking a photo of food is one thing, but kind of the next progression is styling those images, which is a completely other thing in and of itself. So for those who don't know, can you explain what food styling is and maybe share your first experiences styling your own food?

Hannah Chia: 14:21 Yeah, so food styling is the process of taking the food and I guess manipulating it a ways so that it looks more appealing on camera. Because I think any food really like, oh look good to you, but sometimes it just doesn't translate well into photos and so has a lot to do with using props. I'm doing a lot of layering with like using Napkins and putting the plate, like putting the plate here instead of there or adding silverware or adding like small dishes with on the side kind of also in the frame. [inaudible] And yeah, so a lot of that too was trial and error kind of figuring out what looked the best. Along the way I think I started just developing my own sense of I guess personal aesthetic, like what I liked, I'm in my photos and then just carrying that on over to, I feel like most of my photos have like a similar kind as this aesthetic. And I also use the same prompts for a lot of the images too.

Raymond: 15:23 Yeah, yeah. Yeah. So w w w what got you into the food styling? Was it simply kind of being in that world of food photography and seeing that this is not naturally how I would set up my table? Maybe I should add these things or was it, were you taking photos and thinking there's something missing here and then, and then going deeper?

Hannah Chia: 15:41 I think it's a combination of both. And also just seeing a lot of other photographers work. I noticed one particular, I guess style is having like that kind of messy look. And I'm like, when I'm eating, I want my table to be clean, you know, it's just the plate there, my fork. But in order to make food look more appealing, a lot of times you will like scatter a little bit of, let's say if it's like Chia seed or whatever on the side. And to have that really like messy hony kind of lived in look and a lot of inspiration I took just from looking at other people's photos and seeing what they did, seeing the props that they used and the little details that they were focusing on. So I think a flew styling a lot of times just comes down to details.

Raymond: 16:28 Isn't that weird how a Messier House looks, makes food look better? I know exactly what you're talking about. Like my wife likes to just go off and like create, she'll get a, like these ideas of like, you know what, I'm gonna Start Baking bread. And I'm like, okay, yeah, let's do this or whatever. So then she'll look at recipes on Pinterest or wherever it is. And all of these photos are like this flower everywhere and there's jars for, and I'm thinking like, like whose kitchen, you know, naturally looks like this. It should definitely be cleaner. But that's hilarious. That's, that's one of those things that I think if I was taking a photo of food, I would try to make it look as clean as humanly possible rather than trying to add these these elements everywhere. So aside from just kind of trial and error was there, was there anything else that you did to, to go out in and learn food styling? Cause I would imagine that food styling for say Asian cuisine is going to be different than like what we just said with like, like baked goods and stuff.

Hannah Chia: 17:27 Hmm. Yeah, that's true. I think for a lot of Asian cuisine, the dishes that are used are a little bit different. And so a lot of porcelain particularly for Chinese cuisine. And I think I just noticed that in a lot of the photos that I was drawing inspiration from and thinking back to, oh, I remember this dish that's like, my parents use had this like old bowl. It's like a blue and white kind of porcelain bowl that they just use everyday for like rice or things like that. And so I was like, okay, I want to kind of find that type of ball or even little things like finding, using like gold silverware. And mine was just from like target. It was pretty cheap. I think once I started using gold, silver, I was like, oh, I thought it was look a lot better.

Hannah Chia: 18:19 Yeah. So I think a lot of the times when I set up a photo too, I would have different dishes or different bowls and different plates then use and then I would swap them out. And so it'd be the same exact food. And a lot of times I'll switch out the background too in the middle of the shoe if I was like, okay, I don't really like how this like clashes with if it's like a cooler toned background and matched better with like a warmer tone color or warmer tone food. Sometimes I'd have like a warmer tone, like a wooden background and then the food itself would be like orange. And then I'm looking at it and be like, okay, that doesn't look as great as it could. And so I'd like Swish it out even in the middle of the same recipe shoots. And then later on just like seeing it in my computer to be like, okay, I can see what works and what really didn't. And so I think it was just being open to experimenting a lot. Yeah. It's cause because sometimes you might have this crazy idea to like, do this and then in my like totally fail, but sometimes it just like works out really well.

Raymond: 19:25 I love that. So then side question, how many sets of dishware do you own? Because looking at your photos, I mean, well I, I, you know, you wouldn't be able to tell by looking at your website. It's, and that's another thing that I wanted to bring up is, is I, I don't know if you did any sort of research on on color theory or figuring it out, like what colors compliment others, but you just pretty much talked upon that, that, that subject right there, that having orange food doesn't look good on a, with a wooden background and then trying out those different things. Is that simply just experience or, or did you, did you look for complimenting colors and and try to bring that into your photography?

Hannah Chia: 20:14 Yeah, that's some, the concept I, I was like intentionally thinking about and because I feel like in the past I've always been like more, I guess artistic when it came to like my hobbies and what I want to do. And so I did a lot of like painting and in that and painting you were like, the teacher will tell you about like color theory. And so I always kind of had that in the back of my head. And then thinking of, okay, when it comes to food, the same concepts apply to this because it's all just, it's still like a visual portrait instead of like drawing something you're trying to accurately or you're trying to capture it as you see it in your eyes with your eyes. Or even just enhancing colors to make it look even better.

Raymond: 20:59 Yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah. What are some, what if somebody is just getting started and you know, they're at home, they're making a recipe themselves. Are there some simple props that you would recommend that are just, you know, good for, for most beginners to get started when styling their food?

Hannah Chia: 21:15 Yeah. one thing is just having some like tablecloths or napkins or not, not tablecloths, but like smaller like linen napkins. I think even just if you have one dish and nothing else, if you put like a Napkin kind of like swirled on the side or folded underneath the plate, just that one thing itself can add a lot of visual interest.

Hannah Chia: 21:41 Another tip that I have would just be to think of like layering. And so you have like the plan, you have the backgrounds and then you have your dish. But if you try to think of like, okay, what can you do to create more layers in terms of like the height, so you can put like two plates together or have

Hannah Chia: 22:03 Let's say like you have different bowls. That's another tip I would have is just like using smaller bowls and putting ingredients in the bowls and putting them kind of off in the side or in the corner so that you can see them when you're looking at them, but you don't want it to be too busy. So there's always a balance. I think one, there was a period where my photos started getting really busy because I was just like, okay, how many things can crown to this one photo? But then it would take attention away from the actual dish. And so I think it's just playing around with that balance. It's pretty important, but just having like maybe two or three other elements in the photo apart from just

Raymond: 22:46 The plaintiff of food. So a little bit of height and a linen, a Napkin or tablecloth just to get started. And Gold Silverware.

Hannah Chia: 22:56 Okay. That is not necessarily a good start. Yeah, it's

Raymond: 23:00 Definitely going to be something that stands out. I think not everybody has golden silverware, but if I saw a picture of gold silverware, I would look at it for sure and take notice. Yeah. so let's talk about that flat lay shot that you were talking about earlier with the with the phone phone makes it easy to do that flatly shot. Now that you've got the DSLR does the d 90 have an articulating screen or is it, it's flat on the camera. Okay. So when it comes to that, I'm sure that you have some sort of, you know, tripod, you know, with a camera pointing down. Risa in the beginner photography podcast, a community who asked me to reach out to you and said, check out her work. She's fantastic. Follows you on Instagram, your work and she wants to know what your setup is, right? Do you use a remote to take the photos and how do you make sure that your photos are in focus?

Hannah Chia: 23:55 Yeah, good question. So until about like three months ago, I actually did not use a tripod and all of my overhead shots are taken pretty much just with me almost standing on the table. I gotta have a stool next to it. And so I would literally just be like bending over the food with my camera to take these photos. And I really liked the freedom of like having different angles. I can be like, okay, I want to take it from this angle and then take it from overhead shot. And so I liked moving around a lot, but it translated to sometimes the photos will not be as sharp as I would've liked. And I didn't really notice this on the camera, but then when I uploaded it into my room, I'd be like, oh, okay. That wasn't as crisp as or as sharp as I wanted it to be.

Hannah Chia: 24:45 And it was a lot of just because of like the motion, I was literally quoting my camera over these shots. And so I got to try it. But that was actually pretty recent and it's made a big difference I think in just being able also to have it there. And I would set on a timer so it'd be, I think it was like 10 seconds timer. And the tripod I had was, I got like a Manfrotto tripod so it was pretty sturdy one and it came with like a overhead arm. So that's primarily what I use now. So I touch it to the end. And the table that I have, the arm just extends over the table. And so I feel like that's been [inaudible] it's been helpful to have a tripod, but I don't think it was like exactly essential because for the first, like two years of what I did for most of the photos I have on my website, they were taking just kind of like just standing over food.

Raymond: 25:46 So now, now that you're knocked, I'm able to view the screen or I guess how do you, how do you still compose the photos? Are you still using the stool and then if so a, is that how you focus your image before taking?

Hannah Chia: 25:58 Yes, I still use that, although I'm thinking of doing some like tethering. But that's still just like, I'm still like researching that, but I think it would be a lot easier if I could like connect it.

Raymond: 26:10 That's some next level stuff right there. Yeah. so your, your website, it says on it that though, when you first got started with your blog, you would take those dishes to your window that we were talking about earlier just to get the best life that you could. Are you still primarily using window light or do you have some new tricks now that you're using to to, to light your photos?

Hannah Chia: 26:36 Well I'm still using natural lighting, but I moved actually about, I moved in May, I wasn't originally in Houston and I moved to Portland and after that move I realized how lucky I was with my previous window set up just because I did not have to think about the light at all. It was just perfect. Most of the time it was really great direct but diffused lighting. And I think I was just lucky with that where the window was. But then when I moved here there was also great natural lighting. But then I kind of had to figure out how to manipulate the light to look kind of the same way as my previous setup had been. And what I discovered, and I think this applies to especially the food photography, is that you don't want light coming from several sources. So the common thing that people will think is like, oh, okay, I just want to take this photo in summer.

Hannah Chia: 27:30 That's really well lit, like with really good lighting. But the problem with that is sometimes if you have several windows and light is kind of coming from the side and coming from the front, the photo itself ends up, ends up, ends up not looking back. Great. And I think it's because of there are too many sources of writing. And so what I had to do actually was get a few blackout curtains. And so my living room or the dining room, it's like connected to one room has really great natural bites, but there were just too many windows. And so I had to take a few blackout curtains. I also got this thing on Amazon where you essentially just put like velcro strips around the windows. So you essentially block out the light from all the windows except for one. And I think once they did that, then the images really pop because of that direct light from one source. And then I also got a diffuser because I felt the light was a little bit too bright. And sometimes when it was sunny outside, which you wouldn't think would happen here in Oregon, especially in the summer when it was just too bright. Having a diffuser really helped [inaudible] as well. And so I had to do a lot more with manipulating the light too. Look the way I wanted to really make the images pop. Versus before I think I was just lucky.

Raymond: 28:50 Yeah. Sorry I didn't, how did you kind of figure all this stuff out? How did you like walk into this room? W was it that you started taking photos and you just thought this isn't what I wanted at all? And then you, so, okay. So then from there you knew that you had to block out some, some light sources. Where do you, where did you get that idea? Is that just something that you had picked up over time or, or, or did you go to the Internet to try to find answers?

Hannah Chia: 29:19 I think I kinda just picked it up because I was shooting the same way that I did back in my old place. But the photos just are not coming out well. And I was like, oh no, my food blog is ruined if I don't have good lighting. Like what do I got? Moved back, you know? But then I started looking at my photos mean like, what is it about this sliding that is so magical? And then I just discovered, okay, it's because the room apart from that light, from that one window was dark. And so you had all these great shadows. And then once I figured that out, I was like, how do I imitate this in my new place? And so a lot of that was just blocking out all the, which is funny to say. You would think that like having a really bright room, it would be great for her photography. I've actually blocking out a lot of the light save for just one source. Really.

Raymond: 30:15 Maybe the difference. Yeah. You know, it's funny, I've heard that from a lot of other photographers who shoot at home. Like even portrait photographers Boudway or photographers, family photographers, they're like, you know, we got this a, a this wall of windows. But the majority of the time I block out like 80% of it just to get this nice sliver or this this, this beautiful quality of light. And that's very cool to to hear it from somebody who photographs a food as well. I also loved how you obviously sharing did you, did, you kind of figured it out, you reverse engineered it, right? And you went back and you looked at your old photos and you thought to yourself, what is it that works here? And now I have to make it work here. And that is something that I don't think enough photographers do is go back and look at their old photos and try to figure out either what works or what doesn't work and then try to to improve.

Raymond: 31:00 So that's, that's awesome. That is, that's so great to hear. When, when I was looking at some of your recipes I noticed that you have, I think like the, the, the typical shot pretty much like the, the cover photo or whatever. Like on the home page where it shows all the recipes. It's pretty much that math flatly shot. Right. But then when you click on a recipe, there are like a dozen photos. There's a bunch of photos, different angles, you know, getting your hands dirty and getting in there. So for any given dish that how many photos are being are being taken?

Hannah Chia: 31:38 Probably like 150

Raymond: 31:40 150. Wow. Okay. So then in that time, is it, is it you taking the photos, is it somebody else coming in and helping you take the photos? Cause some of them, like you got your hands in there. Like you're, you're really, you really getting it. So who, who or how are you taking these photos?

Hannah Chia: 31:57 That's all thanks to the tripod. It's a one man show here. I don't have any assistance unfortunately, which is really funny because when I go home to visit my family like once or twice a year, I have my sisters there and they're the best photo assistants and they do like hand modeling for me. But I on my home most of the time when I'm shooting, so having to tripod was really nice just to be able to have my hands in the photo or sometimes in my older photos I've had one hand in the photo but then you know, the other hand is like holding the camera in for care.

Raymond: 32:32 That's like a, that's like a movie trick right there. Like how do we get this thing to look and that's hilarious.

Hannah Chia: 32:37 Like creating your neck.

Raymond: 32:43 So how do you, how do you do that now? Like if you have to get your hands dirty, do you just assume that you're going to have to get your camera dirty as well? And then, I don't know, how many times do you have to stick your hands in, you know, some dough or whatever the that you're mixing up to to, to get the right photo?

Hannah Chia: 33:01 Yeah, so I do keep like a like paper towels and like a hand, like a washcloth nearby. So I can like wipe off my hands before touching the camera. But a lot of the times I just think about this particular recipe. And what would be the most useful. And so I feel like if I shot every single step of the recipe, that would just be too much. And a lot of the times like readers don't really need to know how to like cut a carrot, you know, but then showing the parts of that recipe, that would probably be the most helpful to have an extra visual of. Yeah, and a lot of the times, even some of the shots I just took my kitchen like on by the stove, which is not where the finished photos are taken. So the lighting is a little different there.

Hannah Chia: 33:49 But a lot of times instead of just taking photos of like every single step of like adding this to the pan and then you add this to the pan and then you have this two pan, I would just be like, okay, take the first one and then maybe take like one at the end. So just picking out just the crucial moments and it really depends on that particular recipe. Some recipes are really straight forward and I found that I don't really need to take that many process shots, but if it's something like dumplings are working with doe then I would have more photos of like working the dough actually with my hands. And so I'd carry the setup back to the window that I have or take the final photo. And so I like kind of do a lot of like carrying things back and forth. But yeah, so a lot of times it's just deciding what's important for that recipe and really just trying to get those shots I think.

Raymond: 34:41 And then is that something that you do before you start the recipe, you, you go through look and then decide what is it going to be most important to capture or do you have to make a recipe first and then while you're doing it, make those mental notes of what needs to be photographed?

Hannah Chia: 34:55 Yeah, so I w I test my recipes before I shoot them. So usually I haven't made the recipe once before in the, at least once before doing it again for the photos. And so I'll be making notes while I'm making it the first time to be like, okay, this part is a little bit confusing. And so even if I write like a really detailed instruction, it would help to have actual visual.

Raymond: 35:18 Yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah. I bet. I bet. So how w w I guess I'm trying to figure out here you know, you're making, you're making all this food. Has there ever been something that you made that you thought this is going to be fantastic and then you go to, to set it all up again, do it, and for some reason it doesn't look great or it just doesn't photograph well. And if so, what do you do at that point?

Hannah Chia: 35:43 Oh, I have had so hot, I have a lot of folders of photos actually in my computer. The, I have just never used and I just decided to reshoot it like another day usually because that day I was just tired. Or still a lot of the times the problem with, or the beauty of natural lighting is that, I don't know, I just, I haven't really tried artificial lighting. I might in the future, it might be something I'll experiment with. But the thing with natural lighting is that a lot of times it changes depending on the day. The weather outside. I really liked cloudy weather, particularly because of the diffuse soft light you get. But sometimes it's sunny outside. And so if I'm planning to shoot something that day, but the lighting, it's not looking, is not working out, I'll just like postpone it to another day. So now I know too that I can just move that instead of being like, no, I'm going to shoot this today and like work with the lighting. And I've usually ended up with photos I would just was not as happy with. So I have had a lot of like discarded shoots, but I think just through that process kind of learning what I really, what really tastes like, have good photos and kind of streamlining the process just from trial and error and just from doing it over and over again.

Raymond: 37:06 Yeah. That's interesting. I'm trying to figure out how you can use those photos. Kind of a like to your advantage, you know, because you know, it's true. Wherever you go, it doesn't mean that it's necessarily going to be great line or that the quality of life does change. But I don't know. I'll have to think about that and get back to you. But yeah,

Hannah Chia: 37:26 And then with styling and yeah, I've actually shared two photos on my Instagram stories a while back. It was about, it was not for the same recipe. It was like this, I don't remember if it's like a tomato or a carrot soup, some kind of soup. But the first time I shot it I had used like these shallow wooden bowls. And so it was like one set up and had like a different like styling going on for that. And I shot it and I thought it was like pretty great. But then I looked at it like again, like a few days later I was like, you know what, I think I can do better. And so I actually use the same soup cause I just had my fridge just like reheated it. And I did a totally different setup. I use like a different background. I use different bowls. And I think that it just really worked a lot better for that particular recipe. But I had photos from both of them. And so I ended up posting that second one to my Instagram. But then my stories, I was like, here's actually the first photos that I took of this recipe. And so I kind of used it as like, oh, this is what would be helpful for people who are into photography. You just seeing the difference in styling and really like what a difference it could make.

Raymond: 38:34 Yeah, that's, that's a great idea. Yeah. I would've loved to have a, a scene that if I was, you know, following along, I think w w we get this idea that you know, everybody on Instagram is just perfect and we're the only people in the world with, you know, internal problems or whatever. But being able to see somebody else post either how a photo didn't work and what changed to, to make it work is, is, is a really great idea. But one thing that you said in there kind of brought up another question for me, which is when you're, I mean, you're making food, right? You're making food, food is meant to be you know, consumed and shared after you're done photographing a recipe. Well, I guess first of all, quick question, how long does it take? Let's say you're, you're making a tomato soup or carrot soup from, from start to finish. How long does the whole process take, would you say,

Hannah Chia: 39:28 Including the photos and the editing or just

Raymond: 39:31 No, just, just the, just the day of shooting.

Hannah Chia: 39:34 Okay. Yeah, so the cooking takes actually the shortest amount of time. I'm usually done in like 30 minutes to an hour. But then a lot of the time is spent cleaning up because after a shoe, my kitchen will be a mess. So a lot of the times when cleaning up washing dishes, I like to say the most probably what food bloggers are doing most of the time is washing dishes, which is not very glamorous, but it's kind of true. And then yeah, so making the food and then shooting it, the actual photography probably takes, depends on the recipe, but usually like an hour I'd say.

Raymond: 40:16 Oh Wow. Okay.

Hannah Chia: 40:17 Yeah. And then that would also include cleaning up though.

Raymond: 40:22 That is a whole lot shorter than what I was expecting. But I'm sure that over the years you have a kind of figured out how to cook and shoot and clean as you go. If a, if I were to do something like that, it would be like a four and a half hour it would take all day. And then at the end of that I would think, I don't even want the soup anymore. I'm just so stressed out.

Hannah Chia: 40:41 Oh, sometimes it does take longer though. It really does.

Raymond: 40:45 What's, what's like a really long strenuous recipe that that, that you've made?

Hannah Chia: 40:53 Probably like the past one that I posted on the soup dumplings because that also the cooking process itself, like I had to refrigerate something to let us set for a few hours and then for the dough itself had arise. And then I think one thing that really, so now sometimes I'll take the whole afternoon would be like spent on one recipe. And I think the reason for that is because I started doing or taking videos for my Instagram stories on the process. And so for every step I would be like, just like taking a little video. Anything that just like prolongs the cooking process, you don't realize it like a dish. I take like 20 minutes to makes on this takes an hour to seize. You're like documenting every single step. And then so for that particular recipe, also wanted several different shots. I didn't just want the finished product, I wanted one with like the little buttons are like the little dumplings like before I fried them. And so I like set that one up. So that one took a good like five, six hours.

Raymond: 41:55 Oh my goodness. Yeah. Okay. So when when you're doing these shoots, right, you say it's the end of the six hours and you're like, oh my gosh, I'm just toast right now. Right. Are, are like, is that, what is the first thing that you, do you dig into the food that you just made or do you wait until you look at the photos and determine whether or not you do want to reshoot it before you?

Hannah Chia: 42:20 Usually by that point I just eat the food. I'm always hungry. One time, one time it has happened where I was like in the middle of eating this plate of food I made, I was like scrolling through the pictures. I was like, oh wait, I can probably like reshoot this to make it look better. That was like, you know what? It doesn't matter. I shot those photos. That's what it is. I'm going to eat.

Raymond: 42:44 That's right. You got into this because you love food. Not because you love the photography. The photography facilitated the food. So I would've made the exact, the exact same decision. That is hilarious. Has that ever came back to bite you in the butt? Have you ever taken taking a bite and been like, oh no, wait, I didn't photograph this yet.

Hannah Chia: 43:00 Then I'll just take a picture of like the food or the bite in it.

Raymond: 43:04 That's even better. Of course. Yeah, makes it look way more appetizing. So I can't think of, I looked through a lot of your recipes and I can't think of any that have the the bite in it. But obviously you're looking over a lot of your photographs. You have this consistent look and whether it be from the lighting of this you know, single, large soft source or a, the way that you style your food. I think that there's no denying that you do have a style to you in your photographs. Is that something that you feel like you always had or is that something that you struggled to find and if so, how did you find it?

Hannah Chia: 43:43 I think I kind of developed it just over the PR. Like if you actually just on May Instagram, if you scroll down to the very bottom, I started out taking really just like, I felt like there were like more typical images on Instagram where it was like a very bright backgrounds, like white backgrounds. Because I was like, okay, this is like, what does well on Instagram, so I'm just going to do that. But then I realized I didn't really necessarily like the brighter images. So that's when I started thinking, okay, this is what I like. I like darker, like more rustic, more shadows. But then a lot of the times the images would look not very consistent. I don't think it was because like I was just playing around with editing during that period of time so we can kind of see like the progression of these photos. But then once I really established even when it came to the light room, I made my own preset. I would like apply to the photos and then like tweak them depending on the individual photo. I think that's when I started really getting more of a consistent look.

Raymond: 44:47 When you started applying all the same colors and tone cards

Hannah Chia: 44:52 [Inaudible] or just doing the same edits basically, like, this is what, like every photo I start off just like doing these few things to it. And so I think that's, and then I, I think I feel like my style is still kind of changing though and I feel like that for me, that's kind of a way I still want to improve. Like I'm definitely not happy with how I am now. I'm always like looking for new ways to make my photos even better. And like getting the tripod was part of it and now I'm thinking just like how could I constantly be improving and making my photos even better.

Raymond: 45:27 So when you say that you're not happy with your photos now, do you mean that you're not happy with your photos now or that, that you're still developing your style?

Hannah Chia: 45:36 The problem with the ladder, I introduced that I'm satisfied. I was like, okay, this looks good. But in the back of my head, there's always that like self-critic you know, being like, okay, what can they do to make it look even better? And sometimes you really can't, like that's just how it's gonna look, you know? But it's just thinking more experimenting with some, one thing I'm thinking of now is just doing even more wider shots and doing photos that are more just like, instead of just focusing on one dish, maybe have really several dishes in it. But then for that I would probably have to consider getting a lens that would like I guess, right. I'll use a 35 millimeter. I'm thinking if I get like a zoom lens or one that can like zoom out even further, that would, that'd be nice to have.

Raymond: 46:26 How much work do you think that's going to add onto your plate? No Pun intended.

Hannah Chia: 46:32 Oh, I don't know. I feel like it'd be fun.

Raymond: 46:35 Huh. I don't know man. I mean doing it all on your own. That's gotta be a ton of work for sure. So that's a, that's gonna be an interesting endeavor. And I'm excited to see how that works for you. But yeah, I think you know, just using or you know what as, as I think possibly w w I picked up this trick from like shooting weddings and stuff. You know, there's always the one reception shot of like the entire reception. Nobody in it you know, but all the, the glasses and silverware and the tables and the venue was like set up nice. And I always thought like, oh, this has to be like a super wide image. I'm going to put on the like the 24 millimeter and like just get the nice big shot. It's going to be very encompassing and, and, and very cool.

Raymond: 47:17 But what I found is when I did that it's very easy to lose focus in your photo, right? Because cause with something being so wide, you have to get really close to it to be, to the hero of the shot. And I found that actually using a tighter lens. So my favorite lens is the 35 Mil, but once I started using something tighter, like a 50 you can focus on on one singular element, but still, you know, just change the composition and get lower or or you know, change the angle of the shot to add a little bit more context to the photo and that that really helped. So one thing I would recommend is maybe renting a lens before you buy because prime lenses as you know, are not the cheapest things in the world. So that's great. Again, I'm excited to to, to, to see where that goes

Hannah Chia: 48:06 And even beyond photography, just like doing more with videos I think is something I'm thinking of in [inaudible]

Raymond: 48:11 With the DSLR more so than than Instagram. [inaudible]

Hannah Chia: 48:15 Yeah. Or maybe, I dunno, I'm working more with like youtube or just learning how to do videos and then that's going to be a whole nother learning curve. Like how to edit videos and I feel like that's just going to add a lot of work.

Raymond: 48:28 You're definitely gonna need some consistent lighting if you're gonna, if you're going to start doing videos, that is for sure. Yeah. I had another question about your your style and I completely lost it going off on my own self absorbed a, a story there about the, about the title Lens. If I remember, I'm sure that I'll come back to it. I bet you look at a lot. Oh No. Yeah, that's right. That was the question. When it comes to figuring out your style, you said that you know, it took awhile of adjusting a lot of photos and then figuring it out. I like the settings. I'm going to turn this into a preset. How long do you think that took from when you first started with light room until kind of if you can put a label on your style today, how long do you think that progression took?

Hannah Chia: 49:13 Took a few months, let's say like, like four or five months. Actually. Just have making little edits and yeah, I feel like also for light room, a lot of people will ask me specifically like sending questions. Like, how do you edit? And I have done one like stories series in the past where I kind of like show people exactly what I was doing, but I feel like now I'm, I have less of a tendency to want to do that because I feel like with editing you don't really just want to like copy what someone else is doing. And knowing how to like do the basic edits is important. But then anything just like tweaking that it really depends on like your own personal preferences and your own aesthetic. And a lot of the Times I've noticed that photos that do well on like social media or like brighter just because it's like the more easy to be shared if it looks like that.

Hannah Chia: 50:07 But then if you have like moody or photos, those look better on like, like a blog or a website. So I think it was just really focusing on like what you want your style to be like or just seeing like what you want your, whether you're doing like food blogging or whatever it is. I don't know what the listeners are thinking of doing, but just really honing in like what exactly you want two people to be drawn to in your photography. And just kind of like just working it out. I think a lot of the learning just comes from like figuring out. And really I think if I had tried to like copy what other people, like what photographers I admire were doing that would not turn out, would not look the same. And I think I wouldn't have like learned the same things that I did just trying to figure out on my own.

Raymond: 50:55 So just being self aware and asking yourself those questions, what is it that I want and what do I want to focus on? Yes. Yeah. I think a, just you sharing that little tidbit about maybe not wanting to share more about editing is a, is kind of, you know, told me everything that I need to know because it's like you, I mean as, as a blogger you could and even as a podcast host, you could share every little detail about not only the, the main subject, which is the food, but every little detail about it, how photos are shot, how photos are edited, how you style a plate and stuff. But at the end of the day, if that's not what gets you excited, but what you think that your audience is going to get excited about, you're going to lose the passion for that real quick. And I like how it sounds as if you've already picked up on that and you're like, you know what, I'm going to stay away from this. I'm going to focus more on this and potentially bring in videos. That's very cool. Very cool. So now back to that question that I got to before my request of this one. As somebody who got started food styling by looking at other of food stylists and food bloggers, I'm sure that you still see a lot of images of food in your Instagram feed. What are some signs of an amateur food stylist photographer that that you see that the listeners should totally avoid?

Hannah Chia: 52:18 I think a lot of clashing colors especially if there's just like, I feel like too much going on or, so the two that I see is like, either there's like not enough going on or it's just like very, very simple. Just like one bowl and that's it. Or too much going on where they're like, there's like a red napkin here and then like the food itself is orange and they have like a green thing here and a blue thing here. In terms of food styling, those were the two that I would like try to avoid. And a lot of the times also just lighting just seeing certain photos, like if they're underexposed or they're too dark or some that are like washed out or even some that I can tell are taken in a setting where there's like a lot of different sources of light. So now that I can like I kind of like know what it takes to like set up lighting. I can like kind of figure that hour pinpointed it just by like looking at a photo and being like, okay, I can see like what they did there or what didn't work or what worked.

Raymond: 53:21 Oh absolutely. Absolutely. It's, it's one of those things, once again, you have to on a kind of yourself and how you shoot to see how others shoot. And all of this just comes with practice. Obviously you can't, and I've said this before, you could watch every youtube video read every blog about photography and if you don't actually pick up that camera, you're not going to learn anything at the end of the day. And I love how, you know, you kind of started off by saying I've only been doing this for two years, but you put in two years where the practice, like this is what you do a lot of. And in those to, you know, quote unquote short years, I think that you've got a lot more practice behind the camera than a lot of other you know, photographers could maybe shoot families or especially weddings cause you don't get that opportunity to go out on your own and do these things like like you have. So that's, that's fantastic. That's fantastic.

Hannah Chia: 54:11 And one thing I wanted to add just I would just like to picking up the camera and doing it is I feel like people have this tendency, especially like I realized I wanted everything to be perfect before I started. Like I wanted to have like a really nice camera, a really Nice Lens, like do all the research, figure it all out. But I was just afraid of like my first, my photo is just like not looking good. I think getting over that fear and actually just starting is something that's really important, especially for anybody. But I think especially for photographers who sometimes like your photos will suck and a lot of the times it's like after you take those photos, like learning from that experience, because I think I just encouraged you who just if you want, if you're interested, even in starting something with photography or food photography, whatever it is, just like picking up the camera and like actually doing it instead of like being afraid that like, oh, it's not perfect. It's like I need to know all these things before I start. Just like kind of diving in and learning from the process.

Raymond: 55:09 So my last question is always what piece of advice would you have for a new photographer? Just getting started, but without me even asking you totally nailed that question and I can't imagine a better way to, to end our time together than that right there. Oh, so Hannah, before I let you go, can you please share with the listeners where they can find and keep up with you online?

Hannah Chia: 55:35 Yeah. So my blog slash website is Hanna chia.com and on Instagram, I'm Hannah two underscores Chia and she has not actually my last name. It's cheap, but it was kind of like a pun.

Raymond: 55:48 Oh, I love it. I love it.

Hannah Chia: 55:51 Yeah. So those are the two

Raymond: 55:53 Well basis I've always envied people who have that ability to like take their last name and just like change it into something slightly different. And then now it was like, you know, something totally different or whatever. And I've always, I've spent way more time than I probably should, figuring out how I could alter my last name into something different. My last name being Hatfield, so it's like hats, fields. These two things aren't, like, they're not related at all to photography. Chia obviously, you know, goes into food, but I just, I just Kinda gave, so I envy that. That's very awesome. That's very awesome. Well, and again, thank you so much for coming on the podcast, sharing everything that you did, especially getting started with a food styling and all of your experiences. I appreciate you sharing all of your information with the listener and I'm excited to keep up with you here in the future and hopefully start seeing some videos.

Hannah Chia: 56:42 Oh yeah. Stay tuned for that. Yeah. Thank you so much for having me.

Raymond: 56:47 I'll tell you what, I loved this interview, Hannah, if you are listening you are a gym. Seriously, I cannot tell you how much I appreciate you are sharing your story and I know that it will inspire many for sure. I think my biggest takeaway from this interview was just simply how much daily practice had skyrocketed the quality of Hannah's photography. I mean, if you think about how often you eat and then imagine being able to practice photography that much, just if you were able to do that, the quality of your work would also take off. So what I want to do is encourage you this week to think about something that you do every day and then think about how you can incorporate photography. Intuit, remember Hannah didn't set out to be a great photographer. She wanted to cook and then that got her into photography.

Raymond: 57:38 So that she could photograph her dishes. Now you don't have to make this like a, a big production. Just try to be mindful of what makes sense, you know what do you see on your walk into work every day? Take a photo of your kids every day and take a photo of the sky every day. You don't need to start producing incredible work immediately. The point of this exercise would be just to always be looking for a shot rather than, you know, just walking into work because it's, it's the practice in the doing that will actually grow your skills so much more than listening to podcasts. So much more than simply watching youtube videos or reading blog posts. You have to actually do. So that is it for this week's episode. Remember to download your free light room presets by heading over to learn the beginner photography, podcast.com forward slash courses to sign up and get them today. So until next week, I want you to get out, keep shooting, focus on yourself and stay safe. That's it. I love you all.

Outro: 58:42 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 164: Dave Maze - Gear Talk from a Professional Gear Reviewer

Dave Maze is a professional camera gear reviewer for Kinotika and host of the Polar Pro Golden Hour Podcast. It is his job to tell you the good, the bad, and the ugly of the new cameras on the market so you can make better informed buying decisions! Because lets face it, camera gear is not cheap. Today Dave and I talk in depth about camera gear and how to make the right decision for you!

Click for a full list of photography terms

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How Dave learned camera exposure

  • The hardest part about photography for Dave to learn

  • Why Dave started reviewing gear

  • How Dave decides what to focus on with his gear review

  • Daves takes on full frame vs crop sensor camera

  • The difference between a $5000 camera vs a $500 camera and who needs what

  • What piece of gear Dave never uses

  • Common bad info Dave hears being taught to new photographers

  • Daves take on the best travel camera

  • How many megapixels Dave thinks is too much

  • Daves take on using two different camera manufacturers

  • The importance of ND filters and Polarizer filters

Resources:

Listen to the full conversation & more episodes here: https://www.polarprofilters.com/pages/goldenhour Also, check out the full podcast episodes on your favorite audio platform! iTunes https://apple.co/2YbAqKW Spotify: https://spoti.fi/2Xf51XW GooglePlay: https://bit.ly/2WFAZj9 Ben Horne limits himself to spark creativity. He only photographs with large format cameras primarily using 8x10 or 4x5 film which forces him to create visually stunning landscape photography within those parameters.

read the full post here: https://fstoppers.com/originals/how-many-megapixels-do-you-need-print-billboard-220239 Check out our full photography tutorials here: http://www.fstoppers.com/store You don't need very much resolution to print a billboard. Due to the viewing distance, and the resolving power of the human eye, 2mp may be more than enough resolution for the average billboard.

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

BPP 163: Nur Tucker - Underwater Wildlife Photography

Nur Tucker, an underwater wildlife and conservation photographer with decades of experience who’s work has to be seen to be believed! Today I am excited to to chat about some of the challenges that shooting underwater presents!

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How Nur got into photography

  • What drew Nur to underwarter photography

  • What came first, Nurs love of photography or diving

  • Some Safety concerns photographers need to worry about while underwater

  • How Nur plans to photograph sea life like sea lions, clown fish, and turtles.

  • How much preparation is involved to bring a camera underwater

  • Nurs most used piece of gear

  • The underwater camera housing Nur uses to photograph underwater

  • How to plan for your shot when you cant change lenses

  • How much creativity Nur has with all the constraints of being underwater

  • What you need to know to get started shooting underwater

Resources:

Lembeh2018-Day 9-167LASTRESIZED copy.jpg
NTUCKERCP1.jpg
Sea Horse Under Sea Beams 1-6CRESIZED for SONY .jpg
NUR1-126RESIZED.jpg

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00:00 This is the Beginner Photography podcast. And this week we are taking our cameras under the sea. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:00:08 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, father, home brewer, La Dodger Fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer, Raymond Hatfield. Thanks

Raymond: 00:00:37 So much for joining me today on the beginner photography podcast. As always, I am your host and wedding photographer, Raymond Hatfield and I'm so excited to get into this interview. This interview is one that I haven't done before and I think that you are really going to enjoy it. But before we get into that, I want to talk a little bit about my week. It has been a crazy busy week because I've been trying to do a lot of things to plan out where the podcast is going to go. Right? What do I want the podcast to be? For a long time. I was trying to do everything from, you know, youtube videos, blog posts, obviously podcast. I had an Alexa skill you know business training within the Patreon, which the Patreon is still alive and well, but there's not the, the, the same videos that go into it every single week.

Raymond: 00:01:26 So, and I'm doing this all by myself and I got kind of burnt out. So I pulled back and then I just started focusing just on the podcast episodes itself. Oh yeah. I'm also doing interviews and editing and creating show notes for the podcast. So I pulled back and I started just focusing on the interviews themselves and I'm happy to where we are now. I like the format that we have and we're going to definitely move forward with that. But I'm still thinking about where I want to take the podcast. How can I help as many people as possible? Because I know that you're listening to this podcast because you have a problem. Your problem is that you want to be a better photographer and I want to be able to help facilitate you to get to where you are. So this week I have been putting up a lot of resources for you, the listeners and by creating a resource page on the website.

Raymond: 00:02:19 So this resource page has things like recommended gear, recommended software, and even some free trainings that you can download. Now this is going to be the place to go where you need suggestions or recommendations. So if you haven't already, feel free to check out the new resource page by heading over to beginner photography, podcast.com. And then just click the resources tab right up at the top. It's all that you got to do. There's going to be a bunch of stuff there, but you can you know, take advantage of and enjoy right now. Now as I said, I've been updating that. Now the next thing that is going to get updated on that resource page will be my mini course, which is called Picture Perfect Pricing. So if you have ever struggled or felt guilty for charging people money for your photography, for your work than fear no more, I am going to break it down, not only how to get over that mindset that is really holding you back from actually earning an income with your camera.

Raymond: 00:03:19 But I also show you exactly how to price your work with a custom made plug and play, easy to use spreadsheet with video tutorials on how to use it and know for certain that what you charge is, is, is going to be enough and it is going to be profitable for you. So you will be able to find out more about that by heading over Learn.BeginnerPhotographyPodcast.com So today's interview is a nice long interview. So I'm going to give it, get into it real quick. But before we do that, I want to give a shout out and this week's shout out is for Trent. Trent left a five star review on iTunes and I want to share it with you because I truly do appreciate every single one of you who are listening. This lets me know that you are listening and that you are a real person and that that you picked up something from the podcast that is helpful and I want to share that.

Raymond: 00:04:17 So Trent says, this is a fantastic podcast to get started and keep moving you forward. Raymond does an incredible job with the beginning of photography podcast. He pulls in professionals from all different areas of photography to discuss not only his, not only their career, but how they got started. All of this relates to the photographers wanting to grow and even start a business someday. Raymond himself, that's me, brings a wealth of experience as a wedding photographer. Check out his podcast if you are a photographer looking to get better. Trent, I appreciate you. That is a, a fantastic review. That, that, you know, I'm, I'm so glad that talking to photographers and learning where they started really helps you on your journey. I know that it helps me on my journey. You know, I don't know how everybody else had started, but I know how I got started.

Raymond: 00:05:10 So when I hear you know, how other photographers got started, that gives me insights into, you know, where can I be focusing more and learning to grow my photography in a way to get to, you know, wherever you want to be faster. So Trent, again, thank you so much for leaving a five star review on iTunes. Okay. So let's, like I said, this is going to be a nice long interview. You are going to hear my daughter interrupt us, I believe twice. So get ready for that. But we're going to go ahead and get on into this this interview right now with Nur and she is an underwater photographer and I think this interview is really going to open your eyes to what it takes to get the shot that you want. So let's get into it right now with Nur Tucker.

Raymond: 00:05:57 Today's guest is noreNur Tucker, an underwater photographer with decades of experience whose work truly has to be seen to be believed today. I am excited to chat about some of the challenges that shooting underwater presents. So north thank you so much for coming on the podcast.

Nur Tucker: 00:06:13 Oh, thank you very much for having me.

Raymond: 00:06:15 Of course. I kinda like we just spoke about right before I press record, I've never interviewed an underwater photographer. I've worked with an underwater or I guess a cinematographer who specialized in shooting underwater. But at the time I was also at work with him so I wasn't able to really chat kind of about the challenges that being underwater with a very expensive piece of gear and trying to capture something with with intention, kind of the challenges that that presents. So I'm really excited to have this time free together to be able to, to get into this topic. Cause a lot of beginners. Obviously you have questions, but first before we get into all that, can you tell me and the listeners how you got your start in photography in the first place?

Nur Tucker: 00:07:02 I think before photography I started doing on the rule to photography, which is a funny starting points a year, 1998, I was in Thailand on a holiday kosumi. And I didn't really intend to do scuba diving at all, but there was a scuba diving course, a diving school at the resort. And I'm always open minded. I said, look, I'm here for two weeks. Why don't I try this for a few days? And I enrolled it was a Pati course,utwo days of, you know, some classroom, whatever, reading the book at nighttime and,usome pool sessions for the basic skills. And then for open water dives, which was the best part. And I still remember the first time ever I put the mask on and the BCD and all that, and I died the first time over.

Nur Tucker: 00:07:51 I looked down and I saw this last blue and I was so lucky there was a school of fish going at the same time on my feet. I still remember it. It just gives you goosebumps. It's a, it was this infinite blue with the school of fish on there, my feet. And I didn't know how deep that was. It looked like pals and meters. It wasn't definitely, but I was serious semesterized at that point I said, I love this and I want to continue. So that was the diving bit. So I did my certificate there in Thailand and then another holiday. It was more these, this time they were doing an advanced [inaudible] advice for the, sorry, there is a phone calling. There was an advanced buddy certificate course, so I did that as well when I was doing the course. The instructor wrote of really Mickey Mouse Camera.

Nur Tucker: 00:08:43 So the course that we're doing, the advanced version of the paddy course didn't even want it to tell. Probably look underwater. You can even take photos or either it was that, it was such long time ago, I don't remember. Or he wanted to say, look, you didn't need good buoyancy to be able to take photos. But it was yellow. I think it was Mel Torme. Marianne, I think so. You can even find them on Ebay these days. So you t you put slides in it, so it's a film camera, it's like point and shoot really Mickey mouse. And there is one strobe on it just on and off. So it's that simple. So I took some photos with it and when I came on land and I saw there was fish, there was color, it was unfocused. And I'm like, oh my God, this works. I was expecting everything to be murky, whatever.

Nur Tucker: 00:09:30 So that 1998, I became interested in underwater photography. But obviously when I thought, oh my God, I take these photos, they're amazing. When I look at them now they're embarrassing bad. I understand that for sure. So that was the starting point I did. I liked it. I can add further things to it's basically underwater is such an amazing world. Firstly, I thought maybe I was efficient in my previous life. I don't know. I love all too, so much. That's my goal too. And safe place. You know, I really feel happy when I'm on underwater. The quiet, the tranquility, the pace of the animals or the fish swimming like sting rays or the turtles. It always brings me tranquility and I love that. And you don't think about in a politics and your politicians, economics, inflation, none of that just it's completely pure tranquility, which I like that.

Nur Tucker: 00:10:26 And the quiet of that. You also have to accept as you dive more and more, you witness more of the underwater world. And you see what a big biodiversity's that and the, the umbrella of the animals, the species you see on the Rother is Bret there for example, you can easily see minuscule things like microscopic things that you can only see big diopters, magnifying lenses such as like a smaller than a small ant, like a skeleton shrimp or a new daybreak. Or you see more than 10 meters, 10, 15 meters long. Like whales. Like the blue whale for example, is massive. So such diverse staff that you see a semester rising. I think it's nice to witness that. And if you think about the 70%, even 71% of the earth is water and the lifestyle in the water a billion years before blends. It's important we have to know it.

Nur Tucker: 00:11:26 Not everybody knows what's going on on the water. And I think as you dive take photos, you basically become an advocate for the water, for the animals. And obviously you can also talk about the dangers that are presented to not only the sea life, the animals, the fish, the Reeves with the pollution that the plastic, even the sun creams. I stop using some creams now because he can't really damage the reefs. Really. [inaudible] oh yeah. Yeah. I mean obviously all my dive buddies, they are big environmentalists. They are, you know, they like to preserve nature animals. We care immensely about the underwater world. The last time I was traveling, I was in Philippines, one of my diabetes and I just putting cream on my buddy and she, is that reef safe? I felt so bad. I'm like, AH, no. It's difficult to find it in England. No excuse. And now that I've been even use this because it can really damage anyways in a nutshell, there is so much basically that makes you fall in love. Yeah. [inaudible] Yeah.

Raymond: 00:12:32 That being underwater, just being so removed from your normal everyday world that you see above land is just has to be an incredible experience, a very transformative experience. So I kind of want to go back to that moment where you got that first camera, you got those slides back. You kind of mentioned that the diving was, was more of a, what was more of a holiday activity to you? At what point did you think like, I can actually pursue this instead of just, I'm just going to do this every so often when whenever we go on holiday.

Nur Tucker: 00:13:05 Yeah. So when I came back from that trip right away, it was more these, and I haven't used and Mickey Mouse Camera, all of a sudden I become an expert. So I went to, I can't remember the name of the company, but there was in London, in embankment, there is a company that sells a little on the Royalton year, not the cameras, but in my corner they have a camera set up as well. So I went there and I said, I will not buy it. And econ Aussie, it wasn't Nkomo Stan, it was a specific new designed underwater camera. So I bought that again, it's a worked with film. So e six and I bought one, you know, on and off stroke is, it's either on or off. And I started shooting. So I went to the Caribbean, I went to the Red Sea. I you use the tubes back then, just to frame the photo.

Nur Tucker: 00:13:52 It was completely primitive, but you know, some of the photos and I got better and better, but while I was there at that shop, I saw one ad, there is a workshop, Martin Age, I still remember the person is called Martin Age. He's an English photographer. Actually it was the first person ever I went to workshops with. We did. I contacted him and he was really lovely and he still loved me anyways, I still see him. He's one of the very important people for underwater photography world. He had like four books published I think. And I've read all of them. So I contacted him and I said, look, I want to do some workshops. So I took my camera, I went to him and we did some classroom sessions, about four hours. And then we went into the pool. We work with some silk flowers, like those fake flowers that you use at home.

Nur Tucker: 00:14:42 So we put some weights on them and we put them into the water. And basically he showed my, all the initial techniques, which I would like to talk today, actually do for the beginners later on. [inaudible] So basically what you see is not what you take because when you take the full soul of the silk flower, I could easily see the weight that we tied the, you know, silica Lauer to the stem and then all the mosaic, the ugly mosaic of the pool behind, and then read badly exposed silk flower. So this is what you see and, and then you taught me what to make out of it. So the next picture in, obviously after I learned all the tricks was negative space. You created the negative space. Meaning I know on the seed, the mosaic in the pool, I know on the sea that the weight ugly, you know, a weight that I just want to see a beautifully lit slip flower against the black background.

Nur Tucker: 00:15:38 Okay. How did we do that? So creating a negative space. So that was the first lesson basically I learned from him. So I did some the pool sessions and then I did some trips with them as well. So I ran to Red Sea, moldy, use a few different places with them. So I, every time you go on a workshop with similar minded people, they are not just diverse, they are not even dyed with their photographers, underwater photographers. That is so important. You can't just take photos while you're diving, you forget about diving, you dive. So the need to take photos. So if everybody's a photographer is excellent, but if you go on a diving trip with your camera, it doesn't work. And it never worked for me.

Raymond: 00:16:24 I see. I see. Okay. Yeah. So let's, let's unpack that a little bit. I want to know a little bit more about this workshop. When you went to a store and you bought that, that camera you said that it was a film camera made for underwater. Yes. Is that, is that what you brought to this workshop and if so, was it just a, it was just a point and shoot camera or were there manual controls?

Nur Tucker: 00:16:45 Actually, I'm trying to remember. I might have even had the wrong recollection with Martin Edge. I had another camera, which was a Nikkon again and on the log, very old type film camera. But it was that which I brought. But in between I went to another ladies, Linda Dunk. She was offering workshops. I went there with my Nikkonos actually it was so brand new, the whole packaging. I had to open it in front of her. I didn't know how to put it together. And she said, oh my God, what kind of people are on my trip? Yeah. She said that apparently famously. And then I proved her wrong a few days later. I had some really lovely photos with her teachings and she was happy with what I did.

Raymond: 00:17:27 So I guess, I guess the question that I am trying to get at here is, sorry, were you, did you already have an understanding of manual photography at this point or was everything just point and shoot and how did you learn? Where did, where did your education for photography come from?

Nur Tucker: 00:17:44 Yeah, yeah. Yeah, that's a good question. Origin really when I started doing photography was point and shoot. And then gradually it started to evolve. It was again with Martin Edge. I learned all the basics about ISO, the shutter speeds, the operative priority and all that. We see it. It was it's a long experience. It takes time. You learn all these, but putting it in action and executing its, you know, properly and efficiently when the time time comes and quickly it takes time. No, obviously I learned everything. So every time, you know, I eliminate a photo. It is, it is good. Perfect. You know, in terms of the lighting, in terms of the exposure, but it took a long time. It's really took a long time.

Raymond: 00:18:29 So did you, did you practice all of your photography underwater or did you spend much time here on land? To, to, to,

Nur Tucker: 00:18:37 No, it was, it was on the Walter, it was if you ask about the other stuff, which is for another thing later equine is very, very recent. Only in the last few years basically it was all on the water. I did everything on the water. The problem was originally I was working, I used to be a banker, so I used to be on trading floors and working long hours. I had two kids and obviously you tried to learn everything during one week of holiday that you have booked in a year and then you go and you start learning not only the camera but also the housing, the strobes, the whole thing. How this work, I don't even remember. You start from scratch. Oh, you learned a lot during the week and then when you come back you throw the camera too on the side, kids work, et cetera. The, you know, the pressures of the life gets in and basically until the next year you forget everything again.

Nur Tucker: 00:19:30 You start from scratch I guess. So it was a very, very slow learning curve for me. My photography really improved when I retired five years ago because not only I could spend time on the photography, but I could die more. Like I could do four or five trips a year. Sure. And then, and obviously don't forget initially it was analog, but with the tech knowledge, the digital, my learning curve became exponential because the feedback is imminence, you know? Otherwise you had 36 frames, take it. You don't even remember what settings you used when you took them and you come back from the trip. You had them developed. Oh, tough luck. Just like it was the wrong set of things then. And you don't even remember what settings now with the digital is imminent. You just take a photo, have a look at it, and I'll know this is not good. It's, Oh, I have to increase the shutter speed, I have to reduce this ISO. Definitely I have to reduce it. Or you know, my strobes, I have to turn them down and it's just, even if you can do fine and now also it's not expensive. You can take hundreds shots of the same little new dib rank and then one of them will be great.

Raymond: 00:20:33 Yeah. Yeah. You don't have to be limited to just the 36.

Nur Tucker: 00:20:37 Exactly. Exactly. Yeah, yeah, exactly. Exactly. Yeah. That's what it says.

Raymond: 00:20:41 So before we get too deep into the photography side into it, I kind of want to get a bit more context of diving in because you're underwater. Like this is a potentially life and death scenario that you can find yourself in. So can you give me a quick safety lesson on, on diving?

Nur Tucker: 00:21:04 Okay. A photographer's oxygen to safe die was probably, no, that's the joke. But underwater photography is really difficult. Sometimes I say after all these years, this is particularly difficult because you're not just the photographer. There are some branches of the photography which are not forgiving. And you really have to be a wizard in what you're doing in terms of technicalities, in terms of your exposure, control, et cetera. But on the rotor you have to be an excellent diver first. It is imperative. I can't really stress this enough. You have to be a very, very accomplished diver, but it doesn't mean that you have so many certificates in paddy. You really have to have the man hours on the rotor and the experience because the stability of yourself on the rotor is paramount to taking a stable shot because you act like the tripod of your housing and camera and they are heavy equipment.

Nur Tucker: 00:22:07 Yes, the water lifts a little bit, but at the end of the day, I will show you something that you just become. HRA is this big. This is only the camera. This is only to camera and it has the, it doesn't have the trims on it. Like the strobes, the stroll bombs and the tripod, whatever. So it's quite a heavy. Sometimes you need just one hand to use the whole thing because maybe you use just one finger to stabilize yourself against the current. So on the router obviously your depth gauge is very important. Your nitrogen levels in your body is very important. How deep you are. Are you diving with air or Nitrox? Depending on that, what kind of nitrox level or oxygen level you have in your tax depend depended on that. Your maximum, that varies. You have to know that and you can easily be sidetracked with taking a photo.

Nur Tucker: 00:23:02 Sometimes it happens to me like, oh, it needs a little bit more light under the chin. Oh, the light should come from up. Oh, maybe I should, you know, take the strobe arm a little bit to the side. Or I have a model, for example, I want a model. I want the person model who, who's beaming a torch at me in between too. Big Gorgonian [inaudible] I tell him, go up a bit, go down a bit, go left a little bit while I'm doing that, it happened once, I found myself at 37 meters and I wasn't supposed to go lower that 33 for that particular dive, which was dangerous. So obviously you have to keep an eye on your death gauge, on your oxygen levels. Like what kind of, how, how much air do have left. You may finish at 32 meters. Nothing is coming anymore and there's nobody around.

Nur Tucker: 00:23:53 This is quite dangerous. So I think you have to be looking after yourself because most photographers will be looking after themselves. We say, buddy systems are important, but as soon as we dive, normally we lose the by the, in the first one minute or so. So please look after your deck, gauge your computer, you know, your air and check these all the time. Basically on dorms. They and don't do a Decaux. We normally do. No Decaux dives a underwater. So you do maybe three minutes at five meters on the way back we do normally the 60 minute dives. We try not to do longer than that, but these are the, obviously this is for ourselves, but it is very important not to touch anything and respect the underwater photographer as well. They are taking photos. They can become, not on purpose, but disrespectful to the environment.

Nur Tucker: 00:24:49 This involves touching the reefs, breaking the reefs. You know, if you hold the reef, that part that you hold, it dies imminently or your fence are you? Yeah, exactly. The minute you touch something, it dies. And sometimes sorts of Reeves, it takes a hundred years to form. It is a shame. So you should be respectful. Don't do the thing kicks, don't kneel. Even if it's a mock diving, for example, that you do. Which just, just sand or volcanic sand in Indonesia, we go to Soloway Z, it's just black sand. But even then, we try not to touch the water. There could be something hidden on the sand or, you know, we can also danger ourselves. We can talk. There are so many tiny creatures that your eyes don't see damaging. So, exactly. We shouldn't touch anything.

Raymond: 00:25:40 Yes, yes, I got ya. Very recently there was, I believe it was just the other day there was an article posted that there's a lavender field in France who I guess because of social media became famous, people would come and take pictures in this beautiful lavender field. And then everybody knew where this place was droves and droves. The photographers were coming to take photos in this field and it has now ruined this, this farmer's business because of people trampling over just the lavender. And it's, it's a very unfortunate situation now. Lavender is not something that takes hundreds and hundreds of years to you know, regrown. So I would just imagine that, that, that feeling of protecting the environment that you're in has just got to be so much more powerful. For sure. Yeah.

Nur Tucker: 00:26:26 That's quite the similar situation. Of course. Whether it is any rape scene, like some beautiful reefs or even wrecks, you know, rigs can be damaged. Like there are all these beautiful wrecks in the Red Sea. Like this'll go on, for example, that was sunken during the World War and it's amazing. It was carrying artillery to the war and it still has all the Sh the four wheel drives, the big trucks, the motorbikes, et Cetera. Inside. It's, it's beautiful. It's beautiful. I died many times. I can't dive enough. I want to go again. But I'm, we see each year thousands of tourists are visiting that if everybody touches one little thing, it's just going to damage the whole Dereck.

Raymond: 00:27:07 Yes. You have a picture in a, in an, I saw one of the photos on your website that it looked like a, a motorcycle attached to a ship underwater with a nice blue

Nur Tucker: 00:27:18 Oh, that must be okay. [inaudible] Yes, yes, yes, exactly. That is [inaudible]. Yes, there was a diver in the back. Yeah.

Raymond: 00:27:26 So, and so that kind of brings me to my next question for, for something like a, a wreck. You, you know what it is that you're getting into. You know that you want to go down there and you have an idea of what it is that you want to see to capture that photo. But a lot of your photos are of, of the sea life. So before you go down, do you have an idea of the specific animals that you want to go out and shoot where you dive or do you just go diving and then hope for the best?

Nur Tucker: 00:27:57 Oh, I see. You're saying for the, if it's a wreck, you know what you're shooting, but if it's just the wreck, if it's just a, you know, you just dive. What I can say is the following obviously this is nature. You don't know what you're going to get. It's like, I don't know if you've ever done a safari in Africa. Nope. I've done, oh, I done maybe like 10, 10, 15 times. So lots of different places in Africa. It's never the same. You may take the same route every single time is different. One day you see a leopard, the next day you see a stork, the other there is another bird or some artwork, whatever. So knowing that this is nature, nothing is guaranteed. But what we do is we don't just take a camera and just go dive somewhere. We have a clan workshops are normally advertised for the category.

Nur Tucker: 00:28:48 For example, they say it's macro workshop or super macro workshop or it's a wide angle workshop or it's a rec photography workshop, or it could be sharks. For example, once I've done great hammerhead sharks intervening Bahamas, the sole purpose of the trip is just the pack picture. The great hammerheads in Bimini, they come there only for two weeks during the year. And there are feeders, shark leaders, they basically bake them, just they put the, they put the charm and the whatever blood and all that, and we wait on the boat. Sometimes it takes seminars for the fin store arrive exactly, sometimes five minutes. So for that one, you know, you want a great hammerhead, which means you need a wide angle lens and the Strawbs accordingly. So you need longer arms. And everything is according to the, the whole setup. But if you go to Sulawesi Land Bay, for example, in Indonesia, you know that you're going to do macro photography.

Nur Tucker: 00:29:50 So don't even bring your wide angle lens or a dome with you because you're not gonna see anything bigger than probably this or that size. Or sometimes they can go so small. As I said, they're microscopic. You need some big magnifying lances and you do super macro because you read it. Try to blow up a tiny tiny shrimp, maybe a or a new Dib, rank, whatever. So you know, you have a plan on your mind, what kind of creatures you want to take. But it is always the luck. Of course. It's always the luck that basically you just have one land. Even then even then, sorry for example, let's assume you do macro photography, but still there are so many different lenses. For example, I have a one oh 5 million lands and I ha I have a 60 minute lens. Obviously one oh five is tighter.

Nur Tucker: 00:30:42 So one oh five I would use to take Billy Small minuscule stuff together. We did diopter that I use and diopter I can put it outside the port so I can screw it later on like a plus five plus 10 sub C diopter. Just to magnify it further from the One oh five mill lens, this is your mom taking a little shrimp or maybe tiny pygmies mushrooms like a 30 millimeter, something like this. Okay. So I do, so I put a one on five mill lens and all of a sudden that is like, you have a really big blurring octopus, which is very difficult to see and it is not the right lens and it happens. It always happens. You need the underlies, but once in a while of course. So in a situation like that and you're just, you're just out of luck, is that it?

Nur Tucker: 00:31:29 Yeah, of course. Yeah. I don't mind you. You improvise. Okay. You know what? I'm gonna focus on the eyes off the octopus rather than the whole thing. Or why don't I just check the pattern, not the beautiful pattern on the skin. So you can improvise, but it will not be the photo that you would normally shoot situation. But there is always a plan. So these are the basic plans. But the other plans is we always have an idea of what kind of image I want underwater. Okay. Sometimes I say, you know what, I want to do a panic shot this time. So I want to put my a shutter speed really low, like a quarter of a second, but that really high aperture number, like an f 22 or bigger. And obviously my strobes shouldn't be very, very strong. So I want to just plan a sea horse just as if the sea horse is on the run or just to show, show some moments, some artists together elements. So then you just do your adjustments accordingly. Are you going to do a panic short or are you going to do a backlighting? Maybe I want to just do the silhouette of the seahorse. Then I don't want my strobes. I just want to do backlighting. Then you can just put the torch behind the seahorse. Then it is important that you take a torch with you. Yeah, yeah. No, I would have just got it. You can always plan. Exactly.

Raymond: 00:32:47 So in a situation like that where you wanted to backlight a sea horse, you said bring a torch with you. Is this something where you can do both things yourself, where you can hold the torch and backlight the seahorse with the camera?

Nur Tucker: 00:33:00 I'll have a hand. Yes. Yeah. I assistant, I can do it myself. Ideally and some great photographers or some famous photographers they afford to have or they are lucky to have an assistant lighting assistant or a model for a wide angle shots. I don't have that luxury. What we do is in terms of the macro photography for example, I tried to do everything myself. Believe me. Sometimes I go down, I just think like I knew the shopping bag there. There are so many tools I need like a tripod or maybe some elastic pass to attach the torch to the tripod or some other things. Maybe how many different torches I have. Some, some of them is a narrow beam. Some of them is a wide angle theme. Some of them is for the, you know, the port, the muddle, the tripod and sometimes we use snoot just to eliminate a tiny thing.

Nur Tucker: 00:33:55 So when you put the whole strobe on the animal, if it's tiny then it will eliminate everything. But I want just the animal in the darkness against the black background. So you use a snoot just to eliminate like, like this pen, just this is the light beam coming onto the minuscule animal. Yes. That is really helpful. If somebody holds it for you, that is ready to help because it's so difficult because the minute you move it that rose as well. Animal is moving. Sometime the animal is actually on top of the, I'm sorry the phone. This is the animal. This sometime is on top of a moving thing. For example, a sea urchin which is moving on top of it. There is the little shrimp for example and I'm trying to like the shrimp shrimp is moving, the CEO's Shin is moving on the needs that and that is the currents and the roles that as well.

Nur Tucker: 00:34:46 And then when I moved the camera, every time I'm moving, the light is all over the place. Sometimes it's just a nightmare. So it wouldn't be very helpful if somebody helps you put the light and what we do sometimes once in a while, depending on how friendly your dive buddy is, you can help each other saying, look, I can help you and can you help me? Can we take turns? She made this atlas with the back lighting as well. I don't want to put it you, sometimes you put the torch on the floor and then it rolls because orbit is not really a straight, you put the torch. Perfect. You like eliminating the CFRs on the back dominion. You're trying to take the photo, it rolls. This is not good. And you do it again back and forth, back and forth. Exactly.

Raymond: 00:35:25 So a few questions there. One of them is how often do you use a tripod, tripod underwater and what what sort of a situation would you, would that come in handy?

Nur Tucker: 00:35:40 Tripod? it worries you don't have to have a tripod. If you can do it sometimes it's very helpful. Let me tell you why you use a tripod. For example, if you want to do something artistic, let's assume I'm in a wreck and there is a diver in a very bright suit, yellow or red and I wanna take you know, Real Kurtz and photo off the diver which means I'm taking, it has to be on a very low shot to speed less issue, right? And I want the diver to have the movement effect in this shot. So I see the diverse face but by the time the shot is taken, if the diver is swimming, the back is a bit blurred as if there is moments effect. Right. In order to get that right, I think tripod would be great because you're on such a low shutter speed, there's going to be movement or you will shake the camera.

Nur Tucker: 00:36:42 That will be helpful. But you can always try to rest it on something. If it's available, you can find another little rock or a, I don't know, some other formation around. You can use that. You can always put it on the sea bed. You can do that. Or if the shutter speed is not that low, you can assume that the lifting power off the Voltar will be okay. This is for wide angle for macro. I try to basically perfect the back lighting. Sometimes look, if it's a seahorse, I can always rest the torch on the seabed. But let's assume I put the torch on the seabed, but the crab or the sea of Orzo, the little shrimp that I'm trying to eliminate this here, sometimes I can't find the angle just to eliminate the back. So it is really a good targeted little, one of those really cheap tripods.

Nur Tucker: 00:37:35 It's like this big on Amazon. Yeah. You just take it with you and I can even just clip it on basically. And I quickly attached the torch on top of the tripod. So you, you use that to keep the torches? Sometimes the backlighting I do that. Or sometimes for example, you may have seen it on my website. Sometimes you take these little gobies yellow gobies and a beer bottle. Oh yeah. Beer bottles or bottles and they make them their home. That little tiny yellow gobies. They're normally a pair in a bottle. So if you want to give a special effect, like sometimes I have on up the red light just towards the bottle inside. So as inside the bottle is, eliminates a dread towards outside [inaudible] I noticed again, just a, you can either put it on the side or use a tripod, little mini tripod. That's quite cute. I like that. Yeah.

Raymond: 00:38:28 So, so the use of the tripod is mostly for achieving a creative effect.

Nur Tucker: 00:38:35 Yeah. Yeah, exactly. It's not, it's not essential. It's not essential, especially for beginners. Photography is really nice actually.

Raymond: 00:38:41 Sure. So I know that when I, when I go to shoot a wedding which is primarily what I do, weddings, engagements, it's very easy for me because you know, I know where I'm going, I know what is gonna happen. And like we were talking about earlier, there's very little chance that I'm going to be in a life or death situation. So can you talk to me about kind of the planning that is involved in going to, to that goes into your work because you mentioned there just a moment ago, sometimes you just want to bring a whole bag full of gear.

Nur Tucker: 00:39:17 Hmm. Yeah.

Raymond: 00:39:18 In the case or do you go down there with a, with a, with a photo already in your head that you're going to try to get and then limit the amount of gear?

Nur Tucker: 00:39:28 Oh, of course. You always try to limit the amount of gear. That's for sure. Once I do the amount of gear, mostly in my experience necessary was a four macro or super macro diving because you know, you need that little tripod. Not everybody has to have it. Just that me personally, I liked that little tripod which goes on the clip somewhere and now you have your torches, a few different torches. And then you have there about decides like my fists, some external diopters, magnifying diopters depending on what new scenes. Yeah, I normally put them in my pockets. I have a lot of pockets on my wet, so, and I have some external pockets so that one a diopter here, another diopter, depending on the size of the animal they're about this size that can go outside. So I can, you know screw down on top of the port the torch or several torches and some lighter fate, like some Gel colors in front of the torches.

Nur Tucker: 00:40:31 If I want to make a red light effect or a blue light effect or sometimes you need a condenser for the torch. So it becomes a narrow beam light rather than eliminating everything. And the bigger part of these is the snoot, which is about this big, basically it's this kind of thing. I have a retro snoot is quite bulky and it clips on something, but I got used to having all these things. Sometimes we joke with our friends, they say we like the Christmas trees, things that are hanging from every part, torches and snoots and external throat tripods, whatever. So what you can do if you are not gonna use the snood, maybe don't take the snoot. We knew sometimes you say, you know what, on this side, I don't want the snoot, I'm just going to do maybe panning or I'm going to do backlighting and or some dives. You just take the snoot and you just want to do snooty and just so that you can use it basically.

Raymond: 00:41:23 [Inaudible] So how much would you say before you actually dive you are preparing for the shot?

Nur Tucker: 00:41:32 So of all before you all go on the trip [inaudible] trip that sometimes it takes me six to eight months to get ready because there's so many. Oh yeah, yeah. Actually I had been a mishap. I got ready for this trip indirect. See, and I had a problem with my health and I couldn't even go. And it took me almost a year to get ready for that trip because you have something on your mind that motorbike pitcher and you, so for example, I didn't think it was perfect. So I'm going to go there again to perfect that I sold the mistakes there. I'm not gonna tell you what they are. So I want to do start that. It's not even a mistake, but how can I improve this? I want a bigger angle in the light beam in the front and I want an additional on there.

Nur Tucker: 00:42:14 One for example, I only had one external strobe there. Now I need another one. So I had to order another one. So I need some external flashlights that can come from right from left, things like that or the tripod or you have to have your housing convoluted so each can accept the tripod underneath. And this has to go back and forth. Like for example, my housing should, we can come to that later on is an Austrian make it has to go to Austria to ice. And it's a heavy thing. It's like a four hour, just pillows. Just the housing. Okay. Can you please put the hole underneath so you can, I can put a tripod to it. Can you please put the vacuum on it or the decks. So, or I want the bigger dome port. Can you convert it or you just need some external, just engineers.

Nur Tucker: 00:42:56 Can you just create this for me? Can you just make this for me and the, there's a lot of thinking going on and I also spend all the time in DIY shops, like a bathroom stores and things like that. Yeah. I'm going to sum it up. Yeah. There are little things like you can just get an Armenian bathroom type, cut it and just basically put it in front of the Dome Port just to create a certain effect. It's a constant, or like this, some dishwashing scholars and things like that. Just the no background effects. I'm constantly expanding.

Raymond: 00:43:26 I love it. That's the way that you learn and grow. That's so awesome. That's awesome. Yeah, yeah, yeah, exactly. So when it comes to the gear, obviously, let's just go ahead and get on into that now because this is an entirely new world of yeah. Specifically for me, you know, because it's, it's not just full frame versus crop or, you know, having a fast or slow lens or you know, this is entirely different now while they make some incredibly weather sealed DSLRs these days, they're certainly not waterproof, especially down to a depth of 30 plus meters. So, yeah. Can you talk to me about the housing and how much control you have of the camera itself while you're underwater? Okay. Okay.

Nur Tucker: 00:44:08 Alright. I will show you again. I don't like this angle is enough. I don't want to drop my Dome Port, so I don't know if this is a good angle. So this is basically, it's a very large just sun. Yeah. It's large as this is only one part of it. What also makes it bulky and large and heavy is there strobes and destroy barns? Like I even have these, these are the strobes.

Raymond: 00:44:32 Oh Wow. Even those are good size. So that strobes, we're talking about something that's about the size of like a, like a small toaster oven that you're bringing, bringing under water with. Yeah. This is not very slowly, just the arms, obviously that goes onto those.

Nur Tucker: 00:44:46 So the whole thing becomes quite bulky and awkward to carry on land. No, what I can say is the following for a beginner, obviously I can't talk about iPhone photography or GoPro, GoPro. I hear a lot of people have them. Actually you can even attach it on top of your housing for some small weed entertaining videos. And I can't talk about those. But what I can see is for a beginner, it is really not essential to have the top of the range camera and don't do it because first of all, you have to deserve the best camera. That's, I always say, but it's just read, not the camera, it's a the person behind the camera and the right technique, but it's also the lens and the strobes, the strobe arms and the porch. So if you have a compact camera, just start with, you can win competitions with that.

Nur Tucker: 00:45:35 There are a lot of amazing photographers that use a compact camera and win competitions. And these days competitions always have a Compaq subcategory. Oh really? So yeah, that is always a compact category. And sometimes it's really a noises because really great photographers that we know, they cheat and they go into the Compact category, right? Like, come on, you can't just do this. This is really not good anyways. But contact cameras for a starting point are great. Like Sony makes them, I can't tell you which models Sonya has them and I, Canon has them. What else?

Raymond: 00:46:17 I think we're pretty much probably the most popular I would think is the GoPro. [inaudible]

Nur Tucker: 00:46:21 Yeah. GoPros are good. Yeah, exactly. I mean you can do that. What is important as, as much as the camera is that the lens, so for a beginner it is imperative that you have two lenses. One, you need a macro lens, probably a six mil kind of Lens. And it is important that you have a, you know, wide angle like a fish islands and we love Takina for example, 10 to 17. So those are the goal. Two lenses for a beginner. And obviously depending on the lens you use, you need the appropriate port for a macro, you need a flat port for the, the port that you have seen on the screen now is a wide angle law enforcement

Raymond: 00:47:04 That was listening. The porch is the, is the glass or the plastic in front of the Lens. Yeah,

Nur Tucker: 00:47:09 Exactly. Okay. Yeah, exactly. So basically there is the thing and then you just, every time I will take it out and show it to you. Oh, so it's basic. This is the part you see that is the parts. So this is the wide angle one, which is a medium size a port. Basically they can come in bigger sizes, they can come and smaller sizes. And we can talk about the pros and cons later on.

Raymond: 00:47:36 Lens Hood. You can imagine if you're just listening right now, it's like the biggest lens hood that you could possibly put on a camera covered in a is it glass or as a plastic.

Nur Tucker: 00:47:46 This line is glass, but it can be accurately as well. And it doesn't affect the optics. It really doesn't. What is important is the shape of it. Yes. so that was the wide angle one. And if you have a macro lens, like a 60 Mil Lens, then you need a, just the cylindrical thing that goes in, right with the flats port basically as a flap. What? That's what you call. So you start with these two. If you starting get a compact camera, get a macro and a wide angle lens and then the appropriate porch. But it is important obviously when you invest in the camera ask whether there is a housing forage or not. Not every model like for example Sony or as I said, the other brands, they don't necessarily have the housing for it. So it's always important to go and ask which ones have housings and it shouldn't have the touch screen because you should be able to, you know, control it from outside.

Raymond: 00:48:39 Yeah, exactly. So how do you take control of the camera from, from outside? Are there buttons on the housing? Correct.

Nur Tucker: 00:48:45 Yeah. Yeah, there is a everything to be honest. Whatever you do with the camera you can do underwater with the housing. Like this is the back of the housing for example.

Raymond: 00:48:55 Oh yeah. Tons of buttons, tons of buttons.

Nur Tucker: 00:48:58 But this is basically every single item here on the top, on the side, these, they're all corresponding to something on the camera and you can, you have hundred percent control of your camera on the water and it's very easy. Most, you know, your camera is, it's really no problem. And you know, you learn your housing as well. Yeah.

Raymond: 00:49:20 So how about the dexterity between like actually being underwater? I mean are, are, are you using gloves and the control is very intuitive to press those buttons. It's not too tough.

Nur Tucker: 00:49:31 Gloves. Most of the cases you're not allowed gloves because this is the sea culture. They don't want you to use gloves because if you use gloves, you're less careful, less respectful, you touch things, you touch things. So gloves normally are not permitted apart from like shark diving, like when I did a B Muni for example, Oh yeah. Gloves aren't necessarily because tan color, this color is food, so you have to cover yourself with black. So everything is like top to toe black. So we normally don't use gloves obviously apart from Coldwell to diving as well. When you're doing cold water diving, which I normally don't like if you're diving in Norway or wherever, somewhere called [inaudible] class, you need the dry suit, you need gloves. And I heard that the Dexter is the goes down because you freeze. And, and also with the thick glove with the using two bottles become a little bit cumbersome. I heard that, which I don't have much experience on. I like more what?

Raymond: 00:50:28 Yeah, no, I don't blame you. I don't blame you. I remember growing up growing up in California, we would go to the beach often and everybody thinks that like California beaches, like they gotta be the best. Like you gotta go, you know, the California summer or whatever, you dip your toes in that water and it just, you want to get out immediately cause it's so cold. It's cold. Right? It's horrible. It's horrible. It's horrible. I want to talk now a little bit kind of about the m market for underwater photographers to sell prints. This is an area that I know nothing about. Is this something that I guess how big is this? How big is the market for it, for underwater photographers?

Nur Tucker: 00:51:11 I don't know is the answer and probably I'm not even the right person to answer because I usually normally don't sell my underwater image. Online. I would only sell them and actually I'm planning to do some exhibitions next year, but something more artistic rather than just some fish, etc. Which is a little bit premature. I normally don't sell my underwater images. I enter competitions. I'm there mostly competitions. It is a highly competitive market. I don't think it is easy to make money out of underwater images. There are so many good guys. Like for example, I mentioned Martin Age and I haven't mentioned Alex Mustard, but he has been instrumental in improving my photography in the last five, six years. I've done a lot of his workshops on lighting techniques, which is the most important thing on the roadshow. So for example, to us, he's our gods.

Nur Tucker: 00:52:10 He is an amazing photographer. He's an amazing on the rotor photographer. He's a marine biologist. He's very knowledgeable than his photos are. Like, it's, it's just we are hoping that always one day the, exactly. We are trying to be him one day. He's amazing and I am sure he's selling to magazines and some documentaries. I don't know what it is, the books programs and he does sell but I don't think he is making millions out of it either. But it is very competitive unless you are as good as him. And he takes mom photo to perfection with the amazing amount of pixels in it. Nothing is spice for example. Then you take the photo of the pig. Missy horse eat lives in some I think Oregonians or some coral reefs which have the perfect replica of his skin is basically, it's an amazing camouflage.

Nur Tucker: 00:53:04 So it's basically polyps, but they are like little cut flowers and then the seahorse looks like them. So it's difficult to pinpoint them and you find them, they're cutaneous about 20, 30 millimeters, whatever. But when you're taking the full time, you are so close to it as well. In supermicro, you are really close, almost touching distance but not touching. You should not touch the polyps because then they all just go inside and it just kills the photo. Nobody will buy that then. So it is difficult to achieve certain things and perfection and the magazines can be very hard basically. So I'm, I'm not the right person I guess to sell, but I'm sure there are other people. Yeah.

Raymond: 00:53:42 Well you gave me a lot of great names there.

Nur Tucker: 00:53:45 Yeah. Yeah, I definitely, Alex [inaudible] is amazing. Martin Age is really great and there are a lot of good photographers.

Raymond: 00:53:52 Beautiful. Beautiful. So let's talk a little bit more about kind of the I guess creative constraints that you may have. You, you talked about, you know, being down there seeing something and thinking, oh, I've got the wrong lens, you know, what am I supposed to do in this situation? And then trying to figure that out. But what are some other things that that are just a byproduct of being underwater that, that constrain your, your, your creativity or your creative vision?

Nur Tucker: 00:54:24 Ah, that's a good question. That is a very good question. This can always happen. The problem is I don't know whether it happened to me or not because I'm thinking this is how I was thinking at the time. I don't know if it wasn't on there, that kind of depth or pressure or nitrogen level would I have thought a bit better. You will never know that. But it is a, it is a known fact that when you're under pressure every single time it's in certain that let's assume 30 meters, 35 meters, your body's reaction is different.

Raymond: 00:54:56 So we're talking about physical pressure here. Not Mental pressure, physical pressure.

Nur Tucker: 00:55:00 No, no. I'm seeing it affects the, the physical pressure affects the mental pressure. Gotcha. That's, that's what I'm saying. So basically when you are, when you are at the 30 meters or 40 meters, that everybody's reaction and every single time is different by the way is different. And I think a, the pressure would be the accumulated nitrogen in your body because of the pressure affects your mental capacity and your thinking speed and you can effect, it may not effect, as I said, every single time is different because of that. For example, when I did a deep dive course one day, they made me do some mental maths at 43 meters. They just bring a slate with you and they just give you some calculations, just how quickly can you do it. So they compare it about land on land and at 43 meters. At that occasion, it didn't affect me with some simple math. It didn't affect me, but it can have effect. Stress I think is important. If you are really stressed and I get stressed a lot, sometimes I take it so seriously. I'm like, I should, I have to create something. I have to create something. There must be some creativity. Already 14 minutes past the dye was finishing and I haven't done anything. Sometimes I stress myself and it makes it worse. You should just be relaxed and fine. Okay. Know. But I take adversaries like this.

Raymond: 00:56:25 Okay, so then, so then how do you, how do you judge, what do you need to capture to call it a good day then?

Nur Tucker: 00:56:37 First of all, you really want to maximize the probability by staying until the end of your lab dive time normally is to 60 minutes. A lot of people be notice 7 to 8 minutes. You can increase. Obviously if you're agreed beforehand with your buddies, you don't want to make them wait on the boat wet and cold, et cetera. Of course. Let's assume 60 minutes, you're allowed time. You wouldn't get up at 30 minutes minutes because why, why do you do that? Because it's just the probability and you never know. You may not see anything for 50 minutes on the 60th minutes. Sometimes just the most amazing thing appears. It always happens sometimes just before you're about the surface, that five meters you see the most amazing creature. So you want to maximize the time to increase the probability of success or seeing something interesting, which I do, which I do, and just click away, tried to use other things.

Nur Tucker: 00:57:28 If one thing doesn't work, sometimes it happens. You know, like sometimes I think my mind stopped you just for example, there was a seahorse. I know what to do with it. Ah, okay. Left writing, writing, writing. You know, you just say, okay, I want to do backlighting. The strobes at three o'clock, you know, nine o'clock, three o'clock, nine o'clock, strobes and this, you know how it works and you use this app, stop that shutter speed. It's not working. It's all washed up. You tried this, you tried that change ISO. Nothing is working. Sometimes you go lock Ross wrong. Nothing I do is working and maybe this looks like something, you know, something is not working. What am I doing it just, just take a minute, just okay. Chill out. Just come back to it again or just say, you know what, for some reason this is not working, let's try something else. Why don't I do panning instead, for example? Or it can happen or you do abstract. Nothing is working. Okay. I'm sorry. I'm going to find some sea squirts and just do some backlighting and just do some abstract on those. You can always do something.

Raymond: 00:58:30 Of course. I don't know if if you can hear her right there.

Nur Tucker: 00:58:34 Oh, lovely. Oh No, no worries. Lovely. Hello.

Raymond: 00:58:45 I apologize for that.

Nur Tucker: 00:58:46 No worries. No worries. No worries.

Raymond: 00:58:48 We we went camping a few weeks ago and

Nur Tucker: 00:58:53 They did very well, to be honest. They didnt bother you for a long time. I think they did really well.

Raymond: 00:58:57 I bribed them with going outside and playing in the pool after, after we're done with the phone call.

Nur Tucker: 00:59:03 Ah, that's nice. That's nice. Okay.

Raymond: 00:59:06 Okay, I got just, just a few last questions here for ya. Now we talked a little bit about kind of using a compact camera. You know, you don't need that top of the line gear to get started. So No. If somebody is just into underwater photography and they do go out and buy that compact camera or if they have a GoPro, do you have any little tips for them to get the most out of a just to get the best photos that they can?

Nur Tucker: 00:59:34 Yes, of course. I think I will go back to my clothes ever lessons myself about what was important to learn in underwater photography. I am assuming these people already have the basic knowledge about which I didn't have when I started the ISO shutter speed aperture priority. I'm actually not hearing you. Can you hear me?

Raymond: 00:59:57 I can hear you. Yeah,

Nur Tucker: 00:59:58 You hear me? Okay, fine. So I'm assuming they already know about the basics of pressure prior to shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, et Cetera, having had that and if they have the right lenses, do you remember what I said? They need the 60 mil and a wide angle and they need proper strobes. If they have the strobes, proper strobes, manually operated strobes they can actually do really well. In terms of the tips, the first thing to look at, which I learned and I think it is instrumental is creating and negative space, which means when you point in shoot to a fish and you will see there is the fish behind, there is some rock, some reef, some whatever, that maybe there is another fish that is a big cacophony in the background. That could be a good textbook picture for identifying the species, but it will never be an artistic picture.

Nur Tucker: 01:01:00 Creating negative spaces separate that subject from the background somehow. It could be sometimes the subject against subject, you know, it could be like a little fish on a beautiful and nominee, so it's just their nominee in the back. Or it could be just just the back black background or completely blue background, like the blue of the sea or something else. But just to create that negative space, they can look at a lot of magazine photos, maybe just to see some underwater dive magazines, diver magazines, just to see how that is achieved. That's important. The second important, this we always say reduce the column of water. That basically means don't take it from a distance. Always go very, very near the subject. Get close, get close. Even now, after all these years, I didn't like in like common s's. I put clothes, get clothes, get clothes.

Nur Tucker: 01:02:01 I mean like sometimes even, I forget. You have to get as close as possible. And we always say many underwater pictures like taken from many of those or majority of the underwater photos are taken from very similar clothes, distances almost touching like as if I'm touching this screen. Some of them are touching some of them. Even the rec photos may be your only two meters. Maybe you're one or two meters in front of the rack. You can just see the whole direct because it's a wide angle lens. So reduce the column of water because Walter is not like air and not every water is as clear as obviously every sea. So when you reduce the column of water, you increase the clarity of the picture, reduced the backs, catheter, the hanging things in the object, in the water. So that is important. Always get close.

Nur Tucker: 01:02:51 What else do we have? Oh you always look up because many beginner photographers they will shoot like this. Basically like that's because, yeah, because you are swimming or floating and the fishes on underneath, you just shoot like that. That will never ever make a good picture. We always learned to look up or just go at the eye level of the subject. For example, if it's a little blending that you have to get to the eye level and then make sure and have an eye contact, try to have an eye contact. If the blend is looking that way it will not make a good shot basically. Or if you can only see one eye again, that's not very good. We tried to see both eyes and we tried to have eye contact, whether it's a sea horse, whether it is a blenny or a goby. And you know, if it's looking like this, this is not gonna look very good basically. So I think those are the ideas I contact. Look up, not down, reduce the column of water. And the, what was the other one? Get close to the subject.

Raymond: 01:03:54 Did you close? Of course. Of course. Those are great tips. Those are great tips. I'm I've the opportunity to to go on a cruise this fall with my family down down to Mexico. And I think I'm going to give diving a shot. I've never done it before. I think that I'm willing to try it and I think that after hearing these tips from you I'm going to be better prepared to at least attempt to to photograph something under there. So I appreciate you sharing those for sure.

Nur Tucker: 01:04:23 Oh, no problem. Can I add one thing? I think this is important. I sold my old housing to somebody and he came back asking some questions, Jimmy saying, look at why my thought was on not, you know, like this why [inaudible] blown up by our, they'll say cyani not like the blues that you shoot and he said he's doing TTL mode. It is really important not to Tate, not to use the TTL mode off the camera. It should be on the men. It should be on the manual node. So no, no cause then no, no TTL mode because that ridicules it because you want to be in whole control of the camera. You don't want to give the decision making of hot power of the strobes are going to be to your camera. GTL means through the Lens is basically the camera, the size, depending on the light coming from the subject through the Lens. And it just says, okay, this is how strong I'm going to make strobes. And it made me sound a stand. It doesn't have the idea of what you're gonna achieve or what is the plan that you want to see. So you want to be in control please. No TTL. That is my recommendation.

Raymond: 01:05:30 I love that. That's great. And that actually what you just said there brings up one last question that I have for you before I let you go. I know that we've been talking far longer than, than I said that this would take. But whenever I look for like I have, I have multiple GoPros and whenever I like I look online for GoPro accessories, one of the big things is dive like a little dive housing for the GoPro. And it seems like the Dome is always like, like a dark red color. And I never understood why that was. And yet I look at your dome and it's, it's very clear. Do you have any insights as to, as to why that is

Nur Tucker: 01:06:08 Your, your don't want is dark red color?

Raymond: 01:06:10 No. So like whenever I look on mine so if you just search, I'm sure like GoPro dyes filters, they're always

Nur Tucker: 01:06:18 Okay. Red Interest. Ah, okay. Okay. I understand. I kind of understand. I am not sure but this could be the reason I made look into it and even get back to you later on. Are you taking readout flash

Raymond: 01:06:36 More than like yes. Yes. Correct.

Nur Tucker: 01:06:38 Huh? That is I think the reason, so what's happening is you're actually, we don't know, are you using a red filter? That's my understanding. We sometimes use magic filters is basic. There are a red filters. What happens is when you do not use flash, I mean actually if I want to use a flash, flash falls off very quickly, like two, three meters and then it pulls off very quickly. If you want to eliminate a wreck which goes on 35, 40 meters or even 50 meters, flash is mark on the work. Maybe just the front and then it's not going to work. So what for that kind of photography, we use magic filters called red filters. So you basically behind your Lens, you just put the red filter is called the magic filter. It basically I think helps the light to reach out to you more so it for longer. My understanding is light travels longer when you do that. I see. That's very, I understand. Yes. So it's allowing you to take photos, otherwise you could not have taken without strobes or at certain depths. For example, with a GoPro a, if you're going to go to 20 meters that we don't, that redness probably it will struggle to find a light.

Raymond: 01:07:55 I'm pretty sure it can only go down to 10 but that's still a great, a great tip for sure.

Nur Tucker: 01:08:01 Yeah. I don't know how many because I don't use GoPro. That could be an explanation, but I will look into it for you. I think that's the x, but look up magic filters and how they work. Yeah. Magic red filters underwater. How they work.

Raymond: 01:08:14 Well, that's been something that

Nur Tucker: 01:08:15 Has interested me. And for some reason I never ever once even considered to find out until I'm right here with you right now. So yeah. How many meters you use the 10 meters?

Raymond: 01:08:27 The GoPro? Yeah. I believe it's only waterproof down to 10 meters. And then of course they have extra housings that I think I think at most totally taking a shot in the dark here. But I think it goes down to 25, 30 Max. I think anything more than that, it just doesn't, it doesn't operate. You know, it's really made for just like, you know,

Nur Tucker: 01:08:44 I think that's the reason I would think of because that's the only time I've ever used the red filter. Probably that's what's going on. I hope that's the case. Well, I don't want my credibility.

Raymond: 01:08:57 Well, yeah, no, no, no, no, no. Nor I, I really want to thank you for, for coming on sharing your extreme wealth of knowledge when it comes to taking underwater photography. I truly do appreciate you sharing as much as you did for the listeners who want to know more about you, can you share where they can find and connect with you online?

Nur Tucker: 01:09:20 Oh Great. Thank you so much. First of all, tax for the opportunity. I really enjoyed this because the host is very friendly and I think they liked your questions. You ask very, very good questions. I'm really happy. Clearly you're very knowledgeable about photography yourselves. You can understand what the audience may be interested in. And it's important to basically pass on the knowledge of underwater to everybody because it's such a lost place. And a, it would be nice to protect the oceans as well with this knowledge. Now in terms of if anybody wants to follow up, I would be flaccid. I have a website it's called www north taco.com and you are t u c k e r.com. That's my website and you can get in touch with me through my website and you will see my underwater images. My equine images, which we didn't talk here today. You will see some exhibitions, some blog, et cetera. Otherwise I'm on Instagram. It's a, it's at North Tucker photography on Instagram. So these are the two places that you can get in touch with me. Anytime you have any questions, I'm happy to follow up.

Raymond: 01:10:30 Awesome. Again, I will I will link to those in the show notes for sure. So if anybody's listening, if they could just swipe up and click a link and connect with you right away. But again, I have to thank you again so much for coming in.

Nur Tucker: 01:10:42 No, thank you. I really enjoyed this. Thank you. I enjoyed this.

Raymond: 01:10:46 First thing I gotta say is, nor if you are listening to this interview back and you're listening right now. I just have to say thank you so much for sharing all of the information that you did. It was truly eye opening. You know, I don't think that a lot of people truly understand what goes into underwater photography. And you know, I myself was a bit arrogant going into this and not an arrogant, arrogant, I just didn't, what was all involved in that was definitely my biggest takeaway was, was how much you need to prepare beforehand before going out. Because this is definitely a genre of photography that requires very much thinking in, in planning beforehand. Because, because what you don't, you don't have another option, you know, a few, a few months ago in the Facebook group, it was either Michael or Jason who posted a, a video of an astronaut who was going out on a spacewalk and he forgot to put in the memory card in his camera, you know, and you can just go back inside the ship real quick and put it in and then go right back out.

Raymond: 01:11:55 You know, this is something that requires a lot of planning and when Nord taught me today was that planning ahead is what will bring you success, you know? And, and honestly, I think that's something that we can all bring into our respective styles of photography. So that is it for this week. I want to thank you again for listening to the beginner photography podcast. I want to invite you to come back and join me next week. So until then, I want you to get out. I want you to keep shooting, want you to stay safe. I want you to focus on yourself and that's it. I love you all. Bye.

Outro: 01:12:34 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

BPP 162: How To Make More Time For Your Photography

Photography can be a rewarding and fulfilling hobby. But it can be difficult to find time to shoot when you have a full plate with a family and full time job. Today I share 7 steps that will help you regain lost time so you can get out and spend more time shooting and practicing photography!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00 This week's episode of the beginner photography podcast. I show you how to make more time so that you can get out, practice and shoot more. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:11 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now, with you as always, husband, father, Ho brewer, La Dodger Fan, an Indianapolis wedding photographer, Raymond Hatfield. Welcome

Raymond: 00:41 back to this week's episode of the beginner photography podcast. As always, I am Raymond, your host and wedding photographer here in Indianapolis. Uh, and I'm also a father. As you heard all of these things in the, uh, in the intro, it has been a, uh, kind of a crazy week for the Hatfield household. Uh, several things, uh, you know, just like it, it's mostly just like a lot of annoyances that have, that have, uh, you know, been happening, which have made it hard sometimes to focus and, uh, and, you know, get done what I wanted to get done. So this week, uh, my daughter was, uh, she's three. She was playing in my office here. And, uh, I ha I use a canon 70 d for a video stuff because it has fantastic, uh, auto focus for four video. Uh, so she was here in my office and she was playing with the camera behind me and dropped it.

Raymond: 01:36 And, uh, the microphone port now no longer works, which is fine as a, uh, you know, as a, as a photography camera, if you're just taking pictures with the camera, that works just fine. It looks fantastic. But since I use it for video, I need that microphone port and now it is dead to me. So that was an annoyance. So I had to, uh, get ready to sell it as well as buy a new camera. So I had to and to, you know, splurge, which I really wasn't looking forward to or anticipating, uh, on a, a new Fuji [inaudible] t now shoot Fuji if you've been listening for a while, you know that I shoot Fuji and that the x t three is a one step up. It's, it's their newest camera. So I, uh, I went ahead and picked that up. Uh, and I got to take it to an engagement session this last weekend in Michigan.

Raymond: 02:29 Uh, and it worked. It worked well. You know, it's funny though, uh, every time you go to get a new camera, you get excited for the possibilities, right? Everything that you'll now be able to do that you weren't able to do before and you feel like it just going to completely transform your shooting experience. But in reality, and it really doesn't, everybody talks about the, uh, the, the performance on [inaudible] compared to the expo two, which is what I have and how much faster it is. And was it faster? I Dunno, maybe, maybe I'm just not in situations where I need like lightening fast, autofocus, you know, I'm usually just taking portraits of people who are standing still in front of my camera. So auto focus, while important, definitely on a wedding day and I, I see its importance. Maybe I just didn't really get a, a real feel for, for, uh, how it works, uh, in this new camera to the best of its abilities.

Raymond: 03:30 So, uh, but it was good. I mean, the engagement session turned out fine and it was beautiful. It was a sunset and, uh, engagement session on a, uh, on a pier on the west side of Michigan. So we got the, the sun going over or going down over the water, which was, which was absolutely beautiful. So there was that. Um, uh, our oldest, uh, son brought home lice from school. So, you know, I contemplated just, uh, shaving off my head or shaving off all my hair off my head because I don't want to deal with that. Um, my wife, uh, starts a new job she wants, she just started a new job this week. Um, and on top of that, I've been really excited to, to, to get out some, uh, I've had some new ideas for content. Uh, some, some, I think some really awesome content for you all as listeners.

Raymond: 04:23 Uh, and I'm going to get into that in a little bit, uh, but I'm really excited to, to share. But I found that the very recently I've been, uh, falling just completely head over heels in love for a film. Like never before, honestly. Uh, so I've been shooting film for for several years. I mean, not like religiously, right. I don't shoot, you know, a roll a week or anything like that, but I definitely, I definitely, I'd probably shoot like five rolls of film a year. So not a ton, but definitely enough to understand how from works. Um, but in the past a few months, there's just been something that was just, you know, ignited within me and now it's all that I can think about. It's all that I want to do. So I've got a new film camera, I bought a new medium format film camera, I bought 30 rolls of film.

Raymond: 05:19 Uh, now I need the, you know, the equipment to actually develop my film. But I've actually challenged myself, uh, cause all the supplies to develop your own film are probably, it's the initial cost that's always, you know, the most expensive, but it's probably gonna cost about $250, uh, to get started. Uh, but I've, uh, I've challenged myself that I will not buy the, um, uh, the all the equipment needed to develop film unless I can earn that, uh, unless I can earn the money, uh, extra through my photography business. So with me being able to think about film nonstop, I actually haven't had much time to shoot any film recently. So it just one of those things. But, uh, you know, as I was going through it, all of this with the, with the cameras and, and, and the lice and, you know, my wife's starting a new job and trying to book some more sessions for the business.

Raymond: 06:23 Uh, I've been thinking a lot about that struggle of time and we always are wishing that we, that we had more time. But you know, when you think about it, it just, it just simply, it just simply not possible. And when you think about it even more, we have the exact same amount of time in the same hours in a day as, you know, Jeff Bezos or Beyonce, you know, and these people can, can achieve amazing things in their life. So I've been trying to kind of figure out how to better control time and maximize time, uh, the time that we do have to make it work better for us. And I get, you know, uh, the struggles of, of feeling like you can't practice of, of having a lot on your plate. I mean, honestly, if, if you gotta be there for your family and you're busy at work, I get it. I am, I'm, I'm right there with you. And these feelings can lead to feelings of, of guilt that, you know, you have this nice camera but you don't know how to use it or, or lead to feelings of resentment towards other photographers whose photos you love because you're not there yet. But right now I want you to ask yourself just one question and that is, is photography important to you?

Raymond: 08:00 if I think that if something is truly important to you, then there has to be, uh, some level of sacrifice to getting where you want to be. Um, but this episode isn't just about, you know, cutting everything out of your life just so that you can take some pretty photos. There's going to be some real actionable information here that you will be able to use and hopefully regained some time. But the first thing that we need to fundamentally understand is that, uh, well, you know, the way that we're going about it right now is just wishing that we had a spare, you know, four hours, like a block of four hours to just go out and practice everything that you want to practice. And that is just, that's what is just simply near impossible, especially with a full time job and a family, you know, and these other responsibilities that you have.

Raymond: 09:02 But so this is the core fundamental thing that we need to realize is that we, we simply do waste time and we have time gaps throughout the day. These time gaps are, you know, your lunch break, waiting for an appointment, a while, dinner's cooking, uh, in, in the train or on the train or in an Uber, right? We might have five, 10 minute gaps throughout the day. And these may seem like small, you know, you sit down and like, oh, you know, can you wait for 10 minutes? Okay, yeah. So then you just sit down and your weight. And then what ends up happening is that we just, you know, scroll through Facebook or whatever. Um, so these 10 minute blocks, it just cause they feel small, but over the course of a year, they total up to more than 48 hours. So there's a lot of room there.

Raymond: 09:54 And these are the things that I'm trying to, uh, really expand upon. Uh, using these short chunks of time to, uh, better utilize, uh, uh, better, um, learn and better utilize my time essentially than that. You know, but I want you to know this one thing about photography. So I'm sure that, you know, you're feeling like, oh, you know, what is Raymond going to cut out? Now we've got to be diligent. This is going to be a lot of work. But I want you to know this one thing about photography and, uh, photography is very, very, very much like, you know, riding a bike. Once you gain a certain level of proficiency, it becomes almost effortless to maintain that knowledge. You know, once you learn how to ride a bike and you know, hold yourself up, then, you know, 10 years from now you can, you can do it again because you understand the mechanics.

Raymond: 10:49 Maybe you can't go, you know, get in the Tour de France, but, uh, you can't, you have a level of competency that lets you go out and leisurely ride a bike. And it's the same thing with photography. It's that initial time that you put in that is gonna going to, uh, uh, take up the majority of, of, of the, of the free time that you do have. So while you may listen to this and think, I can't do all of these things, like I said earlier, if something is important to you, there really has to be at least some level of sacrifice. And the thing with photography is it'll be temporary because you just need to get to that level of competency before you can, um, uh, before you can maintain your knowledge. So do these things until you feel comfortable behind the camera. Like you know, you have to grasp it.

Raymond: 11:53 Okay. And you may be asking yourself, how will you know if you have grasped it? How will you know if you are comfortable behind the camera? And the honest answer is you just will. And I can only, you know, equate this to like driving a car. And at first you're nervous because you're behind the wheel of this, you know, 4,000 pound speeding death trap. But you know, you find yourself a year later where a driver in front of you slams on the brakes a bit too hard and you have to swerve and get out of the way. But then you realize after the fact that you actually checked your mirrors before swerving and then you just know that you got it at that point. At some point you have that level of competency and you've now practice it enough to where, um, you got it. But there isn't a definitive moment, you know, you will find yourself in situations that you previously thought that were difficult.

Raymond: 12:48 But now you can clearly think your way through it. Now it may take two months for someone else and I could take two years for you. And it is impossible to give you that timeline simply because of outside factors that will determine how hard you are able to pursue photography. Now, photography, um, is broken up into several different segments, right? There's, there's hobbyists, there's amateurs, and there are professionals. Now Hobbyists and people who want to remain hobbyists can be more relaxed with their time. They, they are doing this out purely for leisure. And therefore, you know, you may still be excited about something and you may want to really learn it, but you don't have to be as diligent with your time as somebody who say wants to start a business one day and actually make money with their camera. So, uh, before we, you know, get too deep into this kind of philosophical stuff, uh, let's just go ahead and get on into the, uh, more step by step process.

Raymond: 13:58 Um, so I've kind of broken it down into, uh, seven different steps to regain more time throughout your life. So step number one is just to simply get set up for this. And by get set up, I mean, um, don't, uh, get lost in Youtube. That is the first place where a lot of people go, uh, to learn photography because generally photographers are very visual learners and, uh, so youtube is just, uh, it just makes sense and when you go, you can easily, easily, easily get lost. Um, and I have found a, as of you know, later than it should've been, but, uh, as of you know, the past few months instead of for me, instead of going to youtube and instead investing in some sort of course or program that tackles a very specific need that I have, I, uh, am able to learn that thing much quicker and much more efficiently.

Raymond: 15:00 I don't feel as lost, right? So I would recommend getting the creative live, uh, or just signing up for creative live because cause creative live is just a fantastic place to start because for one they have a huge range of um, different tutorials, different courses that can help you from everything from like, you know, Photoshop one-on-one to, you know, how to create a business and thrive. And what's better is that they have an app and then app on your phone can be used to replace, you know, whatever other social media you're using. And now you can fill those time gaps with some education. Now if generally these courses do, do cost money, um, but within the app you can actually watch one lesson free every single day. So again, if you're focusing on one thing, say, uh, you know, if, if you're focusing on, you know, this is more of an advanced topic, but like composites, like composite photography and Photoshop.

Raymond: 16:08 Now every time you have a time gap, you know, at least once a day you can go through and watch a lesson absolutely for free. So that is going to be a much better use of your time. Then, um, you know, just mindlessly scrolling through Facebook and I do this, I do this all the time. Um, so I, I still definitely have this problem and I need to get better on, on working on these things as well. But one of my favorite apps as of recently, um, to learn is actually been through the, uh, Google app. So Google has, uh, has a dedicated app. And I remember when it first launched, I thought, well, what's the point? It's just gonna be a search bar that makes no sense. Um, why not just use, you know, safari or chrome or whatever is built into your phone.

Raymond: 16:54 Um, but I downloaded the Google app and found very quickly that it's so much more than that. You almost have like your own feed of, of, of news and blog articles based on the things that you're searching for. So if you are searching for photography tutorials, if you are searching for how back button focus works, if you're searching for a, you know, uh, how different apertures affect your photo, Google's going to understand that you are interested in photography and that you're trying to learn more about photography and will then there start showing you more articles related to photography. And I can tell you that I've learned a lot of things that I didn't know about, um, photography through just kind of stumbling upon these reads. So it's a fantastic source just to be able to more passively, uh, find information because these short blogs or articles perfectly fit in these, you know, five, 10 minutes time gaps.

Raymond: 17:54 So there is, there's number one, okay. Number two. Number two is to stop doing something else. So stop doing something else right? At the end of the day, if you feel like, oh, I just didn't have enough time today, I wish that I could've gotten more done, then your time is filled with, you know, with things. And that is where, uh, you know, you can, you can obviously the desire to have more time comes from, but if we actually take an objective look at the amount of time that we have spent throughout the day, some of it, uh, I would say the majority of the time that can be regained is simply through, you know, binge-watching and mindlessly scrolling. These are definitely the two biggest ones. And I don't mean to say this, you know, to be, um, accusatory because I'm super guilty of this. I am, and I've just realized that like these are the two areas of my life to where if I, if I just, you know, if I just cut out TV, I could probably save, you know, two hours a day, one hour for big brother and then you know, another hour for, for dodger games.

Raymond: 19:03 Cause just cause they start so late. Otherwise, if dodger game started earlier in the day, then I'd be watching TV for four hours a day, that's for sure. But I gotta get some sleep at some point. So, um, I want to give you a fun little exercise. My wife doesn't think it was a fun exercise, but I think it's a fun exercise. If you have an iPhone, you can go into your settings and you can search for your screen time. So screen time tells you how long your screen has been on, uh, uh, during the day. And it'll also give you a breakdown of what apps are most used. And I'm willing to bet that you are on your phone for more than three hours a day. Now. Sure. You know, a phone can be a productive tool, right? I get that. Um, with phone calls, important emails, but surely not every moment. It's been diligently, um, you know, making progress on something. And I'm going to share with you my, uh, my screen time right now. So, uh, well my screen time is a little skewed because I had to use gps in my car when I was going up to Michigan and that was a three and a half hour drive. So, um, it says that my, uh, daily screen time on average is two hours and 50 minutes per day.

Raymond: 20:26 So it says that in the past seven days, I've spent four and a half hours on Facebook. Uh, obviously three and a half hours using, um, uh, maps. I was a, I spent two hours in the, uh, in the, uh, audible app, uh, two hours using my Google app, an hour and a half, uh, using, uh, you know, text 55 minutes on Youtube and then 40 minutes listening to a podcast. Uh, it would be a lot more, uh, on that podcast app. But, uh, I found a really good, I started listening to Pat Flynn's, um, newest book and that in audible on the way up to Michigan. So anyway, as you can see right there, I spent four and a half hours on Facebook just in the last seven days alone, right there. Even if I cut that in half, that's an extra, you know, more than two hours throughout the week.

Raymond: 21:20 So I think just being aware of where your time is going, uh, has really helped me kind of, um, being more, um, be, you know, just, just be more and be more aware when I'm actually like on Facebook. So, uh, if you are like me, you know, maybe on your lunch break, instead of us just scrolling through Facebook using that time to, you know, either listen to other podcasts about photography, a watch, you know, you're free lesson on creative live or, or read those photography blogs in the, in the Google app. Those are, those are things that have a have helped me. But once you, you have to stop doing something to be able to replace that time with something else that you do want to do. All right. Number three is don't overwhelm yourself. Pick one thing and then stick to it. When you're brand new to photography, you have one goal and that is to learn photography.

Raymond: 22:26 But learn photography is not a goal. It's just too broad and you can't learn everything about photography. Learn photography. It might be a lifetime goal cause it can never be achievable. But um, learn photography is not a good short term goal for beginners. Something like learn how to use a aperture or learn how to, you know, get out of focus backgrounds. That is a goal. That is a goal. So pick one and stick with it. So this typically leads, and this is what I love about photography, is that once you learn one thing, it typically leads to other things and the next obsession as well. So, uh, sticking to one thing is really going to help you stay focused and not, you know, what good is, you know, saving two hours a week by not being on Facebook and then just feeling like you've wasted it because you haven't learned anything extra cause you're just trying to learn everything.

Raymond: 23:25 Once you stop overwhelming yourself, narrow down to just one thing and then focus on it, you're gonna feel a lot better about learning photography. So remember how I mentioned that new content that I have, uh, in the, in the, in the beginning and the intro there. Well, uh, I want to share that with you now. If you are brand new, I have a brand new free ebook that you can actually download called picture perfect camera settings. So picture perfect camera settings is a, again, a free ebook that walks you through just how to get started with your camera settings in any situation. Uh, so from photographing your kids to shooting a wedding, uh, I actually share photos in the ebook and the settings that I used, uh, and, and, and share recommended starting points with those examples, uh, so that you can get set up and then make adjustments as needed.

Raymond: 24:19 And the Ebook is, again, it's completely free and if you're interested in it, you can download it just by heading over to beginner photography, podcast.com and then heading over to the resource tab at the top of the page. So here we are at number four and number four is, um, is just simply preplan preplanned, meaning that, uh, you have now gone through and you have audited your time and you have found spaces where you can either where you have either utilized those time gaps or you've cut down in other areas to be able to, um, have more time for you to use on photography, right? So you're learning as much as you can and you focused on one thing. You didn't overwhelm yourself. You are focusing on how to get out of focus backgrounds, right? But now the time has come to actually go out, you know, and shoot, and this is where pre plan comes in.

Raymond: 25:20 Cause after learning you should really make yourself an action plan of what it is that you need to do to really feel like you understand. Uh, and, and, and did you grasp that concept? Right? And you can, you can read every blog post, watch every youtube video, but if you actually, if you don't actually get out and spend time behind the camera, not really gonna be that, um, successful, it's not really going to help as much as it would, um, by, I got off topic there by, by simply just going out and doing that thing. So figuring out what it is that you need in order to, uh, be proficient in that, in whatever it is that you're trying to learn. So, you know, ask yourself, do you need a morning sunrise? Do you need someone just to be in front of your camera? Do you need a fast moving object?

Raymond: 26:19 You know, these are the things that you should figure out now so that when you do take the time to actually go out and shoot and be behind the camera, then you are going to be ready to snag this shot. Um, and just just be set up for it. You know, I've found that me as a, as a photographer, it's very hard for me to just go out and just like leisurely shoot. I can't just go out and say, oh, that's a nice thing. And then take a photo of it. I really have to have some sort of game plan in my head to be able to capture the photos to capture photos that I will be, uh, um, you know, happy with. Uh, so, so pre planning for me has been one of the biggest ones for sure. Now number five is to give yourself a time limit.

Raymond: 27:06 There is a lot to learn, you know, with photography you could listen to, you know, every podcast nonstop. You could watch educational courses, you could watch youtube videos, you can read blog posts all day long and still feel like you haven't got anything done. Now, if you take, you know, the hour before bed where you're usually watching the news, which somehow feels important but actually never leaves you feeling good or inspired or, or like, you know, you took anything away from it and then you use that time instead to educate yourself when the hour is up, just stop. Just stop. The key here is to, you know, obviously you're focused on one thing, how to, um, get out of focus backgrounds. You've now spent an hour watching videos on how to get out of focus backgrounds. Now stop and then really take that time to reflect on that information that you have learned.

Raymond: 28:12 Learn from it. It's a homebrewer reference right there. Speaking words. You're going to get out and brew anyway. That hour that you spend, you know, learning that one topic, it can be so much more powerful than three hours of just trying to consume it all. And I think the reason why we spend three hours trying to consume it all is because we always feel like there's one tip, one trick, one little hack that we are, you know, that we don't, that we're missing and that if we just watch one more video, we're gonna, we're gonna finally get it if we're going to finally understand it, but that's not how this works. I mean, maybe for some things, but for photography, really the education comes from putting in the time behind the camera. So spend as little time as you can learning and spend as much time as you can doing.

Raymond: 29:05 But since obviously learning, you're probably going to have more access to in your time gaps then then just utilize that time as much as you can. Okay. Number six is learn to delegate tasks or think of how you can speed up other tasks. So, um, for the past probably six months or so, uh, we started doing, uh, grocery pickup at our, at our local store. So, uh, we can, there's an app that we can download. We go online. Um, we order all of our food, like all the groceries that we're going to eat that week through this app. And then through this app, uh, they put all the groceries together, you know, the people at the store and then go ahead and put everything in a cart and bag it up for us. And then, um, when we arrived at the store, we just call a number and they come on to the car and then they loaded in the car.

Raymond: 30:01 Fantastic. And then we leave. Like we're done. We're good. We're done grocery shopping and it has saved us not only a good amount of money from only buying what we need because we not, you know, walking through every aisle thinking, Ooh, Macadamia nut brownies. That sounds delicious. You know, when we shouldn't be eating macadamia nut brownies. But it also saves more than an hour every single week from actual shopping. And you may be thinking, how the hell do you spend an hour at the grocery store shopping? And the answer is children that, that's simply it. It's still [inaudible]. They, you know, they want to look at things. They are always walking around. Um, you know, and it, it just takes time. So that right there by doing online pickup saves us 52 hours per year. That's an extra, you know, two and a half days. That is fantastic right there. Fantastic. So now that's one area of your life where you could delegate tasks, right?

Raymond: 31:06 Because I find that it is, once you come up with a meal plan, it's much easier to just shop for the ingredients in the app. It might take, you know, 12 minutes to do a week's worth of grocery shopping for us. And then while we're already out, we just stop and pick up groceries. So it's, it's, it's great. So we figured out how to delegate that task for us. And then the next thing is how to speed up other tasks. And, uh, I found that, um, you know, making meals is a huge, it takes a lot of time and I understand because, you know, we gotta eat, we're humans, you know, we want to eat good food and we got to spend time to make good food. Otherwise, you know, we would all just be eating microwave dinners, you know, three meals a day, every single day.

Raymond: 31:54 That's not good. That's unhealthy. So, um, I found that meal prepping has also saved us a good amount of time. This is sped up, um, other, you know, another task that we do because we know that we're going to have to eat every single day, multiple times a day. And that time, you know, from thinking to yourself, hmm, what is it that I want to eat? Let me go and see what we have. And then trying to Frankenstein something together and then, you know, cooking it and then putting it on the plate. Obviously you got to eat it and then cleaning it all up can take a good amount of time. Honestly, you know, more than an hour a day, uh, just in cooking. So what we decided to do is just to meal prep all of our lunches and dinners the Sunday before the week starts. Now it takes about three hours.

Raymond: 32:44 It does take, you know, a good amount of time, but three hours on a Sunday and you get all of your food ready for the entire week as opposed to every day, you know, deciding what to eat, seeing if you have anything cooking and then cleaning it all up has been a real, a real time saver. That's four extra hours per week that you can spend. You know, now at, you know, dinner time, you have something that you can just throw in the oven and then when it's done, you know, eat it while you're waiting for to cook. There's a time gap. There's where you can learn. There's where you can go in your back yard and do is where you can practice. You know, if you're not stuck, you know, uh, in front of the stove or whatever, cooking a meal, then you have that time to take your camera and you know, you don't have to create massive photo shoots, just go out into your backyard.

Raymond: 33:41 I think that a backyard is a great place to learn photography, so, so now you have that time to do that. Okay. We have made it to number seven in this seven step series. So let's go ahead and recap real quick what we have learned. Number one, get set up. Find Out, you know, make a decision on what it is that you want to learn and how you want to learn and then, uh, be prepared so that when these time gaps arise, you can take advantage of them. Stop doing something else. You know, I shared that I spent almost, almost five hours in the past seven days on Facebook. Uh, I know that I can stop doing a lot of that and I can cut that down a considerable amount and then that frees me up to do more things. Uh, in photography. Number three is don't overwhelm yourself.

Raymond: 34:40 Pick a topic, stick to it. Quote Unquote. Learn photography is not a goal. Something like, learn how to, uh, use aperture is a better goal. Number Four, pre plan. Get Ready, uh, for your shoot so that when the time comes, you're not wasting time and wishing that you could have identity differently or better. Number five, give yourself a time limit. If you cut down the amount of time that you can learn per day, you are going to maximize that time. You're really gonna take that time seriously. And then when you do that, when you take in less information, you have more brain capacity to be able to expand on those ideas and uh, let them ferment. As I say, number six is delegate tasks or think of ways that you can speed up other tasks that you do every single day. That's where I shared, uh, you know, using grocery pickup, which is free by the way.

Raymond: 35:40 And then it's crazy to me. It's free, so awesome. It is. It's one of the best. And then, uh, speed up other tasks is meal prepping throughout the week. And then those things save a lot of times. So, so now we have, let's just assume that we have saved ourselves two hours in a week and now we have a two hour block of time. And that's, that's the dream, right? You're like, Whoa, what am I going to do with this time? No, you don't want to say, Whoa, what am I going to do with this time? Hopefully you have preplanned and you know exactly what you want to do with that time. But one of the biggest hurdles that, um, a lot of people have to go through, and myself included, but I really wasn't aware of this until my wife made it, you know, very clear is that you need to eliminate guilt and guilt is, is, is a mindset guilt.

Raymond: 36:31 You know, while while all these tips will help you grow, you don't man, you know, you do need to spend time behind the camera. I've said that you just simply can't learn photography without spending time behind the camera. So, but again, I understand that, that, that guilty feeling of like, well, I've been gone all day. How can I spend more time away from the family just to do some, you know, just to take some pretty pictures. But I really think that, you know, sitting down and telling your spouse or your partner how important it is for you to learn photography from, from having a creative outlet or, or more, you know, to build the foundations of a business. Try to make a realistic time to shoot. You know, I just said that you have this two hour chunks. Let's just use one hour, maximize that time and schedule it immediately following work or even before work.

Raymond: 37:31 You know, maybe you want to get that sunrise shot, but if you do it, you know, on your way to work or on your way home from work, then that reduces the amount of time away from your family. And I know this, my, my wife has told me before that sometimes, you know, she won't go to yoga class or dinner with friends because she feels guilty that I'm home with the kids all day and then she comes home and then just leaves, you know. And while I appreciate her for thinking of me, it was also so, so, so important to focus on yourself, which has been the main theme of the podcast this year. So at some point you do have to work on eliminating that guilt that you have because that is the only way that you can grow. And if you can't get out and you know, put time in behind the camera, how far do you think you can really go?

Raymond: 38:24 You know, how you can, you know, uh, uh, doctors could watch every single, you know, uh, uh, not lab like procedure. They can watch every single procedure on video multiple times. But it's not until you actually do the thing that you, that you feel like you've learned it and that you've grasped how it works in photography is exactly the same. So if you have kids at home, you know, if you work a full time job, don't, you know, cut everything out just to pursue photography. What we're talking about here is imagine if you had an extra hour per week to go out and photograph an hour to go out and you know, go to a state park or photograph the kids or go downtown and practice street photography or set up a shoot with, with a friend or somebody who's willing to be in front of the camera.

Raymond: 39:22 Imagine what that would do for you one hour every single week. And I, I personally can cut out an hour, uh, just from being on, you know, Facebook, I could do that easily, easily and then no other time is taken away. You know, I didn't have to do anything else. It's possible. It may be hard, but it's possible. And again, if, if you, if something is really important to you, there is some level of sacrifice that has to be made in order to accomplish that. And I really think that if you tried hard, you could find that one hour per week to actually go out and shoot without interrupting almost any other area of your life. And when you do that, you're going to feel more fulfilled. You're going to be happier, you're going to obviously accelerate your learning, you're going to become a better photographer. Like that's the path to be able to do that.

Raymond: 40:24 So there you go. And Again, oh yeah, I was gonna, I was gonna wrap that up with vet that it's, it can be temporary. You know, if you, if you, because you just need that, that certain level of competency before you can just maintain the skill and the knowledge. Okay, so that is a, that is it. Those are my seven tips to um, gain more time in your life and use it to practice and learn photography. Again, I know that this is not easy, but it can be done, I promise you. So that is it for this week. I want you for real this week. I want you to get out. I want you to shoot, I want you to be safe. And most of all I want you to focus on yourself. All right? Until next week. I love you all.

Outro: 41:16 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond. And other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

BPP 161: Daniel Milnor - Story Telling without Social Media

Daniel Milnor is a self proclaimed creative evangelist, disinclined to social media, film shooter his work can be found in the Los Angeles museum of art, and the George Eastman house. Today we talk all finding and telling the best story.

Daniel Milnor is a self proclaimed creative evangelist, disinclined to social media, film shooter his work can be found in the Los Angeles museum of art, and the George Eastman house. Today we talk all finding and telling the best story.

Become A Premium Member is access to more in-depth questions that help move you forward!

In This Episode You'll Learn:

  • How Daniel got started with photography

  • Why Daniel went to college to learn photography

  • What Daniel hoped to learn by going to college

  • If Daniel thinks college is still relevant for photographers

  • What Daniel has to capture to consider a shoot a success

  • How much of Dan’s stories are planned out

  • How Daniel goes about planning a trip and story to capture

  • How shooting film has made Daniel more connected to his work

  • Why Daniel swears off social media

  • How not being on social media has effected his work

  • What Daniel feels is the best way to share his work if it’s not on social media

Resources:

40A047E0-FDB6-402C-80DB-CD81AAA2A96F@domain.jpeg
E630C85B-F8CC-4C31-B75C-813E784C4CEB@domain.jpeg
2C64F501-86C0-4F27-B524-9946121EC440@domain.jpeg

Did you enjoy this episode? Check out more recent interviews with other great guests!

Full Episode Transcription:

Disclaimer: The transcript was transcribed electronically and may contain errors that do not reflect accurately what the speaker said. Because of this, please do not quote this automated transcript.

Raymond: 00:00:00 Welcome to the beginning of photography podcast. This week we're talking all about how to find until the right story with your camera. So let's get into it.

Intro: 00:00:10 Welcome to the beginner photography podcast with Raymond Hatfield, the podcast dedicated to helping you grow your photography skills. Raymond interviews the world's top photographers in their field to ask questions that will get you taking better photos today. Now with you as always, husband, father, Home brewer, La Dodger Fan and Indianapolis wedding photographer Raymond Hatfield. Oh, welcome

Raymond: 00:00:39 back to this week's episode of the beginner photography podcast with you. As always, I am Oh Raymond Hatfield and today is a fantastic interview. You know, sometimes I have interviews where the photographer is very technical minded person and we talk a lot about, you know, settings or logistics and you know, how to be in the right place at the right time. And then other times I speak to photographers who were very emotionally driven and they look at the big, uh, idea of photography and it's more of a feeling for them than a strict manual of how to take photos. And very rarely do I get to talk to somebody who is both. And I think that today's guest, um, is, is just that is just that they're there. Whatever it is that your mind focuses on, you're going to find a lot in this interview that is just fantastic and I had such, such a great time.

Raymond: 00:01:37 So I'm super excited, uh, to get into this. But first I want to give a listener shout out a listener shout out this week it goes to Danni Leigh who left a five star iTunes review. Danni says, this podcast is wonderful. I love hearing the journey of each photographer and love how Raymond Geeks out asking them questions. He seems just as excited as his listeners to be listening to something new. Raymond does a great job making sure terms can be understood by everybody. I really recommend this podcast tech, everyone interested in photography. Danni. Oh my gosh, thank you so much for that review. And I cannot stress enough how, how happy I am that a, that you picked up on my excitement as well because, uh, when the podcast was started, the idea came from, I just simply wanted to talk to photographers who were better than me.

Raymond: 00:02:33 And, uh, I continued to do that. It's, I'm not here to just ask, you know, um, how do you take photos cause I don't care about that. I want to like really get into it. I don't care about what gear you have. I want to get into it. I want to find out more about you as a photographer, how, how you see the world and then also those technicals as well. Um, but I think one of the most important quotes I've ever heard in my entire life is, uh, or I guess it's a piece of advice is just simply be the dumbest person in a room. Because when you're the dumbest person in the room, all you can do is learn and soak up more information. And then that is how you're going to skyrocket your growth. And, and, and learn and grow and become a better photographer.

Raymond: 00:03:15 And this podcast is your room. I want, I want you to be the dumbest person in this room, right? Because when I speak to other photographers, I'm the dumbest person in the room and I try to learn more from them. And I hope that by you listening, you feel that same way, that wow, there's such a big, vast world of photography out there and there's so much to learn and I hope that it gets you excited and as excited as, uh, as I get as well. So thank you again, Danni, so much for leaving the podcast, a review. I truly do appreciate that. So we are going to get into today's interview right now with Dan Milner. Now, Dan Milner is a, uh, he's a documentarian, photographer, so he goes out on assignments and shoots, uh, all over the world and does new and interesting things. And I think that that is a really interesting, and it is a, a, a fantastic interview that we're going to get into right now.

Raymond: 00:04:12 But, uh, I want you to know that there are some, um, I had some difficulties with my audio recorder. It recorded all of Dan's audio extremely fast. Uh, so I had to fall back on just the standard audio that was recorded with Skype. So, uh, if you can get through kind of the cracks and the pops and a little bit of a freezing from time to time, I tried to clean as much of it up as possible, then I know that you're still going to get a ton out of this episode. So, uh, let's just go ahead and get on into it right now. My interview with Dan Milner, today's guest is Dan Milner, a self proclaimed creative evangelist, uh, with over 25 years of professional photography experience disinclined to social media. He's a film shooter and his work can be found in the Los Angeles Museum of art as well as the George Eastman House today.

Raymond: 00:05:04 I am so incredibly excited to talk to Dan. Dan, thank you so much for coming on the podcast. Of course. Thanks for having me. I love talking about this stuff. This is, this is, this is a fun one for me. I learned about you through a mutual friend of ours, Mark Silber [inaudible] a quite a guy. I mean this guy obviously has been in it for a long time and the way that he kind of sees photography is very, um, very different compared to how a lot of other photographers today talk about photography. And when you two sat down and had your conversation, I knew that you as well would be a perfect fit for the podcast to kind of share your, your story of photography. You have a very, a different take than a lot of other photographers. But before we really get on into all of that, can you take me back to when you first picked up a camera? What was that like for you? I think you have to go

Daniel Milnor: 00:05:58 a slightly further back. It wasn't what made me pick up a camera was my mom picking up a camera. So when I was a kid, uh, we lived from Indiana to want to Texas and my mom had a Pentax k 1000 and Kodachrome and she had this caliber. The pace. Yeah, the, it's probably her camera's probably still out there. Someone's probably still using it. Those things are bulletproof and up everywhere I went we had that Halliburton case. So in Wyoming, if we were in one truck, he always had to move the Halliburton case over and mom was shooting all the time. So the idea of recording with the camera was always kind of in the back of my head. And, uh, I started actually writing before I did photography, which I still do, I write every day, but I, I would, I just started writing like fictional short stories when I was in elementary school and I would write down conversations that I heard and my parents talking to their friends.

Daniel Milnor: 00:06:50 And I don't know why I did that exactly, but I just started recording and the camera became sort of an extension of the writing, whereas I just, I, and I still feel the same today. I just have this need to record things. No one sees what I'm recording or reads or any of that. I just do it constantly. And it's an addiction. It's a curse, whatever you want to call it. So, uh, and then I've got out of high school and, uh, I actually had a scholarship as a shooter, shotgun shooter, believe it or not, uh, which was a really good scholarship and it was to a very good academic school. And the coach that taught the, uh, the shooting team that traveled internationally, it was a really amazing thing. He had seen me shooting when I was a little kid and he came to my dad and said, you know, with the pay when he's older, if he can qualify, get into the stool to the school, I'll give him a scholarship as a shooter.

Daniel Milnor: 00:07:40 And so my life was headed towards that. And also studying geology. I really wanted to be a geologist. And the admissions building and the admissions program at that call was, was moving. And in the process of moving, they lost a huge number of incoming transcripts, including mine. And so the dean of admissions called my mom and said, look, it's our fault. We've locked, we have no record of him. So he's going to have to go somewhere for a semester and then transfer in the following semester. And the only school left open was San Antonio College, which was a two year community school. I knew nothing about. All I knew was that, all I thought at the time was the only people that go to sac are the ones who can't get in anywhere else. And so I was sort of heavy hearted. I went down there, I signed up for basic classes, English history, whatever, that would transfer over to this other school.

Daniel Milnor: 00:08:28 And low and behold, I find out that they have one of the best journalism programs in the country run by a guy named Jerry Townsend. And Jerry was like a no nonsense guy who, who basically saw some images that I'd made and said, hey, if you want to be a photographer, I'll give you a scholarship to be a thugger. Wow. And that was it, man. And I had, I walked in Rudy Gonzalez, who's a photographer. I think at the rocky mountain, no, the rocky mountain news has gone, I don't know where Rudy is now, but Rudy, it was amazing. Photographer was the person I met in the program and he walked up to me with a and an old icon with a screw mount 35 millimeter. And he gave me this little printout that was the sunny 16 rule for exposure. And he gave me an assignment. So literally I had never used a camera for real. And I was, I was going out on assignment. It was that quick. And you learned very, very quickly working on a daily paper, wood blinds. It was a weekly paper, I think at the school. Anyway, it freaked me out. A, I was terrified for about five minutes. And then I just said, I have to own this and I'm not gonna, I'm not gonna go halfway. I'm gonna make this my life. And that was it.

Raymond: 00:09:30 Wow. So let me, let me go back there. When you, when you first showed up to San Antonio College and you decided to take this journaling or journalism class, was it, um, was it through? Uh, the stories that you were writing, is that what you were, were getting the scholarship in or was it through the, the photographs that you had shown?

Daniel Milnor: 00:09:51 So, my mom and I were driving home one day and San Antonio and there was a massive flood happening. And so, uh, when I got out of high school, I was in the, uh, uh, merchant marine program out of Texas a and M at Galveston. That was like a four month program. And one of my roommates on the ship had a camera and he was kind of serious about photography and the ship had a photographer. And I remember being in that ship and watching the ships photographer work. And I had never seen a human move the way that this guy moved and I couldn't figure out why he was moving the way he was. And then after about a month and a half on the ship, I realized he was following light. He was looking at light and he was moving himself into positions for light. And I had never thought about light before.

Daniel Milnor: 00:10:34 So the I, when I got off the merchant marine ship, I picked up a camera. I thought I found an old camera in a closet in our house and I just started wandering around with this thing, no idea what I'm doing. My mom and our driving home one day and there was a flood happening and we come to a low water crossing and there's a school bus full of kids that's about to get swept over this bridge. And the army's brought in, or the air national guard or somebody brought in this big Chinook double screw. Hello. They're trying to lift this bus out. And so we're just standing there watching and I'm like, you know, hey, I have a camera. Maybe I should take pictures of this. So I shoot a couple of pictures and then I shoot a couple of other pictures during the flood and I'm at lunch at school with a bunch of friends sitting around the table and I have these little four by six.

Daniel Milnor: 00:11:14 This is on the table and I'm showing my friends like, Hey, look how great I am. I did these pictures and this instructor walks by and he leans over and he goes, who took those? And I thought I was in trouble, so I'm like, they're not mine. I didn't take them. And so we're all sitting there and then one's like, nope, don't know where they came from, who not ours. And he goes, I'm not leaving. I know one of you took these and that was Jerry towns and actually he was the head head of the journalism department. And I said, okay, I didn't want my friends to get in trouble. I said, okay, these are mine. And he said, I'll give you a scholarship if you want to be a photographer. And that ends, and this was not, this was a community call it, the scholarship was probably less than a hundred dollars.

Daniel Milnor: 00:11:50 It probably paid for my books. But what I didn't realize was that Jerry was, had a really remarkable career and Jerry was driven. And again, he was no nonsense. This was prior to the Internet. This was prior to digital technology. This was prior to politically correct political correctness. This was prior to having to basically baby people who were getting into photography. This was high pressure, high demand, you know, do not mess up if you come back without an image, don't bother coming back kind of thing. And so you're on assignment and people who are there are taking it very seriously, whether you're a writer or a photographer. So the first assignment I had was as a writer and I got sent to a bomb threat and one of the buildings on campus. And on the way there I thought, I wonder why they're sending natives. I'm proud I'm expendable. And then I got over there and they said, hey, we don't have a photographer free, can you make pictures? And I said, I don't really know. And that's when Rudy gave me the camera and the, and the Lens and the sun 16 rule for exposure. And I, I did a couple of assignments and I never went back to writing, even though I write everyday, I never did it for a career.

Raymond: 00:12:53 Oh my gosh. Wow. What a, what a way to get into photography. Like, Hey, here's the camera. Uh, let's go photograph a possible, uh, life, uh, you know, ending situation here. That's insane.

Daniel Milnor: 00:13:04 And the, the funny thing is the first, the first assignment I had after that was to photograph a speaker who, I don't remember who it is now, he's a well known guy. I show up and it's in an auditorium and there are at least 300 people in this auditorium and I'm like, I have a 50. I'm like, I have to be right next to this guy. I have to be up on the stage or in front. And everybody in the room is going to see me. And I stood in the back of the auditorium for a couple of minutes, minutes and I was really nervous. I thought, man, I don't want to do this. And then I thought, you know, I made a decision that I've stuck with for the rest of my life and it was a great decision how I came to it. I don't know, but I, I just said, look, I'm never going to see anyone in this room ever again. And if I go up there and trip and fall over and everyone gets a laugh out of it, that's probably the worst thing that can happen. So I'm going to own this and I'm going to go and move or I need to move to get the pictures. And I did and I still remember what the picture looked like. I still remember where it ran in the, in the, um, the paper. The school was called the ranger and uh, yeah, it was, it was great. It was a great way to learn photography.

Raymond: 00:14:09 Yeah. Very cool. Very cool. Especially to get one of your first images printed. That's a, that that's pretty rare. So that, that's, that's awesome. Um, so I kind of want to know a little bit more about, cause this is at that moment you had decided that you were going to stay at San Antonio College. Is that, is that correct to, to fulfill this? Uh, oh no, that's not what happened.

Daniel Milnor: 00:14:31 No, I, I was there knowing it was a short term gain. I still had the shooting scholarship and the geology school in play had, I wanted to go that direction. But once I started shooting photographs, I, I was like, oh, this is kind of what I've been waiting to do my whole life. And so I looked around for a four year that was in state that had a good photo journalism department. And at the time this, that the school that stood out was a Texas ut Austin. Oh. So, and at the time, this is pretty funny now because, uh, ut Austin, like all other colleges in America have changed dramatically and they're so, they're so expensive. It's what people are paying to go to school there now as beauty on my comprehension. So literally, this was like two weeks before classes started and I was like, I think I want to go to Texas.

Daniel Milnor: 00:15:23 So I applied and they were like, yeah, sure. Come on up. I got, I got in, I paid more for books than I did for tuition. I think my tuition was less than 300 bucks for the, for the semester. Oh my goodness. And Yeah, and I studied photojournalism and I had minors in Spanish and anthropology and fo it was good. The program during that there in the 80s had been one of the premier programs in the country. And when I got there, I would say that the program was in somewhat of a trough. It hadn't sort of kept up with some other programs like the University of Missouri, Western Kentucky, these were photojournalism schools. Um, and then you had the big art schools, like you know, our art center in Pasadena. You had Parsons and an ICP in New York and you know, there was a very different kinds of things.

Daniel Milnor: 00:16:07 We were very specific to photojournalism. And so I realized very shortly after getting to school that whatever I was going to come out with was going to be on my shoulders, not from the faculty saying you're going to do this. Because the faculty was training us to go in one direction. And I realized that the media lead that I needed to go in another direction and consequently I sort of fell out of favor, I think with some of the faculty who just looked at me as either arrogant or, uh, something. Because I said, look, I want to know black and white. I want to photograph black and white, but I need to know color. Because if I get out, I want to be a magazine photographer. Everybody shooting transparency, I can't, I can't shoot, try excel all the time. And they were like, no, no, no.

Daniel Milnor: 00:16:48 You're going to shoot tri-x and a 28 millimeter and everyone's going to love it. And I knew that was not going to be the case. And so I got very fortunate, um, I started shooting color right away and I bought a police scanner, an old police scanner, and every night I would drive from my horrible apartment to the I 35, which splits Austin, uh, north to south. And I would park park underneath the [inaudible] and I would turn on the police scanner and I would just wait because East Austin at that time was very unsettled. There were huge gang problems, there were, there was a lot of crime. There's a lot of stuff happening and at the time I thought, oh, as a photo journalist, this is kind of what I'm supposed to photograph. So I would go and I and I just would show, you know the police scanner would crackle and it would say, you know, box alarm, whatever.

Daniel Milnor: 00:17:39 Or they had codes for domestic violence, they had codes for shooting and I learned what all the codes were and I would show up. Oftentimes I was the first person on the scene. I'd be there before any law enforcement. And this was another education that I never saw coming was how to navigate in the field. And when you, when your police scanner goes off and you roll up on a crime scene and there's no one there, it's not just about photography, it's about all these logistics and scenarios that you have to understand before you can actually get in. Make successful pictures and get out, you know, where do you park your vehicle? If you park and you block an emergency responder, you're in trouble. If something goes sideways and your truck is blocked and you can't get out, then you're in trouble. Um, all these different things, you know, it does.

Daniel Milnor: 00:18:22 Somebody need help for more than, you know, it does that. Trump's making pictures kind of things. And so while I was out one night photographing a house fire, a guy approached me, older guy, suit and tie, oddly enough even at a fire and he was the Austin Fire Department photographer, guy named Erwin had. And Irwin said, you know, I've seen you around at these fires. Who are you? What are you doing? And I told him, it's photo journalism student. And he said to me, do you want to know how to print color? And I said, yeah, because we don't, we're not, they're not going to let us print color for like another two years. He said, come to the fire department, I have a dark room, I'll teach you how to print color. And he did. And Irwin was, was really great. He was a guy that like bent over backwards to help me.

Daniel Milnor: 00:19:06 And, uh, you know, at school you had these Joe blow processors to do a color print, which take about 10,000 years to make a print. And you know, they're good and they're fun. But after a while you're like, okay, I'd love to not have to spend 45 minutes on this print. So Irwin had an automated color processor and an enlarger with a color head. And he taught me not only how to print color, but then also told me how to use color settings to printed black and white. And that like blew my mind open. So I got lucky and, um, I had a good run at the paper. I started to freelance while I was still in school. I was doing assignments for the daily Texan, which was the paper at ut. Really good paper. And the people I was working with. I mean, um, John McConico who went on to AP, John Moore, who's at AP John Fronts, uh, John Mark Bizu who won two Pulitzers at AP, you know, these were my, um, we didn't hang out a whole lot, but these were my, my fellow students, Scott Dalton, who, who's covered the drug war in Columbia for 10 years.

Daniel Milnor: 00:20:04 Um, I went to school with some really amazing photographers. Oh my [inaudible]

Raymond: 00:20:09 goodness. So just before we move on, how long were you a a, a nightcrawler going and photographing these, you know, possibly horrific scenes. How long were you doing that for?

Daniel Milnor: 00:20:21 I did that in Austin for a couple of years. And then my first internship as I got out of school and I looked forever to try to find an internship. And this is kind of a long story with that. I'll spare you the details, but at the time it was incredibly difficult to find internships and I kept getting rejected for all kinds of reasons. Very rarely was it about imagery. It was always about extraneous things that would keep me from getting these internships. But I finally got one, I think, I don't know for certain, I think someone called on my behalf, I think I know who it was that called them on my behalf, but he has never admitted doing so. But anyway, I've got this internship, Arizona, Republican Phoenix, and it was amazing because the republic had a huge budget. It's, you know, it's a big paper.

Daniel Milnor: 00:21:05 It's state paper. They did international, national, local news. They covered the whole state that a big staff. Um, but I worked the three to 11, 3:00 PM to 11:00 PM shift as an intern and after seven o'clock, because it was a morning paper, it, unless a UFO landed in the middle of downtown, nothing you shot after 7:00 PM was good to make the paper basically. So I had my police scanner and I would leave the paper and I would drive straight south on central avenue and I would pull over and south Phoenix at the seat at the time was a war zone. It was not a happy place to be after sunset. And so for me as a photographer again, and I was like, oh, I'm a journalist. I'm supposed to be doing this stuff. So I started shooting the same thing and it was worse than Austin.

Daniel Milnor: 00:21:53 It was, you know, every night there were, there were, there's a lot of bad stuff happening. And so I got to know some of the police department. I got to know some of the fire department. And I also began to understand editorial policy and marketing and advertising and how what you saw in the paper was not necessarily representative of the news because I started coming back with images that were not popular in the newsroom because management saw them and said, no one's going to buy the paper if we're showing this stuff. And we're trying to sell ads for golf courses and they don't want to see domestic violence shootouts in south Phoenix. And so I come. And so what I started to do is I compiled this huge folder of all the work that I've made in Phoenix in the middle of the night. And when I quit at the paper and moved on, I went to the photo editor and just dropped it on his desk and said, you know, you can kind of deny that this is happening in the city, but this is happening in the city.

Daniel Milnor: 00:22:48 You know, we can't, you're supposed to be a news organization. You have to cover everything. Yes, the golf course is important. Yes. The Phoenix Suns are important and the cardinals and I get it. It's, you know, and that's the thing about a community paper is you have to cover the community. And thankfully by the time I left South, Phoenix was making some progress and I don't know what it's like now, but you know, most of these places have been gentrified to some degree. The violence levels are down. I mean, there are exceptions in the country where there's some pretty dicey places out there. But, um, I learned a lot, you know, and the fact that I could speak Spanish, uh, the police loved it because I would show up sometimes at like domestic disputes and translate where the police, yeah, they would say, hey, you speak Spanish.

Daniel Milnor: 00:23:27 You guys speak Spanish? Well, Hey, what would he saying to her? And vice versa. And, and I'm like, and at the time I forget what I was probably like 22 and I'm, I'm walking around like, is this really happening? And uh, and just crazy scenes, you know, I mean, I got shot at once in [inaudible] at a little league baseball game. There were people all over the place. There had to be 2000 people around. And I was photographing a, a kid who was part of the gang in Austin and I'd known him for a long time. We'd spent like four months together and we were hanging out. Uh, I was with his gang and we were all sort of hanging around drinking beer, hanging out in this little section of the buttery over that was theirs. And someone came in and said, hey, so-and-so from this rival gang called Egv east of audio there, he's at this other location and you know, we've got to go get him.

Daniel Milnor: 00:24:18 And so they all run to go. And I was like, well, I want to go to take pictures. And I didn't know what get him meant. No. I was like, oh, they're probably gonna fight. And so we roll up and I get out of the car and like an idiot first of all at a 24 millimeter lens on, which is mistake number one. Number two, I've strobe on major mistake number three. I put myself in the worst possible position, which was between the guys that I was with and between the guy that they were going after, but there were people all over it. So there was a little league baseball game happening to my right. There was another one behind me and I was like, nothing's gonna, nothing's gonna happen here. And then I heard a window break car window and it just, I saw literally it was like, it was as if a gunshot had gone off.

Daniel Milnor: 00:25:07 All the people at the little league games collectively went like this. Everybody froze, duck and started taking cover. And again, I'm like looking around, not quite putting it together. And then full auto rounds guide, the guy whose car window was broken gets it's trapped in the parking lot. He stands up, turns around with fully automatic and just unloads on the parking lot. So like I'm hearing these rounds hitting and I'm like, maybe I should take cover. I didn't take any photographs, which is not not good. But I remember looking down at my feet and there was a mom and a little boy behind the front wheel of a car and, and you could tell that this was not, this was not the first time they'd had to do this, that this was, this kind of violence was relatively common. And so the whole, you know, 10 seconds goes by, I have no idea what I did.

Daniel Milnor: 00:25:58 I wake up and I'm next to her on the ground behind the car and the guy, that's stupid. The shooting is driven away. And I waited and I waited for the police to show up and nobody showed up. Nobody came. And about 10 minutes later, the games were gone again, everyone's back plan. And I was like, wow, this is a, you can get used to anything. Wow. So did tell me that you made the conscious decision not to take any photos in that moment? No. Hell No. I didn't know what I was doing. I froze. I mean, I, there's a, there's a 10 to 15 second period where I have no idea what I did. I got from standing down to the ground. So I did something smart. But the other thing was the distance involved with a 24 and a strobe, if I'd pop the strobe, it would have highlighted my position, which is probably not a good idea. And with a 24, he would have been, you know, microscopic in the frame and I just, it was just a bad move. It was bad all the way around, but I didn't get shot. So.

Raymond: 00:26:54 Yeah. Well, yeah, you're here today and I'm, I'm, I'm thankful for that. I'm sure it's, you're thankful for that as well. Wow. Uh,

Daniel Milnor: 00:26:59 but I also realized that, that, you know, the sort of getting shot at thing was not something that I was keen on. Oh yeah. And the other thing was the idea of having a picture of the guy doing the shooting was not what was intriguing to me. What was intriguing to me was the game starting again five minutes later. And the fact that this was conditioned, this was a conditioned response to, to perpetual simmering sort of crime and violence and you get used to it and all of a sudden, you know, uh, it's normal. It's like, oh, they're not shooting at me. This is totally fine. I'll be fine. That's what was intriguing to me. That is really the moment that I went from being a photo journalist to a documentary photographer that I was not the front lines and stuff was not, I don't think I have the fortitude to do the front line stuff, but what I did have was the fortitude to do longterm stories.

Raymond: 00:27:54 Yeah. I definitely want to get into to you as a documentarian and doing these long form stories, uh, as I think that sets you apart from, from a lot of other photographers. But as you mentioned as well, a lot of people are, you know, we're, we're still kind of, uh, under the impression that you should go to college to make it in a profession that you want to be in. But with the rising cost of college, a lot of people are wondering, you know, is photography something that you really need to go to school for? So I'm sure that when you made the decision to go to, uh, Texas and Austin to, uh, to go specifically pretty much for photography, I want know, uh, what did you hope to have or what did you hope to know by the time you left school? And do you think that it's still as important to go to college today, uh, as it was when you went,

Daniel Milnor: 00:28:50 what did I help to get out of it, you know, fame for

Raymond: 00:28:52 in a famous I right out of college.

Daniel Milnor: 00:28:55 No. And uh, and I had an apartment right in the middle of all the sororities, which was a good move. That was, that was a good move. Uh, in hindsight now I ha, let me think about that. What was my goal? Getting out? I wanted to be a professional photographer. And at the time there were, there was a clear foot path that you followed to go from a to B to c to d and how you became a photographer. Uh, the short answer to the second part of the question is it's not necessary. It's not critical, essential to go to college. However, in my opinion, it is critical to actually learn photography. So whether you do that in college or you do that with a mentorship program where you do that through a series of workshops or a combination of all the above, if you're going to be a legitimate photographer, and this is, people are going to take offense at some of this I know, but there's a big difference between being an online photographer and being an actual photographer.

Daniel Milnor: 00:29:49 There are two industries working simultaneously. You have the online photo community and you have the on on earth, realtime human being, editors, agents, agencies, assignments and professional photographers. These are two entirely separate groups of people that oftentimes don't even recognize one another. They don't know any, they don't know each other. So, for example, you can have a guy that has a million Instagram followers who does youtube that has a ton of followers and blah, blah, blah. And if you said to any agent or editor or photo art buyer in the photo industry and said, have you ever heard of this person? There's a good chance they're going to say no idea who that is because that's the online photo world. The online photo world to me is very deceptive because you have a lot of people selling things. And so, you know, hey look at me. And basically it's based on numbers based on following and traffic.

Daniel Milnor: 00:30:39 And that's a very dangerous thing. Very different thing from saying, here's a really good photographer. I know tons of good photographers, elite level people who have no social following whatsoever. They just, cause they're busy working all the time. They're actually doing real assignments, they're doing editorial work, they're doing commercial advertising, fashion and fine art, automotive, et Cetera. So these two very different things. There was no internet when I got out of school. So my goal was to get into the, into the photography world for real. I wanted to make my living from photography and that meant I wanted to have health insurance, I wanted to have money in the bank. I wanted to, I didn't want to, I've never been a believer in this concept of the starving artist. I think that there are plenty of starving artists, but I think that that in some ways is something that you have to mentally get over.

Daniel Milnor: 00:31:25 There's no reason if you're a, if you're capable of making unique work and that's easier said than done, but if you're capable of making unique work, there's no reason to starve. You know, you have to, you have to be intelligent about it. But there's a way of doing it. At least there was at the time. So I got out of school knowing that I needed to get a job at a newspaper that was step one on. And then while I was at the newspaper, after I had been there for awhile, I would start freelancing for editorial clients on the side magazine clients. And then eventually when you had enough magazine clients, you would leave the newspaper and you would jump into the magazine world. And from the magazine world that led to commercial photography and from commercial photography to advertising where the serious money is, and that's still true to this day, is advertising. Photography is really where the massive budgets are. Not nearly as massive as they once were, but the ultimate end game was to be able to shoot advertising very sporadically, just enough for me to be able to pay for my own documentary projects. That's really the rub is most documentary photographers, it seems like, or a significant percentage are doing other kinds of work to try to make money to do their own projects. That's the, that's the key. It's hard. It's not, it's getting harder every day.

Raymond: 00:32:40 Yeah. So as a documentarian, in your own words, what would you say is your job as the photographer? What do you have to do or capture to consider your job a success?

Daniel Milnor: 00:32:55 I think you have to make original work. Um, that's, that's the key. It's very easy for me to go online and see what somebody else has done and go out and copy it. There's people who are doing that every day, every generation of photographer, every generation. There's a handful of people worldwide that come along that add something new to the conversation. I am not one of those people. I wish I was, but I'm not. But every, you know, you have Sebastian, you had, let's go way back. You have Jean Smith, w Jean Smith, documentary photographer, probably the best documentary photographer that's ever lived after Jean Smith. The next person that jumps out to me would be somebody who likes semesters. So Gado. And so Gado was not only a good photographer, but he was able to secure funding. He was able to secure longterm assignments. He was able to envision where his projects would be in 10 years time.

Daniel Milnor: 00:33:45 And so God would also work on a project for 10 years before it was before it was released. So he did, you know, uh, the, his first project, big one that got recognition was the famine in Ethiopia. And then he did a project in the Americas than he did workers. And these were 10 year increments. And so Gada would come to someone like Kodak where I worked at one point and he would say, I want x amount of money. And they would give it to him because he come in and say, if you give me this money, this is what's going to transpire. And it was all worked out over like a five, six, seven year period. And you're like, nobody else is doing this. While it's remarkable, you want to be able to key for really the key to be an a to being a photographer is to try to tell unique stories in a way that people can immediately recognize who did the work. And that's hard today when there's so many people working in. So much of the work you see looks exactly the same. And it's hard. It took 10 years of shooting every day to figure out what I was doing. Literally 10 years.

Raymond: 00:34:43 I believe it. I believe it. So was it, you'll work for the paper, which seems very running gun. Do it now let's tell the story right away, which is, maybe I'm wrong, but I would consider kind of short form. Uh, did that kind of, um, open you up to the idea of long form stuff or, or get you excited for that?

Daniel Milnor: 00:35:05 Yeah, so the, the daily paper, especially a big day daily where you're getting multiple assignments every day, you get up in the morning, you go into the paper, there's a little basket that has your name on it and it is a stack of paper. And each one of those is an assignment. And the beauty of that is that, and we're shooting at the time, I'm shooting 35 millimeter transparency film. So I'm shooting slide film. This is not easy. It's not easy. You've got to get it right. Your exposure has to be right. And the assignment range on a typical day would go something like this. Um, city council meeting in a windowless room with three people and overhead fluorescent lighting, which, which meant you had to put a green Magenta filter on your camera and a Green Gel on your strobe, balance it out for the, you know, with, with a hundred speed, Fuji Chrome pushed to three 20, you could shoot it f for at a, you know, 30th of a second with a strobe bounced off the ceiling and you do this and these pictures are horrible and they suck and no one should have ever assigned this.

Daniel Milnor: 00:36:02 But you've got it and you're like cursing the paper and you're cursing the person that assigned it and the people in the city council don't want you there and you don't want to be there and you, so you bang that thing out and you're like, okay, well get me Outta here. And then you get in the truck and your beeper goes off. At the time we had beepers, no cell phones and it's, and it's always nine one one. It's always a panic emergency. Hey, this fell through the gaps. You know, you have to go photograph the mayor. And so you go, okay. And you go and you shoot a portrait of the mayor. And then on the way back to the paper, there's a brush fire that fires up in downtown Phoenix and there's houses on fire and they're like, go shoot the brush fire.

Daniel Milnor: 00:36:40 So you're going from all one thing to another all day long. And it is the ultimate training ground. But it's frustrating because you don't get time. So on this on the side, on the days of the week that I was not working or from, if I work through 11 I was still up at whatever, six in the morning I would be out shooting projects. And so what you were hoping for was that the paper would occasionally would throw you a bone and say, look, we're going to give you a picture package on, you know, the community section. And they ended up running three, four, five pictures and that, what's your appetite for [inaudible]? This is great. And also my, you know, I'm, I'm at the half price bookstore in Austin looking at books of my idols. I'm looking at Salgado, I'm looking at Nachtwey, I'm looking at Jill Perez and I'm looking at an Alex Webb and Maggie Steber and I'm looking at the books and the work that they're putting out. And I'm like, that's who I want to be. I want, these are multi year, you know, 50 to a hundred images over a five to 10 year period on the same story. That is intriguing to me. It still is.

Raymond: 00:37:45 Yeah. Yeah. So, so when, when did you, what was, I guess your first assignment of, of this caliber? Was it something that you had given yourself that you decided to tackle? Did you get an idea from somewhere else? Was it commissioned?

Daniel Milnor: 00:37:59 So all of the best work I've ever done. This is really sad, but I think it's true for about 95% of all the photographers out there. The best work I've ever done was all self assigned because what I learned very quickly, and I'm, I just, I turned 50 in January, so I'm, I got the tail end of what I would consider the last sort of real photo industry that existed as ar, as the generations before us new. So there was a real editorial world. People were paying rates, you could get contracts, all of these things that are really out the window, these, so, but I learned very quickly that to get a multi-day assignment was rare. So you know, I'd get a three or four day assignment editorial assignment. Those were few and far between. Most of them were these quick hit things that I thought, this isn't helping me at all.

Daniel Milnor: 00:38:51 I'm shooting all these pictures and these pictures are other people's pictures. These are not mine. Yes. So in 19 1997 I'm living in southern California. I'm assisting for a photographer named Rick recommend. And Rick, who I think is actually from New Mexico. Um, Rick was really helpful to me because he sort of took me under his wing, taught me a lot of things about photography, not actual image making, but taught me about invoicing and assignments and working with editors and all this stuff that I had no experience with. I didn't know what I was doing. And so Rick, I assisted for Rick for several years, um, and he was super helpful to me and he would get multi-day assignments. He would do stuff for the geographic and life and time and people and all these things. So he was, uh, he was a working, uh, editorial guy all the time.

Daniel Milnor: 00:39:39 And so, but I realized that the odds of me becoming him were very slim. And so I decided my wife works for Canon or worked for Canon for 30 years, and she got a call from someone she knew that worked at Kodak and they said, Hey, we're looking for rep in southern California. And my wife said, oh, and she'd get my husband to do it, he'd be great. So I did that job for a few years and to get the job I had to sign a conflict of interest letter that said I would no longer do assignments because if I was doing assignments then I'd be competing with the people that I was trying to help at Kodak and I said, okay, I'll sign this if you sign something that says I get all the free film, Chem host and paper I can possibly use, which for Kodak was nothing.

Daniel Milnor: 00:40:23 Of course they signed it, they signed it, but it was not a big deal and so I sold all my equipment except for like a 35 millimeter thick guy to like 50 and a 35 and for the next four years, the only pictures I made were longterm projects of my own assignment and I realized at the end of four years what I was onto and that this was the best work I've ever done and the only work I wanted to do. So I didn't want to do magazines work anymore. I didn't want to do commercial photography, I just wanted to do longterm projects. That is very difficult to do in the u s because there's so little market for it. And every year the market was getting smaller and smaller and now there's virtually nothing. There's virtually no outlets for that kind of work outside of the books.

Raymond: 00:41:07 That is a shame. That is a shame. Uh, I know growing up and I, I talked about this in the beginner photography podcast Facebook group before. I've always said that kind of when I first got into photography, my dream was always like to follow the band, you know what I mean? Like, or follow the team from, from the underdogs to like winning the, you know, the world series that year or whatever it was, or coming out with a granny winning album. Um, and, but cause you never really saw those photos. You'd see everything in between and you would never see the entire book. And that's when, that's, that's where when you would go to these bookstores and you would see these photo books of these, of these singular events, you know, a singular topic that, that took up the entire book. It really puts you in that place because suddenly you knew the story and it didn't take any words at all. So I want to talk more about the storytelling aspect of photography. As I've said many times on the podcast that a great photo is so much more than just the sum of its settings and a lot of what makes a photo great is the story that it tells now specializing in these longterm stories. D, How much of the story is planned out and you know like, like, like you know what you want to capture versus just showing up and simply reacting?

Daniel Milnor: 00:42:30 Well it entirely depends on the project and it depends on two primary ingredients, which are time and access. How much time do you, and what's your access? Like assets back in the mid nineties was very easy. If you had a press credential, you get anything you want and you'd show up in the middle of nowhere and some part of the country and without a press pass and people would be like, hey, you want to come into our house, we'll make lunch. You could hang out, whatever those days are. Those days are gone. Everybody's suspicious now. So time and access are really critical. But for me, I was working at the newspaper in Austin at the daily texts and I was freelancing for like anyone who would hire me that doing these, you know, little assignments here and there. And I went to half price books one day, and I'll never forget this, I go into the photo book section and there's two books.

Daniel Milnor: 00:43:16 There's one book called Mexico, which is by a magnum photographer named my boss who I met 15 years ago. And his, his primary work at that time was a multi like 15 year product on Islam all around the world, which is this remarkable book, if you can get it. But he did this little book called Mexico and Mexico was basically all black and white, all like, uh, and it was just kind of random. It was like a personal notebook from Mexico. And I looked at it and I'm like, oh, I like this. And then I opened this book called Telex, Iran by a photographer named Jill Perez, who's a French guy who, a magnum photographer as well. And I just froze because one, I had never seen pictures like this before. They were so different and so sophisticated compared to what I was looking at. It literally freaked me out.

Daniel Milnor: 00:44:05 I wasn't entirely sure what to make of it, but the book was about the Iranian Revolution in 79 and GL had been there for a long time working on this project and this story and the book, the copy, the writing, and the book were telex is between he and that Magnum office in Paris. If I have that, if I remember this correctly. And what got me was that was the honesty in the telexes because here's a guy that's already established at Magnum. He's got multiple stories under his belt. He's an incredible photographer. He's a very intelligent guy that's way more than just a photographer. But there's a vulnerability in these telexes that I did not expect to see of of the, of the doubt that he had in his mind and the uncertainty and the challenges. And I was like, wow, I'm in the same boat that he is like he's, even though he's way better than I am.

Daniel Milnor: 00:44:54 And he's way more established and he's got these books, you know, he's, there's hope for me because he's, there are cracks in his armor, he's admitting. And so, but I didn't buy that book, which was a big mistake because that was a first edition telex Iran, which is now probably worth like $5,000 but anyway, I was like, I can't, I can't buy this. It's too intimidating for me to look at this. So I bought the Abbas book, which I still have, but it haunted me that I'd never bought this book. And then like five years ago, I'm sitting in a cafe in Brooklyn and I had my camera on the table in front of me, which is an emperor like a, and a guy walks by and he goes, nice camera. And I look up and it's jeal and it turns out that the coffee shop I was sitting at is like half a block from his studio.

Daniel Milnor: 00:45:38 And I said, holy cow. I go, he's Y'all Perez. And he sat down and then he goes, hey, let's go to the studio. And then I called the founder of blurb who was in New York at the time and I said, you're never going to believe this. I'm going to show Perez a studio. And she was like, Hey, I want to go to show a studio. So we went to a studio and we had lunch with him and he gave us like a t. It was amazing. And he and I wrote letters back and forth for quite a while and I told him, I said, I screwed up. I didn't buy your book. I should've bought your book, you know, in Austin all those years ago. And then something funny happened about six months ago, a friend of mine moved from California to Wisconsin, a really good friend, good photographer.

Daniel Milnor: 00:46:20 And he called me and he said, we're having a going away party. Make sure you come to the going away party. I said, okay. So we get to the party and he goes, where's your truck? I said, oh, I parked around there. He goes back your truck up over here. And he opens up the back of his truck and it's filled with photo books. And he said, look, I can't take these with me. And the first book on the stack on top was Tellico Iran and he's like, and he's like, here's the book I know you're really going to want no. So I got my copy. Wow. What an amazing story. What an amazing story. That must have felt really good in that moment. Oh Man. That book is, it's still freaks me out. I mean he gave me a stack of books that are theirs.

Daniel Milnor: 00:47:06 To me, books are evidence. You can't deny what's in there and they are, they are the quality bar that has already been set. So if I'm, if I'm coming to new Mecca, northern New Mexico and I'm going to do a project about the culture here, then I have books like Norman mouse costs, the descendants that, and Jimmy Santiago was the one who wrote the copy for the book, a Jack Woody at twin palms published it and Norman Mascot is the photographer. That book is there. It's my responsibility as a photographer to know about that book and to know what's in it. And I'm either going to add to that conversation or I'm not doing the project because it's already been done and it's been done at a very high level. And that's one of the big things that you'll see today with the online photo community is there's very little research done.

Daniel Milnor: 00:47:55 So with sometimes I'll see, I'll hear about a project and it's being hyped and everyone's like, oh, that's amazing and it's great, it's amazing. And I look at it and I go, not only is it not amazing, it was already done five years ago by So-and-so, and when they did a much better job, it's that the new photographer was able to learn how to market the thing and spin it with through social and marketing numbers and traffic and be like, well look, I'm getting all this buzz. But ultimately when you look at the work you go, this is just not that good. That one of the big misconceptions about photography in the digital age is that it's easy now because of all the technology and that is completely inaccurate. It's as difficult to make a good image today as it always has been. And it's just as rare because to get a lifetime sort of signature image you need, you need the right light, you need the right timing, the right composition.

Daniel Milnor: 00:48:44 And it's really hard. And it's rare. I mean, I go maybe if I'm lucky a couple of times a year I'll get something that I think would fit if I, if I've reduced my life down to the top 20 images, it's rare that something new comes along and knock something out of that original 20 it's really hard to get work like that. And so I think the Internet and the technology fools us into thinking that what we're making is really good. Most of the time it's not. And that's totally fine. I think as a photographer you need to be prepared to fail the vast majority of the time. And for some reason when I was in school, and again I'm 50 so it was a little bit different philosophy back then, but failure wasn't viewed in the same way. You kind of expect that you are going to fail most of the time.

Daniel Milnor: 00:49:29 And when you put your work up in front of your peers, they were going to tear you apart piece by piece. And that's typically what happened. And then suddenly failure wasn't viewed the same way and you weren't supposed to talk about it and you weren't supposed to admit it and whatever. But I think, I mean, look, if you're a photographer and I'm a photographer and you put your work down in front of me and I put my work down, you're going to see things you like and you're gonna see things you don't like. And you have to be able to say, look, Milner, you know, I, I see where you're going here, but you're not there yet. It's not good enough. And then I have to be able to set thick enough skin to go, hey, well thanks for being honest with me. What do you think I should do?

Daniel Milnor: 00:50:04 Like what's missing? What? How do I fill the gaps or whatever. And so that's the kind of education that you get when you're learning photography in a school. It's not about technical stuff. You know ut Austin, the tech pickle, literally the entire amount of time that will be spent on technical was probably less than a week. And the rest of the three and a half, four years of the stuff was had nothing to do with technique. It had everything to do with process about story, about editing, about sequencing, about design. Those are the important things. The equipment, nobody cared. I mean, you know, people had of Nikon FM body with a 28 and a roll of triax and they were like here. That was the extent of the gear conversation. Sure. W we probably spent more time talking about printing technique and photographic technique. Yeah, cause it's con it's complicated.

Raymond: 00:50:58 So, okay. So, so we talked about when you first started creating a a gallery of say 20 images of your life's work, it's very hard to, to, to break that, to move one of those out and replace it with a new photo today. Yeah. So if we wanted to do that, if we want to take better photos, just so that I'm clear, the best way to do that is constant critiquing, constant ripping apart our own photos to, to, to continue to grow. Is that it?

Daniel Milnor: 00:51:32 Well, I would say the first step is you have to practice, you know, photography is a, is a physical skill, right? It's, it's hand eye coordination. It's anticipation, it's knowledge of your subject matter. It's an understanding of light, of timing, of composition. But it's, it's like working out, it's a skill. It's like riding, riding your bicycle. You ride every day for 30 days. At the end of 30 days you're like, well, I feel pretty fit. But that first day you're riding and you're like, oh my God, I think I'm going to die. Like that's, and photography's the same. So for example, um, I had not worked on a project for quite awhile and two and a half weeks ago, I flew to Albania and I shot every day for two weeks in Albania trying to produce a project. And the first couple of days in Albania I was terrible.

Daniel Milnor: 00:52:16 I mean I'm looking at things happening and saying, oh, there was my phone. Oh, I should have shot that. I just wasn't good because I'm sloppy. I'm slow, I'm not looking, I'm not anticipating, I'm fumbling around and I've been doing this for 30 years. So practicing and staying sharp, um, I think being aware of what has already been done and, and understanding where you fit in as a photographer and what the context of you, what your context is in the grand scheme of things. Really important. Let's say for example, I want to do a project on the border. The border has been photographed in a million times over. I've done multiple projects down there myself as have many of my friends. So if I go to an art buyer or an agent in New York and I want to show my work and I'm showing a project on the border, I better know what's already been done.

Daniel Milnor: 00:53:02 Because if I put something in front of this person and I say, look at me, look how original I am. And she looks at me and says, you know, so-and-so, and so and so and so and so already did the same project. It makes me look really bad. So even if I, even if these people have already done the project and I can sit with her and I can say, look, I know that bill and Mary and Tom all did this project before, but this is why I did it and this is I'm Kay, I'm going to take the baton from them and I'm going to move at one step forward because I'm adding this other element or I have a different angle or I got better access. And so you're adding to what's been done and for whatever reason today, I see there's a lot of aversion to this idea that you have to know what's been done because people want to believe that they're amazing and they want to believe that very quickly that you know, you get out of school and you're like, I want to be famous, you know, I want big assignments and do this and that and you kind of, that's a hard game to win.

Daniel Milnor: 00:53:54 And I think if you're, there's a big difference between being hot for a year as a photographer and having a 30 year career. Those are two entirely. It's a, it's a marathon and a sprint and I'd always rather be in the marathon conversation and to be in the marathon you have to do some basic fieldwork and some groundwork and have some basic knowledge, so practicing having a fundamentally sound, but then also just learning who you are with a camera because if you can't make original photographs, there is no chance that you will have a 30 year career. None because there's too many people who can do everything. Jack of all trades, low level commercial photographer has a studio, what do you shoot? I'll shoot anything that comes in. I'll shoot a wedding, I'll shoot a portrait, I'll shoot a product, I'll shoot this, I'll shoot that.

Daniel Milnor: 00:54:41 There's 10 thousands of these people out there and what you end up doing is you get into these pricing wars where the price goes down and down and down because everybody's competing for these small jobs. That's a hard run. I'd much rather take my chances, have a part time job doing something else, learn who I am as a photographer or be able to make original work. And then when clients see that original work, they say if, if we want that kind of photography, the only person who can do it is that person that has value. That's why people still pay for photography is because certain people do things that nobody else can do and there's value in that.

Raymond: 00:55:16 Yeah. So you mentioned being not being a jack of all trades and if you want to have a 30 year career, you have to really be a master at something. You have had that 30 year career in your own words, what are you a master of wasting time? That's why you're here with me today. Yeah, that makes sense.

Daniel Milnor: 00:55:38 Photographically, I don't know. I don't know if there's anything that I would call, it's hard to call myself a master at anything. I think that there are things that I've learned how to do well and there's things that took me a long time to figure out, but once I figured them out, I think that they, they've helped. I think this is probably not a great answer for you, but I think what I realized a long time ago was that it wasn't enough anymore to just be a photographer. You need to be a more well rounded human being. Because here's the funny thing, there is a lot of photographers out there a lot more than ever. So let's say that you want a commercial assignment and the creative agency that's in charge of assigning the photographer, a photographer, they're looking around, they're looking around and when they meet with you, let's say you go to a portfolio review and there's, they're looking at 10 photographers that day and you walk up there and I walk up and our friends walk up and this are our buyers looking at you and she's looking at your portfolio and she's looking at my portfolio.

Daniel Milnor: 00:56:39 She's not just looking at your portfolio, she's looking at you and she's listening to you. And she's looking at your, how you're dressed, she's listening to your vocabulary to see you have a sense of humor. Does he have a massive ego? And more importantly, are the clients going to like this person? Can I leave this person alone on the set with a client and they will not embarrass me? Will the clients like them? Will they, if something goes wrong, will they be able to handle it? What's their, what's their crew like? What's their plan B? Like all of these different things that in photo school, they don't teach you anything about this. Right? So you learned that being a photographer is about being a well rounded, intelligent human being that is continually on the hunt for new knowledge. The photography will come with practice and with sort of perseverance. But all the peripheral things to me are more important today than they ever have been because it's way more than the pictures. That's it.

Raymond: 00:57:37 So what was I going to get into this for a few more questions, but is this one of the reasons why you are, um, according to your website, you, you believe that, uh, social media that you are a complete and total non-believer of social media and that these platforms have done irreparable damage to human communication skills and attention span?

Daniel Milnor: 00:58:02 Jeez. Did I say that? Well, it sounds, whoever wrote the copy on your website, that sounds negative. Uh, yeah. But yeah, in essence, I believe exactly that, but there's a little background here. So I don't want social media. I think things like Instagram, uh, are proving themselves to be one of the most detrimental, uh, contributions to our society that I think I've ever seen. I always kind of joke with my friends. I'm not sure that that's a species we will survive. Instagram, you know, it's unleashing a LE, a level of consumerism on the planet that we simply can't sustain. It's unleashing a, a battle against the environment that we can't sustain or can't win. But this goes way back. So, um, and here's the ironic part is that I was one of the first people that I know in the entire world to be on Facebook.

Daniel Milnor: 00:58:57 I went to New York to do an assignment and it was for someone that had something to do with the Central Park Committee. So I'm talking to her in New York and she says Facebook. And I'm like, what's that? And she goes, oh, this is new thing called Facebook. When you get back to California, you should sign up for it. And so I'm like, okay. I fly back to California, I sign up on Facebook. No one I know is on Facebook, not a single person, it's just me and I'm on there. And there's other people on there. I'm like, Hey, this is kinda cool. And same thing when in scrap hats, I'm walking down the street in San Francisco. Friend mine calls me and goes, hey, there's this new thing called Instagram. You should check it out. I stop in the middle of the street, I download the app and I start Fitbit, fitbit, start taking pictures and posting on Instagram.

Daniel Milnor: 00:59:35 So I was on these things long before any of my friends were on there and including all my friends who are basically given their entire life to be platforms. But six years ago I was here in New Mexico. My birthday is January 1st I woke up on my birthday and I was like, I don't believe in this anymore. This is not what we were originally sold of what this is. I said, I am watching this. These networks destroy my friends. They are like skittish, scared little creatures who can't get through a conversation without looking at their phone. They're insecure, their work has gone downhill and the work they're producing is only being produced to try to drive numbers on these social networks. And it's garbage cause it looks like everybody else's, it looks like Instagram content. So I called the founder of blurb and I called him the marketing director of Laura, who was my immediate boss at the time.

Daniel Milnor: 01:00:26 And I said, uh, I know this is probably isn't going to go over well, but I'm deleting seven networks right now and I don't ever want to go back on his networks. And the marketing director said at the time, she said, I hate them too. I think this is all, you know, go ahead. So I thought, oh, that's great. And then the founder said, go ahead and do it, but write about why, why does you're doing it. And so I did and I did a couple, I deleted social media, which is by far the highest traffic post I've ever done. And look at you went to those numbers. Well it's because here's something funny happened. So two weeks goes by and I went through detox. I would literally, in moments of like call, just pick up your phone just to look at first. And then I just pick it off for no reason.

Daniel Milnor: 01:01:09 And I'd be in the field shooting and I'd go, oh, I should check like Facebook. As I'm walking down the street somewhere trying to shoot, I'd be thinking about Instagram and I thought this is bad. So two weeks detox. And then after two weeks I kind of came through the veil and I looked back and I thought, man, I am I, that was just not good. So I, uh, wrote a post, the posted got all this traffic. I don't know the specific numbers, but it was by far more than any post done. But something funny happened, kind of tragic, is that people began to write me asking for help. They were saying, I'm physically addicted. I lost my house, I lost my job, I lost my family. I can't stay off of Facebook. I'm on Instagram 60 hours a week. I'm on nerves, nervous, I'm unhappy.

Daniel Milnor: 01:01:53 I'm taking depression medication. So I had to write a follow up post and saying, I'm not a medical person. I'm not a psychiatrist. If you need medical help, please seek, you know, attend, seek medical attention or psychiatric help. But that's not my role. I'm just not qualified to, to help in that way. That post was six years ago. I get emails every week from people all over the world saying, help me help, help. Um, you know, I can't get out. And that's the, one of the things that's very interesting to me is that I think all of us are probably touched by someone in our family or close to our families that has substance abuse problem, right? Either alcohol, drugs, whatever, and you and people are pretty thirsty. Uh, it's pretty easy for people to say, yeah, that's an addiction. You know, it's too bad.

Daniel Milnor: 01:02:36 Get help, whatever. Then you move down the scale and you come to things like sex and gambling and you go, well, I've got a, I've got, I'm a sex addict, or you know, I'm a gambling addict and you get up. There's a lot less people that want to say, Yep, those are legitimate addictions. You know, there's a lot of people that go, oh, those are just choices. You should just stop. Then you slide down the scale even further and you get to technology and there are so few people who want to admit that something like Instagram is a physical addiction, but it is, it is a dopamine physical addition. And I have seen it ruined. So many of my friends who are photographers whose just their entire existence is based on that app and it's not, I don't want any part of it. I have.

Daniel Milnor: 01:03:22 So I deleted all my accounts and then about four years later, the marketing director of blurb at the time said to me, it would really help us if you had an Instagram account. And I said, never gonna happen. I'm never going to do that. And so about 15 minutes later, or I'm sitting right next to her, she says, I just created an account in your name game. Don't worry. Don't worry about it. We will manage it. And I said, okay. And so two days goes by and I'm like, I better look at what they're putting on there cause it has my name on it and none, it's not their fault, but they don't know me. You know, they're not intimate with me as a photographer. They don't know my philosophy. And so the work they are putting on, the captions, the style, the look at it said, no, I can't do this.

Daniel Milnor: 01:04:02 So I started managing the account and then that lasted until I guess about six or eight months ago and I thought, why am I doing this? This, I don't like anything about this. I don't think it's helping blurb really in particular. So I quit posting and I haven't heard anything. So go back and look, why are you not posting? But you know, I think, I think anyone who gives themselves two weeks away from social, I think you'll be amazed because if you can survive two weeks cold Turkey, no access, no like sneaking peaks, no nothing. If you do two weeks, you will look back and you will see it in a very different light and I can almost guarantee that it's going to make you at least take pause to one, how much time you're putting in and two, how fake it is, how phony the entire thing is. You know there's, there's a big difference between being a good photographer and being someone who knows how to build following. Those are both, those are both legitimate skills. Absolutely. Building a following is a legitimate skill because it can give you the freedom and independence to operate on your own. But don't confuse the fact of someone with a big following is a good photographer because very often those two things do not overlap.

Raymond: 01:05:19 So, so then, so then let me ask you a question. Let me ask you a question because Canon, uh, not too long ago, uh, had hired a photographer to do an ad campaign and then they ended up letting that photographer go because even though they said that this photographer was, uh, was, was well suited for this ad campaign, she didn't have enough Instagram followers, so she let her go. So this is, this is just horrible to hear, you know, it, it's devastating to a lot of new photographers. Uh, how has, uh, not having a social presence affected you and um, I suppose for lack of a better term, your, your ability to, to get work?

Daniel Milnor: 01:06:01 Well, a couple of things. Number one for Canon to do that, it's just dumb. That's just a dumb and it's short, shortsighted, and then it looks really, the optics on that looks really bad as well. Um, but that's all the companies are doing that and the companies are lost, right, because all of this stuff came on so fast. They were caught so flat-footed and they're playing catch up. And a camp, a company like Canon Kennedy's a very conservative, slow moving company. That's a little bit like a big cruise ship. You know, you turn the, the, the, the uh, the, the steering wheel basically, what am I blanking on the a, you know the, the wheel ship. The wheel. Yeah. There we go. You turn the wheel with the ship. It doesn't just turn left. It keeps going straight for like eight miles and then it slowly makes a turn.

Daniel Milnor: 01:06:42 That's what these companies alike and they're lost because they're the mark. The industry's going away. Professional photography industry is disappearing and people are not buying equipment like they once were. And these people are, the companies are a little bit desperate. They're a little bit, you know, crazy trying to figure out what the next trend is. And so that's a hard thing for somebody like a company like Canon to have to over come and somebody is in the same boat like a Fuji where whoever it is, they're all in the same boat. I mean all these people, they're all pandering to Instagram followers and the crazy part is for a company like Canon, I shoot Fuji Company like Fuji. They're going after these Instagram stars. 99.9% of all those images are made with phone. They're not made with food cameras or Canon cameras. That makes no sense whatsoever and instead of slowing down and actually hiring somebody who could make original work that's going to last longer than five minutes online, that would be interesting because there's plenty of people using canon equipment in the world who are doing amazing stuff.

Daniel Milnor: 01:07:39 I was able to do a project a couple of years ago with a guy named Ron [inaudible] who who's a war photographer, documentary guy out of New York City, one of the founders of the seven agency. Ron's canon shooter. Right. Just off the top of my head. Yeah. Let's say that I had x amount of money for budget and I have no idea what his social following is. No idea. I don't care. But that's a guy who's capable. If I had budget to say, Okay Ron, is there something happening in the world that you've always wanted to do that you haven't been able to do and what can we do with it that's completely different, that's going to make people look and think in a different way. That interesting marketing campaigns and me not pandering to his social following thinking that their following is going to be your following. So for me, I'm in a unique spot.

Daniel Milnor: 01:08:20 So in 2010 I decided I did not want to work as a photographer anymore because I had done it for 25 years ago, almost 30 years, and I just wanted to do something else with my life. So it was a Tuesday afternoon. I just deleted my email account and I'm like, I'm done. I'm out. And my wife said, well, what are you going to do? And I said, I'm going to move to New Mexico and I'm going to change my career. And so I was kind of lurking around California still. And my phone rang and it was the founder of blurb, a woman named Eileen Gittens. And um, Eileen said I'd been on blurbs, advisory board going back to like 2007. And she called and said, hey, I heard you're not what's up with the photography thing? And I said, yeah, I'm going to move on, do something else.

Daniel Milnor: 01:09:00 And she said, why don't you work with them? And so what started as kind of an informal part time thing within six months was a full time job. And it's been by far the best job I've ever had in my life. It's been great helping people make books. There's been a lot of travel. I've been able to see the industry from a direction that I would've never been able to see it as a photographer. And I work with photographers, designers, artists, illustrators, educators, all over the world, Australia, Europe, Canada, the u s et Cetera. So it's given me this great perspective. And the other thing it's done is it's allowed me too, when I pick up a camera, only work on the projects that I want to work on. So I don't need to do assignments anymore. I don't have to do shoots, I don't want to do.

Daniel Milnor: 01:09:45 But here's the funny part is the second, this sounds so counterintuitive, but it's important. The second I said, I'm not a photographer anymore. I started doing projects. People would come to me and they'd go, Hey, uh, you want to work with us and do this? And I'm like, how did you even find me? The fact that I had disassociated myself with being labeling myself a photographer almost opened the door because what I realized was more important than the photography was the fact that I was somebody who has ideas, right? I, I read every day. I'm, I try to spend as much time as possible thinking about things. Um, I'm constantly trying to educate myself about things, stuff that I don't know about. I'm reading a book right now about the San Andreas fault and just ironically after the quakes of last week and people were like, why are we reading that book?

Daniel Milnor: 01:10:34 And I'm like, cause I don't know anything about the fall. Nothing. Oh by the way, you know the guy Richter, they're from the Richter scale. You know, he um, apparently never experienced a heavy duty earthquake in his entire life. And after he passed away, he owned a house in Northridge, California. That was then in possession, I believe, of his son, which was filled with all this stuff. And in 94, it burned down in the North Ridge earthquake. So it talks about, I talk about irony, but here's the weird thing is when your knowledge base expands beyond photography, you're suddenly interesting to people far beyond photography. So I was able to do something last year as well, a contract for a creative contract for a, with a, an organization that's in an industry that I know nothing about. And they came to me and said, look, you have interesting ideas.

Daniel Milnor: 01:11:20 You know, we want to hire you for a year and we'll give you a contract. We'll do this and that. And so I did that and I wasn't looking for that. It's not something I particularly wanted to do, but I thought, okay, this is a challenge. And they did not want a photographer, even though I did photographs for them. They want it stuck. Someone who had creative ideas, you know, how do you get this group to talk to this group? And if you're going to get this group to talk to this group, what are you going to make in the middle? Is it a film? Is it a still is it's copies of the magazine, is it a book? Like how's it gonna work? And so I have ideas like that.

Raymond: 01:11:52 W there was so much there to unpack. A what? A what a what a journey. Um, okay. I gotta I gotta no, no, no, no. It's not a mess. It's not a message. Just this whole time that you're talking, I'm thinking, oh, that's a great point. I want to go off of there. That's a great point. I want to go up there. That's a great point. I want to go up there, but at the same time I still have, I still have a few questions that I really wanted to touch on today. One of them was blurb. Um, I know that you're a huge proponent of uh, creating books, especially, you know, not being on Facebook, not sharing your images on Instagram, but having that physical copy there yourself. Um, when you talk to me about, about creating that book, talk to me about that first time I, well I guess I have to rephrase the question because you, you, you, uh, were in the position to have your images printed in a newspaper. So now that maybe people don't have as many images printed in the newspaper, what do you tell people about getting their images printed in a book?

Daniel Milnor: 01:12:59 So a couple of things. 1993 or 94, I made my first trip to New York as a photographer, which at the time is what you did. A lot of people still do that, that New York is where the people with who make decisions are based. It's where the people who have budgets that are based, et Cetera, and so I went and I showed my work to throw agents at the time primarily, and I realized that not a lot of these people, believe it or not, had a loop or light table to look at the time. Your, your portfolio is a single page of 20 slides. Like you throw it down, threw it down on a light table and they looped it and they went through and I was like, God, there has to be a better way to do this. So I went, I left New York, I went back to Phoenix, I went to the newspaper when an incident, the design department, and I said, I think I want to make my own book because that would be way easier to read than this page of slides.

Daniel Milnor: 01:13:50 And they were like, eh, go away. You're an idiot. Takes too long, you don't know what you're doing, blah, blah, blah. So three months later I had my first book, which was not really a book. It was like glorified oversized color copy that was laminated and bound and I made 10 all I could, I could only afford 10 copies. You could do this at Kinko's. Now I'm like five minutes, but was like, oh my God, this is a book. This is great. And so what I did is I took a list of the 10 clients that I really wanted to work for, National Geographic, German, Geo Stern, all these magazines around the world. And I was like, I'm going to send a copy to them. And of course this was snail mail and no announcement, just blindly mailing these things off. And a funny thing happened was they started contacting me, German Geo.

Daniel Milnor: 01:14:35 My phone rang and it was this very heavily accented German accent, female voice. And she's like, you know, we got your portfolio. This is on the believable. How did you do this? What is this? You know? And they were so intrigued by what I had, was able to do. And then the photo editor at the National Geographic at the time I got in Kent Koberstein, he wrote me a hand, like full page handwritten letter saying we've never seen a portfolio like this before. Like how did you do this? And so that's what got my bookmaking on the road was all the way back in 93 so when blurb came along it was sort of a natural progression of that. But the book is very important. And the funny thing is you have, you know, the digital online technology proponents and I think all those things are great. Digital, online and technology are all fine, but there is this a different level of consideration when it comes to print, especially at high levels of the industry because print signifies a couple of things.

Daniel Milnor: 01:15:29 And number one is it signifies concerted thought specific thought about your work because there's a big difference between putting your portfolio on an iPad and putting it into a book form because the book makes you, forces you to apply critical thinking to your work. What's the best image? What's the cover? What's the sequence? What's my ed? Is this good enough to last in this book or is it not good enough? The same thing, what happened back in the day when you go in the dark room, I'd go shoot, I'd worked for a day, I'd come back processed the film and your head, you're like sort of compiling what you have or you don't have and I would mix chemistry. I would get in the dark room. I would take my negative, get it in the enlarger, put it in the enlarger, turn the enlarger on and stand there and stare at this thing and say to myself, is it good enough?

Daniel Milnor: 01:16:18 Is it good enough for me to spend the next three hours making one print of this image if it's not good enough. There were times where I sat there and I go, it's not good enough, and I took it out of the larger, I poured the chemistry back into the bottles and I left because I didn't have something. So the book is a great way to get your head around what you actually have. And the book is confrontational because you have to put your phone down to look at it. So when you go into a meeting with someone and you hand them a book, they're not looking at the book and looking at their phone at the same time. They have to take it. They use both hands, they flip through it, it's tangible, and they're so inexpensive and writing, even if you, even if you did a copy of a book and no one in the world saw it except you, it's totally work that I do it all the time. By the end of day tomorrow I will make the first, I'll print the first test copy of the magazine I created from Albania.

Raymond: 01:17:12 Oh wait, wait. So, so I uh, actually had this on the podcast before. Every year I make a family yearbook, um, uh, of me and my wife and we have two kids. And, uh, before we had children, I quickly realized I am making all these photos and okay, let me step back. When I was growing up, I would go visit my grandma and we would look through those shoe boxes of images and they were great. And then when they were done, they were done. We would put them back and then the next year I'd go back for summer and we'd look through them again. And uh, you know, after getting the, what the iPhone four or whatever, and then, uh, getting into a digital SLR, photography, I'm taking all these photos, but that's only half of the equation. You're never looking at them again. You'll make them, you'll create this image or edit it, whatever.

Raymond: 01:18:03 And then you never look at it again. And I thought to myself, and luckily this was right before we had our first child, uh, Charlie, that I didn't want that to happen. I didn't want that to happen. And Luckily, uh, that is luckily light room has a partnership with blurb to be able to create books. Uh, and that's what I did. And every year since then, I have done so. And I can tell you that one of my favorite memories every single year as time has gone on is the second week of January when we get that book in the mail and then the family sits down, we all sit down together and we look through the book of our previous year. And then that of course sparks, well let's look at all the other books as well. And that to me brings back the joy of photography more so than even taking the photo. Um, because oftentimes you can, you kind of forget, you know, you kinda forget what had happened, especially if it's just a snapshot with a cell phone in the moment. But getting it in print is really, really something special. So I love this message that you are, I love, I love what you're sharing. I love blurbs message to trying to make photography tangible, you know, and just get it in your hands because that is the missing piece of, of photography. Um,

Daniel Milnor: 01:19:17 yeah. Watch what you're doing. Doing an annual book on the family is way more difficult than what I'm doing. And, but what you're doing, the annual with the family is what a lot of people that using blurb are trying to do. And there's a million ways to get derailed. You know, you shoot a lot of photos, you don't know how to, where to store them, you don't know how to tap a log down, can't find them. And so there's a lot of things that keep people from doing this. Um, I think one of the things to toss out the window is the idea of a perfect book. You know, people, I've see them just grind, grind themselves to a halt because, oh, it's gotta be perfect. Gotta be perfect. I don't know what a perfect book is. I've probably never seen on. And if I didn't see on, it's probably going to be really boring.

Daniel Milnor: 01:19:54 So, you know, I'm in Albania and I'm shooting and every night I'm designing, I'm taking the work that I made that day and I'm designing a magazine. So when I left Albania, I had 90 pages of magazine already fairly well thought out. I am changing it around quite a bit now, but by, I sort of gave myself a deadline of this Friday saying I want to have the first test copy and then when I say test copy, it's a test copy. It's not perfect. It's not even remotely close. There's going to be a million things wrong about it. But to see it in print, uh, is a whole different ballgame. It's, to me, print is a, is the great equalizer because again, the online photo community and in many ways there's a lot of people, very successful people in online photo community that have never printed a single photograph.

Daniel Milnor: 01:20:36 And I'm not talking about dark room printing, I'm talking about any kind of printing. And so bookmaking for them is like climbing Mount Everest. They go, Whoa, I don't know how to do that. And I saw it, I saw it in my photo students going back 10 years ago where people would like, I used to teach in Latin America. Every year I would go to Peru and teach a workshop and people would shoot 10,000 images. And I'm like, I had, I had someone shoot 22 gigs one morning shooting one morning, and then I try to edit on an iPad. And I said, why would you shoot 22? Like what could you possibly do that? And for her, for her it was about quantity. You know, she'd been listening to online community. People talk about, you know, well the first 500 Jews of the day doesn't count, you know, because they're never going to count.

Daniel Milnor: 01:21:21 I'm like, who told you this? This is absolute insanity. So I was there, I was in Albania for two weeks. I shot about a thousand pictures total, um, film. Oh, this was all digital, digital. Um, Yup. And uh, I edited the 193 that was the first sort of one-star big chunk. And then that went down to about 50 pictures. And then within the 50, there's about 20. That would be pictures that will sort of be the nucleus of what the project is. But that's in that, you know, I'm not, I don't think any of those were, were, are gonna knock anything in my sort of top 20 lifetime work out of the way. The trip really wasn't about that, but it was fun.

Raymond: 01:22:04 Yeah, it's a jigsaw puzzle I would imagine. I would imagine. Um, I feel like I could sit here and talk to you for another two hours or so, but, um, I, I really do want to be, um, conscious of your time. You've shared so much with me, Daniel. My next question is how can people find you online? Obviously you're not going to say Facebook or Instagram, so where, where would you like people to find out more about you?

Daniel Milnor: 01:22:33 The easiest way to find me online is a website called shifter, s, h. I, f, t, e, r, and it's dot media, not.com shifted or.media that has like the audio interviews that I do. It has, there's one tab of photography which rarely ever changes cause I'm lazy. It has a creative tab that talks about books, other people's photography, other people's books. I have an adventure tab that talks about cycling, hiking, fishing, climbing, et Cetera, which I do a lot of. And there's a tab about yoga, which I'm a big fan of and, and also to have about Lyme disease, which I got six years ago. And there's a global community of people that are all suffering from the same thing. There's a lot of stuff on there, probably more than anyone wants to see, but there is some good photography stuff from time to time.

Raymond: 01:23:19 I love it. I'm going to go check that out right away as well. A, I will put the links or the link to that in the, in the show notes. So if anybody's interested in just whatever podcast app you're listening on, just swipe up and you'll be able to see some of Dane's, uh, images as well as links there. But, uh, Dan, again, thank you so much for, for coming on and sharing just a piece of the knowledge that you have accumulated over the past 30 years of, uh, of, of, of being a photographer. I, I've really enjoyed my time with you today. So again, thank you so much for coming on.

Daniel Milnor: 01:23:49 Absolutely. Thanks for happen. And I hope that somebody, uh, actually gets something from my weird views

Raymond: 01:23:57 if, if anybody did, it was me as well. But I know, I know that. Plenty of that as well. Uh, uh, too. So again, uh, thank you so much.

Daniel Milnor: 01:24:05 Yup. Absolutely. Thank you.

Raymond: 01:24:07 Wow. I got to tell you, that was honestly one of my favorite episodes that, uh, were interviews rather than I have ever had the pleasure of hosting. Dan was a fantastic guest with so much to share. Um, my biggest takeaway from this interview was absolutely just how much more connected, uh, Dan came after he, uh, got off social media. Now there is, here's the thing, there's a lot of, um, talk or suggestions or blog posts out there that, you know, say, you know, we should get off social media. We should get off social media, we should get off social media or that it's, you know, ruining society. And I get that. Right. But then there's also a lot of people who make all of their money from social media, right. I the majority of my money through social media, through finding, um, clients, bride specifically as for me, Facebook just makes it, uh, the easiest platform and the cheapest, uh, to be able to do so.

Raymond: 01:25:09 So, um, while I, uh, you know, would love to cut out social media from my life completely, and I loved hearing Dan's take, I don't want everybody to think that the, you have to go out and, and get rid of it, you know. Um, but being more intentional about how you use social media, about how much time you're on social media, I don't think, I don't think that it would hurt. You know what I mean? I don't, I don't think that spending less time on Facebook or Instagram is really going to hurt your business because, uh, even if you do use social media for business like myself, you know, that's not all that you use it for. You go on there, you read dumb articles, you watch dumb videos and you waste a lot of time and, you know, ultimately do think about it a lot.

Raymond: 01:26:03 So, um, I really appreciate, uh, Dan coming on and sharing his, uh, view and I envied the ability to be able to just go completely off the grid and not worry about status updates of people who I knew, you know, in high school, you know, 13 years ago. So, um, I thought that it was just fantastic. I thought that it was an absolutely fantastic interview and I hope that you got a lot out of it as well. So, uh, I know that this was a long one today, so I'm gonna cut this outro short. Um, I would love to know what your biggest takeaway was from this episode. Please feel free to share it in the beginner photography podcast, Facebook group, and that's it. I will see it there and uh, we can continue the discussion. So that is it for this week. Until next time where I have some really exciting things, I will be sharing a, I want you to get out. I want you to keep shooting, I want you to stay safe and most importantly for this year, I really want you to focus on yourself. So that is it. I'll see you next time. We'll love you all.

outro: 01:27:11 If you enjoy today's podcast, please leave us a review in iTunes or your favorite podcast player and continue the conversation with Raymond and other listeners of the podcast by joining the beginner photography podcast Facebook group today. Thank you. We'll see you again next week.

Automated Transcription by Temi.com